Bosch F01U323389 03_B6512_PEG Installation Manual (Program Entry Guide B6512) B6512 Peg En US 23243314699
User Manual: Bosch Installation Manual (Program Entry Guide B6512) B6512 IP control panel, 96 points
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 256
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Control Panel B6512 en Program Entry Guide Control Panel Table of contents | en 3 Table of contents 1 Remote Programming Software 16 2 Compliance Settings 17 2.1 SIA CP-01 Verification 17 2.2 ULC Compliance 18 2.2.1 CAN/ULC-S304 compliance 18 2.2.2 CAN/ULC-S559, Required Programming 18 2.2.3 CAN/ULC-S559, Recommended Programming 23 2.3 Supervision configuration 27 3 Panel Wide Parameters 29 3.1 Phone and Phone Parameters 29 3.1.1 Phone Destination 1 (to 4) 29 3.1.2 Phone Destination 1 (to 4) Format 29 3.1.3 DTMF Dialing 29 3.1.4 Phone Supervision Time 30 3.1.5 Alarm on Fail 30 3.1.6 Buzz on Fail 30 3.1.7 Expand Test Report 31 3.1.8 PSTN Compatibility 31 3.2 On Board Ethernet (IP) Communicator 31 3.2.1 IPv6 Mode 31 3.2.2 IPv4 DHCP/AutoIP Enable 32 3.2.3 IPv4 Address 32 3.2.4 IPv4 Subnet Mask 32 3.2.5 IPv4 Default Gateway 33 3.2.6 IPv4 DNS Server IP Address 33 3.2.7 IPv6 DNS Server IP Address 33 3.2.8 UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) Enable 34 3.2.9 ARP Cache Timeout (sec.) 34 3.2.10 Module Hostname 34 3.2.11 TCP / UDP Port Number 34 3.2.12 TCP Keep Alive Time (sec.) 35 3.2.13 IPv4 Test Address 35 3.2.14 IPv6 Test Address 35 3.2.15 Alternate IPv4 DNS server IP address 35 3.2.16 Alternate IPv6 DNS server IP address 36 3.3 Cellular Plug-in Module 36 3.3.1 Inbound SMS 36 3.3.2 Session Keep Alive Period (min.) 36 3.3.3 Inactivity Timeout (min.) 37 3.3.4 Reporting Delay for Low Signal Strength (sec.) 37 3.3.5 Reporting Delay for No Towers (sec.) 38 3.3.6 Outgoing SMS Length 38 3.3.7 Network Access Point Name (APN) 39 3.3.8 Network Access Point User Name 39 3.3.9 Network Access Point Password 39 3.3.10 SIM PIN 39 3.4 Cloud Remote Connect 40 3.4.1 Cloud Remote Connect (Ethernet) 40 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 4 en | Table of contents Control Panel 3.4.2 Cloud Remote Connect (Cellular) 40 3.5 IP cameras 40 3.5.1 Camera name 41 3.5.2 Camera name (second language) 41 3.5.3 URL or IP address 41 3.6 Bosch Connected Cameras 41 3.6.1 RCP+ port # 42 3.6.2 Service password 42 3.6.3 Supervision period (sec.) 42 3.7 Live (video) 42 3.7.1 Port # 42 3.7.2 Use HTTPS? 43 3.7.3 User Name 43 3.7.4 Password 43 3.8 Reporting Overview 44 3.9 Report Routing 46 3.9.1 Fire Reports 51 3.9.2 Gas Reports 52 3.9.3 Burglar Reports 52 3.9.4 Personal Emergency Reports 53 3.9.5 User Reports 53 3.9.6 Test Reports 54 3.9.7 Diagnostic Reports 54 3.9.8 Output Reports 55 3.9.9 Auto Function Reports 56 3.9.10 RPS Reports 56 3.9.11 Point Reports 57 3.9.12 User Change Reports 57 3.9.13 Access Reports 58 3.10 Communicator, overview 58 3.10.1 Primary Destination Device 59 3.10.2 Backup Destination Device 60 3.10.3 RG Same Network Receiver 61 3.10.4 Time Synchronization 61 3.11 Enhanced Communication 62 3.11.1 Reporting Format 62 3.11.2 Network Address 62 3.11.3 Port Number 63 3.11.4 Receiver Supervision Time 63 3.11.5 Poll Rate (sec.) 64 3.11.6 ACK Wait Time (sec.) 66 3.11.7 Retry Count 66 3.11.8 AES Key Size 67 3.11.9 AES Encryption Key 67 3.12 SDI2 RPS / Enhanced Communication 67 3.12.1 Enable Enhanced Communication? 67 3.12.2 Answer RPS Over Network? 68 3.12.3 RPS Address Verification 68 3.12.4 RPS Network Address 68 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Table of contents | en 5 3.12.5 RPS Port Number 68 3.13 Power Supervision 69 3.13.1 AC Fail Time 69 3.13.2 Resend AC Fail 69 3.13.3 AC Fail Display 69 3.13.4 AC Fail / Restoral Report 69 3.13.5 AC Tag Along 69 3.13.6 AC / Battery Buzz 70 3.13.7 Battery Fail / Restoral Report 70 3.14 RPS Parameters 70 3.14.1 RPS Passcode 70 3.14.2 Log % Full 70 3.14.3 Contact RPS if Log % Full 71 3.14.4 RPS Call Back 71 3.14.5 RPS Line Monitor 71 3.14.6 Answer Armed 72 3.14.7 Answer Disarmed 72 3.14.8 RPS Phone # 73 3.14.9 RPS Modem Speed 73 3.15 Miscellaneous 73 3.15.1 Duress Type 73 3.15.2 Cancel Reports 74 3.15.3 Call for Service Text - First Language 74 3.15.4 Call for Service Text - Second Language 75 3.15.5 On Site Authorization for Firmware Update 75 3.15.6 Enclosure Tamper Enable 76 3.15.7 Fire Summary Sustain 76 3.15.8 Fire Supervision Event Type 76 3.15.9 Fire Trouble Resound 77 3.15.10 Early Ambush Time 77 3.15.11 Second Ambush Code 77 3.15.12 Abort Window 77 3.15.13 Passcode Length 78 3.15.14 Swinger Bypass Count 79 3.15.15 Remote Warning 80 3.15.16 Crystal Time Adjust 80 3.15.17 Part On Output 80 3.15.18 Early Area Armed Output 81 3.15.19 Daylight Saving Time 81 3.15.20 Date Format 81 3.15.21 Date Delimiter 81 3.15.22 Time Format 82 3.15.23 Time Zone 82 3.16 Personal Notification Destinations 84 3.16.1 Description 84 3.16.2 SMS Phone # / email address 84 3.16.3 User Language 84 3.16.4 Method 85 3.17 Personal Notification Reports 85 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 6 en | Table of contents Control Panel 3.18 Personal Notification Routing Attempts 86 3.19 Email Server Configuration 86 3.19.1 Email server name/address 87 3.19.2 Email server port number 88 3.19.3 Email server authentication/encryption 88 3.19.4 Authentication user name 88 3.19.5 Authentication password 88 4 Area Wide Parameters 89 4.1 Area / Bell Parameters, Open / Close Options 89 4.1.1 Area Name Text 89 4.1.2 Area Name Text (Second Language) 89 4.1.3 Area On 90 4.1.4 Account Number 90 4.1.5 Force Arm/Bypass Max 91 4.1.6 Delay Restorals 91 4.1.7 Exit Tone 91 4.1.8 Exit Delay Time 91 4.1.9 Auto Watch 92 4.1.10 Restart Time 92 4.1.11 Duress Enable 93 4.1.12 Area Type 94 4.1.13 Two Man Rule? 96 4.1.14 Early Ambush? 97 4.1.15 Fire Time 97 4.1.16 Fire Pattern 98 4.1.17 Burg Time 98 4.1.18 Burg Pattern 98 4.1.19 Gas Pattern 99 4.1.20 Single Ring 99 4.1.21 Bell Test 100 4.1.22 Account O/C 100 4.1.23 Area O/C 101 4.1.24 Disable O/C in Window 101 4.1.25 Auto Close 101 4.1.26 Fail to Open 102 4.1.27 Fail to Close 102 4.1.28 Latest Close Time 102 4.1.29 Restricted O/C 103 4.1.30 Part On O/C 103 4.1.31 Exit Delay Restart 104 4.1.32 All On- No Exit 104 4.1.33 Exit Delay Warning 104 4.1.34 Entry Delay Warning 105 4.1.35 Area Re-Arm Time 105 4.2 Area Arming Text 106 4.2.1 Area name text 106 4.2.2 Account is On text 106 4.2.3 Area # is On text 106 4.2.4 Area # is not Ready text 107 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Table of contents | en 7 4.2.5 Area # is Off text 107 5 Keypads 108 5.1 Keypad Assignments 108 5.1.1 Keypad Name 108 5.1.2 Keypad Name (Second Language) 108 5.1.3 Keypad Type 108 5.1.4 Area Assignment 109 5.1.5 Keypad Language 109 5.1.6 Scope 109 5.1.7 Area in Scope 110 5.1.8 Passcode Follows Scope? 110 5.1.9 Enter Key Output 110 5.1.10 Passcode Enter Function 111 5.1.11 Dual Authentication 112 5.1.12 Dual Authentication Duration 112 5.1.13 Assign Door 112 5.1.14 Trouble Tone 113 5.1.15 Entry Tone 113 5.1.16 Exit Tone 113 5.1.17 Arm Area Warning Tone 114 5.1.18 Close Door Warning Tone 114 5.1.19 Idle Scroll Lock 114 5.1.20 Function Lock 114 5.1.21 Abort Display 115 5.1.22 Cancel Display 115 5.1.23 Nightlight Enable 115 5.1.24 Nightlight Brightness 115 5.1.25 Silence Keypress Tone 116 5.1.26 Show Date and Time 116 5.1.27 Keypad Volume 116 5.1.28 Keypad Brightness 116 5.1.29 Disable Presence Sensor 117 5.1.30 Disable Token Reader 117 5.1.31 Enable Tamper Switch 117 5.1.32 Feature Button Option 117 5.2 Global Keypad Settings 118 5.2.1 A key Response 118 5.2.2 A Key Custom Function 118 5.2.3 B Key Response 119 5.2.4 B Key Custom Function 119 5.2.5 C Key Response 119 5.2.6 C Key Custom Function 120 5.2.7 Manual Silent Alarm Audible on Comm Trouble 120 5.2.8 Comm Trouble Options 121 5.3 Global Wireless Keyfob 121 5.3.1 Keyfob Function A Custom Function 121 5.3.2 Keyfob Function B Custom Function 121 5.3.3 Keyfob Panic Options 122 6 Custom Functions 123 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 8 en | Table of contents Control Panel 6.1 Custom Function Text 123 6.2 Custom Function Text (Second Language) 123 6.3 Functions 123 7 Shortcut Menu 126 7.1 Function 126 7.2 Set/Clear all 126 7.3 Address # 127 8 Output Parameters 128 8.1 Area Wide Outputs 129 8.1.1 Alarm Bell 129 8.1.2 Fire Bell 129 8.1.3 Reset Sensors 130 8.1.4 Fail to Close/Part On Armed 130 8.1.5 Force Armed 130 8.1.6 Watch Mode 131 8.1.7 Area Armed 131 8.1.8 Area Off 131 8.1.9 Area Fault 132 8.1.10 Duress Output 132 8.1.11 Part On Fault 132 8.1.12 Silent Alarm 132 8.1.13 Gas Bell 133 8.2 Panel Wide Outputs 133 8.2.1 AC Failure 133 8.2.2 Battery Trouble 133 8.2.3 Phone Fail 133 8.2.4 Comm Fail 134 8.2.5 Log % Full 134 8.2.6 Summary Fire 134 8.2.7 Summary Alarm 135 8.2.8 Summary Fire Trouble 135 8.2.9 Summary Supervisory Fire 135 8.2.10 Summary Trouble 136 8.2.11 Summary Supervisory Burg 136 8.2.12 Summary Gas Output 136 8.2.13 Summary Gas Supervisory Output 137 8.2.14 Summary Gas Trouble Output 137 8.3 Output Configuration 138 8.3.1 Output Source 138 8.3.2 Output Text 138 8.3.3 Output Text (Second Language) 138 8.3.4 Hide From User 139 9 User Configuration 140 9.1 User Assignments (passcodes) 140 9.1.1 User Name 140 9.1.2 Passcode 140 9.1.3 Remote Access 140 9.1.4 User Group 141 9.1.5 Area Authorities 141 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Table of contents | en 9 9.1.6 Site Code 142 9.1.7 Card Data 142 9.1.8 Inovonics Keyfob RFID (B820) 142 9.1.9 RADION Keyfob RFID (B810) 143 9.1.10 Supervised 143 9.1.11 User language 143 9.2 User Groups 144 9.2.1 User Group Name 144 9.3 User (keypad) Functions 144 9.3.1 All On, Delay 144 9.3.2 All On, Instant 144 9.3.3 Part On, Instant 144 9.3.4 Part On, Delay 145 9.3.5 Watch Mode 145 9.3.6 View Area Status 145 9.3.7 View/Delete Event Memory 146 9.3.8 View Point Status 146 9.3.9 Walk Test (all Non-Fire Burg Points) 146 9.3.10 Walk Test All Fire Points 146 9.3.11 Send Report (Test/Status) 147 9.3.12 Door Control 147 9.3.13 Set Keypad Brightness / Volume / Keypress 147 9.3.14 Set/Show Date and Time 147 9.3.15 Change Passcodes 148 9.3.16 Add/Edit User 148 9.3.17 Delete User 148 9.3.18 Extend Close 148 9.3.19 View Event Log 149 9.3.20 User Command 7 149 9.3.21 User Command 9 149 9.3.22 Bypass a Point 149 9.3.23 Unbypass a Point 149 9.3.24 Reset Sensor 150 9.3.25 Change Output 150 9.3.26 Remote Program 150 9.3.27 Go to area 150 9.3.28 Display Panel Type and Revision 151 9.3.29 Service Walk All Points 151 9.3.30 Change Skeds 151 9.3.31 Walk Test All Invisible Burg Points 151 9.3.32 Silence Function 152 9.3.33 Custom Function 152 9.3.34 Keypad Programming 152 9.4 Authority Levels 153 9.4.1 Authority Level Name 153 9.4.2 Authority Level Name (Second Language) 153 9.4.3 Disarm Select 153 9.4.4 All On, Delay 154 9.4.5 All On, Instant 154 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 10 en | Table of contents Control Panel 9.4.6 Part On, Instant 154 9.4.7 Part On, Delay 155 9.4.8 Watch Mode 155 9.4.9 View Area Status 155 9.4.10 View Event Memory 156 9.4.11 View Point Status 156 9.4.12 Walk Test (All Non-Fire Burg Points) 156 9.4.13 Walk Test All Fire Points 156 9.4.14 Walk Test All Invisible Burg Points 157 9.4.15 Service Walk All Points 157 9.4.16 Send Report (Test / Status) 158 9.4.17 Cycle Door 158 9.4.18 (Un)Lock door 158 9.4.19 Secure Door 159 9.4.20 Change Keypad Display 159 9.4.21 Change Date and Time 159 9.4.22 Change Passcodes 160 9.4.23 Add User Passcodes / Card / Level 160 9.4.24 Delete User Passcode / Card/ Level 160 9.4.25 Extend Close 160 9.4.26 View Event Log 161 9.4.27 User Command 7 161 9.4.28 User Command 9 161 9.4.29 Bypass a Point 162 9.4.30 Unbypass a Point 162 9.4.31 Reset Sensor(s) 162 9.4.32 Change Output(s) 162 9.4.33 Remote Program 163 9.4.34 Go to Area 163 9.4.35 Display Panel Type and Revision 163 9.4.36 Change Skeds 164 9.4.37 Custom Function 164 9.4.38 Force Arm 164 9.4.39 Send Area Open/Close 165 9.4.40 Restricted Open/Close 165 9.4.41 Part On Open/Close 165 9.4.42 Send Duress 165 9.4.43 Arm by Passcode 166 9.4.44 Disarm by Passcode 166 9.4.45 Security Level 167 9.4.46 Disarm Level 167 9.4.47 Function Level 168 9.4.48 Keyfob Arm 169 9.4.49 Keyfob Disarm 169 9.4.50 Firmware Update 169 9.4.51 Silence Function 170 10 Points 171 10.1 Point Assignments 171 10.1.1 Source 171 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Table of contents | en 11 10.1.2 Text 171 10.1.3 2nd Language Text 172 10.1.4 Profile (Index) 172 10.1.5 Profile (Index) Description 172 10.1.6 Area 173 10.1.7 Debounce 173 10.1.8 Output 173 10.1.9 RADION RFID (B810) 174 10.1.10 RADION Device Type 174 10.1.11 Inovonics RFID (B820) 176 10.2 Cross Point Parameters 176 10.2.1 Cross Point Timer 176 10.3 Point Profiles 176 10.3.1 Point Profile Text (First Language) 177 10.3.2 Point Profile Text (Second Language) 177 10.3.3 Point Response overview 178 10.3.4 Point Type 178 10.3.5 Point Response 179 10.3.6 Entry Delay 185 10.3.7 Entry Tone Off 185 10.3.8 Silent Bell 186 10.3.9 Ring Until Restored 186 10.3.10 Audible After Two Fails 186 10.3.11 Invisible Point 187 10.3.12 Buzz on Fault 187 10.3.13 Watch Point 188 10.3.14 Output Response Type 188 10.3.15 Display as Device 189 10.3.16 Local While Disarmed 189 10.3.17 Local While Armed 189 10.3.18 Disable Restorals 190 10.3.19 Force Arm Returnable 190 10.3.20 Bypass Returnable 190 10.3.21 Bypassable 191 10.3.22 Swinger Bypass 191 10.3.23 Report Bypass at Occurrence 191 10.3.24 Defer Bypass Report 192 10.3.25 Cross Point 192 10.3.26 Alarm Verify 193 10.3.27 Resettable 193 10.3.28 Alarm Abort 194 10.3.29 Wireless Point Supervision Time 194 10.3.30 Custom Function 195 10.3.31 Monitor Delay 195 10.3.32 Delay Response, Disarmed 195 10.3.33 Delay Response, Armed 196 10.3.34 Circuit Style 196 10.3.35 Normal State 197 10.4 Point Profile descriptions 197 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 12 en | Table of contents Control Panel 10.4.1 24-Hour 197 10.4.2 Part On 197 10.4.3 Interior 198 10.4.4 Interior Follower 199 10.4.5 Keyswitch Maintained 199 10.4.6 Keyswith Momentary 199 10.4.7 Open / Close Point 200 10.4.8 Fire Point 200 10.4.9 Aux AC Supervision 200 10.4.10 Gas Point 200 10.4.11 Custom Function 200 11 Schedules 201 11.1 Open/Close Windows 201 11.1.1 Opening window timeline 201 11.1.2 Opening_Closing windows table 202 11.1.3 Sunday through Saturday 203 11.1.4 Open Early Begin 203 11.1.5 Open Window Start 204 11.1.6 Open Window Stop 205 11.1.7 Close Early Begin 205 11.1.8 Close Window Start 206 11.1.9 Close Window Stop 206 11.1.10 Xept on Holiday 207 11.1.11 Holiday # 207 11.1.12 Area # 208 11.2 User group windows 208 11.2.1 User Group 208 11.2.2 Sunday through Saturday 208 11.2.3 Group Enable Time 209 11.2.4 Group Disable Time 209 11.2.5 Xept Holiday 209 11.2.6 Holiday # 209 11.3 Skeds 210 11.3.1 Sked Name Text 210 11.3.2 Sked Name Text (Second Language) 210 11.3.3 Time Edit 210 11.3.4 Function 211 11.3.5 Time 212 11.3.6 Date 212 11.3.7 Sunday through Saturday 212 11.3.8 Xept on Holiday 213 11.3.9 Holiday # 213 11.4 Holiday indexes 213 11.4.1 Schedule 213 11.5 Sked Function descriptions 213 11.5.1 All On Delay 213 11.5.2 All On Instant 214 11.5.3 Part On Delay 214 11.5.4 Part On Instant 214 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Table of contents | en 13 11.5.5 Disarm 214 11.5.6 Extend Close 214 11.5.7 Bypass a Point 214 11.5.8 Unbypass a Point 214 11.5.9 Unbypass All Points 214 11.5.10 Reset Sensors 214 11.5.11 Turn Output On 214 11.5.12 Turn Output Off 215 11.5.13 Toggle Output 215 11.5.14 One-Shot Output 215 11.5.15 Reset All Outputs 215 11.5.16 Delay 215 11.5.17 Answer RPS 215 11.5.18 Contact RPS 215 11.5.19 Contact RPS User Port 216 11.5.20 Send Status Report 216 11.5.21 Send Test Report 216 11.5.22 Send Test on Off Normal 217 11.5.23 Go to Area 217 11.5.24 Watch On 217 11.5.25 Watch Off 217 11.5.26 Show Date & Time 217 11.5.27 Sound Watch Tone 217 11.5.28 Set Keypad Volume 218 11.5.29 Set Keypad Brightness 218 11.5.30 Trouble Silence 218 11.5.31 Alarm Silence 218 11.5.32 Execute Custom Function 218 12 Access 219 12.1 Door # 219 12.1.1 Door Name Text 219 12.1.2 Door Name Text (second language) 219 12.1.3 Door Source 219 12.1.4 Entry Area 219 12.1.5 Associated Keypad # 219 12.1.6 Custom Function 220 12.1.7 Door Point 220 12.1.8 Door Point Debounce 221 12.1.9 Interlock Point 221 12.1.10 Auto Door 222 12.1.11 Fire Unlock 222 12.1.12 Disarm on Open 222 12.1.13 Strike Time 223 12.1.14 Shunt Time 223 12.1.15 Buzz Time 223 12.1.16 Extend Time 223 12.1.17 Deactivate on Open 224 12.1.18 RTE Shunt Only 224 12.1.19 RTE Input Debounce 224 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 14 en | Table of contents Control Panel 12.1.20 REX Shunt Only 225 12.1.21 REX Input Debounce 225 12.1.22 Access Granted 226 12.1.23 No Entry 226 12.1.24 Enter Request 226 12.1.25 Exit Request 226 12.1.26 Failure Mode 226 12.1.27 Enclosure Tamper 227 12.2 Global Access settings 227 12.2.1 Card Type 227 13 Automation / Remote App 228 13.1 Automation Device 228 13.2 Status Rate 228 13.3 Automation Passcode 228 13.4 Mode 1 Automation Ethernet Port Number 229 13.5 Remote App 229 13.6 Remote App Passcode 229 14 SDI2 modules 230 14.1 B208 Octo-input 230 14.1.1 Enclosure Tamper 230 14.2 B308 Octo-output 230 14.2.1 Module Enclosure Tamper 231 14.3 (B42x) IP Communicator 231 14.3.1 Module Enclosure Tamper 231 14.3.2 IPv6 Mode 232 14.3.3 IPv4 DHCP/AutoIP Enable 232 14.3.4 IPv4 Address 232 14.3.5 IPv4 Subnet Mask 233 14.3.6 IPv4 Default Gateway 233 14.3.7 IPv4 DNS Server IP Address 233 14.3.8 IPv6 DNS Server IP Address 234 14.3.9 UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) Enable 234 14.3.10 HTTP Port Number 234 14.3.11 ARP Cache Timeout (sec.) 234 14.3.12 Web/USB Access Enable 235 14.3.13 Web/USB Access Password 235 14.3.14 Firmware Upgrade Enable 235 14.3.15 Module Hostname 235 14.3.16 Unit Description 236 14.3.17 TCP/UDP Port Number 236 14.3.18 TCP Keep Alive Time 236 14.3.19 IPv4 Test Address 236 14.3.20 IPv6 Test Address 237 14.3.21 Web and Automation Security 237 14.3.22 Alternate IPv4 DNS server IP address 237 14.3.23 Alternate IPv6 DNS server IP address 237 14.4 B450 cellular 238 14.4.1 Inbound SMS 238 14.4.2 Session Keep Alive Period (min.) 238 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Table of contents | en 15 14.4.3 Inactivity Time Out (min.) 238 14.4.4 Reporting Delay for Low Signal Strength (sec.) 239 14.4.5 Reporting Delay for Single Tower (sec.) 239 14.4.6 Reporting Delay for No Towers (sec.) 240 14.4.7 Outgoing SMS Length 240 14.4.8 SIM PIN 241 14.4.9 Network Access Point Name (APN) 241 14.4.10 Network Access Point User Name 242 14.4.11 Network Access Point Password 242 14.5 B520 aux power supply 242 14.5.1 Module Enable 243 14.5.2 Module Enclosure Tamper 243 14.5.3 One or Two Batteries 243 14.6 Wireless Receiver 243 14.6.1 Wireless Module Type 244 14.6.2 Module Enclosure Tamper 244 14.6.3 System (Repeater) Supervision Time 245 14.6.4 Low Battery Resound 245 14.6.5 Enable Jamming Detection 245 14.7 Wireless Repeater 245 14.7.1 Module Enclosure Tamper 246 14.7.2 RADION RFID (B810) 246 14.7.3 Inovonics RFID (B820) 246 15 Hardware switch settings 248 15.1 Keypad address 248 15.2 B208 Octo-input Module switch settings 249 15.3 B308 Octo-output Module switch settings 250 15.4 B426 Ethernet Communication Module switch settings 250 15.5 B450 Cellular Module switch settings 250 15.6 B520 Power Supply switch settings 251 15.7 B810 RADION wireless receiver switch settings 251 15.8 B820 Inovonics wireless receiver switch settings 251 15.9 B901 Access Module switch settings 251 16 Configuring for Cellular Service 252 17 IP Address and Domain Name formats 254 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 16 1 en | Remote Programming Software Control Panel Remote Programming Software Remote Programming Software (RPS) is an account management and control panel programming utility for Microsoft Windows operating systems. Operators can perform remote programming, account record storage, remote control, and diagnostics for specific control panels. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Compliance Settings | en 2 Compliance Settings 2.1 SIA CP-01 Verification 17 Default: No Selections: – – Yes. Check the following parameters for SIA CP-01 compliance: – Duress Type, page 73 – Alarm Bell, page 129 – Exit Delay Time, page 91 – Burg Time, page 98 – Exit Delay Warning, page 104 – Entry Delay Warning, page 105 – Entry Delay, page 185 – Passcode Length, page 78 – Remote Warning, page 80 – Swinger Bypass Count, page 79 – Cancel Reports, page 74 – Two Man Rule?, page 96 ? – Early Ambush?, page 97? – All On, Instant, page 154 – Part On, Instant, page 154 – Passcode Enter Function, page 111 No. Do not check parameters for SIA CP-01 compliance. This parameter specifies whether or not this control panel requires SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction compliance. If RPS receives programming data from the control panel that is not SIA CP-01-compliant, the SIA CP-01 Compliance window opens. Parameters that are out of compliance are listed. Making the parameters SIA CP-01 compliant: 1. Enter a value under the Desired Value column that is between the compliant SIA minimum and maximum values. 2. Select one of the following options: – Set the SIA CP-01 Verification to No and store the existing data in this account. – Leave the SIA CP-01 Verification Parameter to Yes and store the data in the Desired Value field in this account. If a control panel account contains parameters that do not comply with SIA CP-01, and you retrieve that data using the Unattended Mode feature, RPS stores the non-compliant data regardless of the SIA CP-01 parameter's setting. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 18 en | Compliance Settings Control Panel For each of the SIA CP-01-compliant parameters, ensure that the Minimum View and Edit Security Levels match the minimum settings for this parameter. For example, if this parameter's minimum view and edit security levels are 5, each compliant parameter must have its levels set to 5. RPS Menu Location Compliance Verification > SIA CP-01 Verification 2.2 ULC Compliance Default: No Selections: – Yes. Adjust control panel operation for UL Canada (ULC) compliance. – No. Do not adjust for ULC compliance. This parameter causes the control panel to disregard input from all sensors for a minimum of 120 seconds at system start-up. When sensor processing is started, the control panel reports a unique event prior to reporting any point events. Additionally, no power-induced events are reported unless it is determined that the fault will not be restored within the 120 second delay time. RPS Menu Location Compliance Settings > ULC Compliance 2.2.1 CAN/ULC-S304 compliance CAN/ULC-S304, SIGNAL RECEIVING CENTRE AND PREMISE BURGLAR ALARM CONTROL UNITS This Standard covers construction and performance requirements for control units and accessories for intrusion alarm systems, including protected premises control units and accessories for local or signal receiving centre connections, and signal receiving centre alarm receiving equipment, including recording equipment. The equipment is intended for use in premises, safes and vaults. Control panel programming requirements Setting the ULC Compliance parameter to Yes is the one control panel programming requirement for compliance with the CAN/ULC-S304 standard. 2.2.2 CAN/ULC-S559, Required Programming CAN/ULC-S559, Standard for Equipment for Fire Signal Receiving Centres and Systems CAN/ULC-S559 covers requirements for fire signal receiving centres and systems, which include transmitting and receiving equipment, proprietary fire receiving centre equipment and control unit accessories. Fire signal receiving centre systems include protected premise unit and receiver for ordinary (non-hazardous) indoor and outdoor locations. Programming methods, test, service and other software intended for use with the equipment for fire signal receiving centres and systems are included in the evaluation of the equipment. Signal receiving units used in fire signal receiving centres, satellite centres, signal processing centres and bridging centres are also covered by the requirements in this Standard. COMPLIANCE SETTINGS > UL Canada Compliance Set the COMPLIANCE SETTINGS > UL Canada Compliance parameter to Yes. PANEL WIDE PARAMETERS > Report Routing In the Route Group 4 column: – Set Fire Reports, Gas Reports, Burglar Reports, Personal Emergency Reports, User Reports, and Test reports to No. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Compliance Settings | en – 19 Set Output Reports, Auto Function Reports, RPS Reports, Point Reports, User Change Reports, and Access Reports to No. – Verify Diagnostic Reports is set to Custom. The next steps configure the Custom settings. PANEL WIDE PARAMETERS > Report Routing > Fire Reports > Fire Cancel Set the PANEL WIDE PARAMETERS > Report Routing > Fire Reports > Fire Cancel parameter for each Route Group (1 to 4) to No. Figure 2.1: Fire Cancel PANEL WIDE PARAMETERS > Report Routing > Diagnostic Reports For the Route Group 4 column, set SDI2 Device Failure to Yes. Set the remaining reports to No. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 20 en | Compliance Settings Control Panel Figure 2.2: SDI2 Device Failure PANEL WIDE PARAMETERS > Communicator > Primary Destination Device For the Route Group 4 column, set Primary Destination Device to Destination 4 for the type of device in use (for example, Onboard IP, Destination 4 if the control panel sends reports using the on-board Ethernet. Figure 2.3: Primary Destination Device 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Compliance Settings | en 21 PANEL WIDE PARAMETERS > Enhanced Communication > Destination 4 In the Destination 4 column, set Network Address to: 0.1.1.1 (this address is intentionally not a real address on the network). Set the Poll Rate to 0. Set the ACK Wait Time (sec.) to 5. POINTS > Point Profiles (Point Indexes) Configure Point Profiles 1, 4, and 6 as shown below. It is important to configure the parameters in order. Point Profile 1 Set Alarm Abort to: No. Set Point Profile Text (First Language) to: Fire Panel Trouble. Set Point Type / Response / Circuit Style > Point Type to: Fire Point. Set Point Type / Response / Circuit Style > Circuit Style to: Single EOL (1KΩ) or Single EOL (2KΩ). Set Response to: 3. Point Profile 4 Set Point Profile Text (First Language) to: Fire Panel Alarm. Set Point Type / Response / Circuit Style > Point Type to: Fire Point. Set Point Type / Response / Circuit Style > Circuit Style to: Single EOL (1KΩ), Single EOL (2KΩ), or Dual EOL. If you set Point Type / Response / Circuit Style > Circuit Style to Single EOL (1KΩ) or Single EOL (2KΩ), set Response to: 1. If you set Point Type / Response / Circuit Style > Circuit Style to Dual EOL, set Response to: 0. Point Profile 6 Set Point Profile Text (First Language) to: Fire Panel Supervisory. Set Point Type / Response / Circuit Style > Point Type to: Fire Point. Set Point Type / Response / Circuit Style > Circuit Style to: Single EOL (1KΩ), Single EOL (2KΩ), or Dual EOL. If you set Point Type / Response / Circuit Style > Circuit Style to Single EOL (1KΩ) or Single EOL (2KΩ), set Response to: 9. If you set Point Type / Response / Circuit Style > Circuit Style to Dual EOL, set Response to: 2. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 22 en | Compliance Settings Control Panel Figure 2.4: Point Profiles Figure 2.5: Point Type Response and Circuit Style POINTS > Point Assignments Set the POINTS > Point Assignments, Text and Profile parameters, for on-board points 1, 2, and 3 as follows. Point 1 Set Point Assignments > Text to: Fire Panel Alarm. Set Point Assignments > Profile to: 4 - Fire Panel Alarm 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Compliance Settings | en 23 Point 2 Set Point Assignments > Text to: Fire Panel Trouble. Set Point Assignments > Profile to: 1 - Fire Panel Trouble Point 3 Set Point Assignments > Text to: Fire Panel Supervisory. Set Point Assignments > Profile to: 6 - Fire Panel Supervisory Figure 2.6: Fire Panel Supervisory 2.2.3 CAN/ULC-S559, Recommended Programming Control panel silencing of fire alarm panel alarm, trouble, and supervisory events When control panels are configured as described below, they automatically silence keypads connected to the control panel for fire, trouble, and supervisory events from the fire panel. Notice! Automatic silence not available for B3512 control panels Automatic silencing of fire alarm panel alarm, trouble, and supervisory events is not available for the B3512 control panel. Users must silence these events at the keypad. CUSTOM FUNCTIONS > Custom Function 128 Set Custom Function 128 > Custom Function Text to: Silence. Set Custom Function 128 > Function 1 to: Trouble Silence (set Parameter 1 to: Area 1). Set Custom Function 128 > Function 2 to: Alarm Silence (set Parameter 1 to: Area 1). Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 24 en | Compliance Settings Control Panel Figure 2.7: Custom Function 128 Figure 2.8: Area 1 selection OUTPUT PARAMETERS > Panel Wide Outputs For virtual outputs: Set Panel Wide Outputs > Summary Fire to: 9. Set Panel Wide Outputs > Summary Fire Trouble to: 10. Set Panel Wide Outputs > Summary Supervisory Fire to: 19. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Compliance Settings | en 25 Figure 2.9: Panel Wide Outputs POINTS > Point Profiles (Point Indexes) Configure Point Profile 20 as shown below. It is important to configure the parameters in order. Point Profile 20 Set Point Profile Text (First Language) to: CF: Silence. Set Point Type / Response / Circuit Style > Point Type to: Custom Function. Leave Point Type / Response / Circuit Style > Circuit Style at the default: Single EOL (1KΩ). Leave Point Type / Response / Circuit Style > Response at the default: 7. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 26 en | Compliance Settings Control Panel Figure 2.10: Point Profile 20 POINTS > Point Assignments Set the POINTS > Point Assignments, Source, Text, and Profile parameters, for points 9, 10, and 19 as follows. Point 9 Set Point Assignments > Source to: Ouput. Set Point Assignments > Text to: Fire Alarm Active. Set Point Assignments > Profile to: 20 - CF: Silence Point 10 Set Point Assignments > Source to: Ouput. Set Point Assignments > Text to: Fire Trouble Active. Set Point Assignments > Profile to: 20 - CF: Silence Point 19 Set Point Assignments > Source to: Ouput. Set Point Assignments > Text to: Fire Supervisory Active. Set Point Assignments > Profile to: 20 - CF: Silence 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Compliance Settings | en 27 Figure 2.11: Point Assignments 2.3 Supervision configuration Optimizing data used for supervision: Installation Commercial Commercial High Type Burg Burg (ULC (UL1610) S304) Hourly Supervision Medium Daily Security or Supervision Household Fire Required 200 sec 180 sec 300 sec 1 hr 4 hr 25 hr Extended Extended High Standard Standard Backup Supervision Interval Recommen ded Service Supervision Plan Panel Programming Receiver 200 sec Custom 300 sec 1 hr – NFPA 4 hr – Supervision Medium Time Security Panel Poll n/a 89 sec n/a n/a n/a 25 hr n/a Rate (sec) Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 28 en | Compliance Settings Control Panel Installation Commercial Commercial High Type Burg Burg (ULC (UL1610) S304) Hourly Supervision Medium Daily Security or Supervision Household Fire Panel ACK n/a 15 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 5 n/a n/a n/a n/a Wait (sec) Panel Retry Count 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 3 Panel Wide Parameters 3.1 Phone and Phone Parameters 3.1.1 Phone Destination 1 (to 4) 29 Default: Blank Selections: – Blank - the control panel dials no phone number. Leaving this parameter blank does not disable the Phone Destination. To prevent use of the phone destination, do not assign it to a Communicator, overview, page 58. – 0-9 - the control panel dials these characters. – C - inserts a 2 second pause in the dialing sequence. Some telephone networks may require a pause during or immediately after dialing. To insert a pause, insert one or more C's in the dialing sequence. – D - the control panel begins dialing when a dial tone is detected, or when the initial 7second dial tone detect period expiries. To extend the dial tone detect period, insert a D at the beginning of the dialing sequence (before the phone number). – # and * - inserting these characters in the dialing sequence performs the same function as if they were pressed on a telephone keypad. For example, if you need a star (*) to access your long distance service. This parameter sets the telephone number the control panel dials to send reports to the central station receiver. Configuring Phone Destinations for Call Waiting Dialing a call waiting sequence on a non-call waiting line prevents the system from successfully sending reports to the central station receiver. If you configure a Phone Destination with a phone number that includes a sequence to cancel call waiting and choose that Phone Destination as the Primary Destination Device, page 59 for a Route Group, configure another Phone Destination without the call waiting cancel sequence and choose it as the Backup Destination Device, page 60 Device for the Route Group. If the customer cancels call waiting service without notifying their security company, the control panel is still able to send reports using the Backup Destination Device. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Phone and Phone Parameters > Phone Destination 1 to 4 3.1.2 Phone Destination 1 (to 4) Format Default: Modem4 Selections: – Modem4 - the control panel sends expanded Modem4 reports to the central station receiver. – Contact ID - use this format when the central station receiver does not support the Modem4 format. This parameter sets the format for sending reports to the central station receiver. Both Modem4 and Contact ID formats include point and user numbers in the reports sent to the receiver. Only Modem4 reports include expanded information including point text. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Phone and Phone Parameters > Phone Destination (1 to 4) Format 3.1.3 DTMF Dialing Default: Yes Selections: Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 30 en | Panel Wide Parameters – Control Panel Yes - the control panel dials phone numbers using DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency, touch-tone). – No - the control panel dials phone numbers using pulse dialing. Before setting this parameter to No, verify the PSTN (Public Switch Telephone Network) the control panel is connected to supports pulse dialing. RPS Menu Location: Panel Wide Parameters > Phone and Phone Parameters > DTMF Dialing 3.1.4 Phone Supervision Time Default: 0 Selections: – 0 - disabled, no phone line supervision. – 10-240 (seconds) - number of seconds (in 10 second increments) a phone line must be faulted before the control panel creates a phone line fail event. The control panel tests the phone line approximately nine times a minute. If it detects a fault on the phone line that lasts the number of seconds set at this parameter, it creates a phone line fail event. Keypads display phone line fail event and initiate a trouble tone if the Buzz on Fail, page 30 and Trouble Tone, page 113 parameters are set to Yes. If the Alarm on Fail, page 30 parameter is set to Yes, keypads display an alarm event and sound the alarm tone. When the control panel detects a normal phone line (fault is cleared) for the number of seconds set at this parameter, it creates a phone line restoral event. The control panel sends phone line fail and phone line restoral reports when the events occur. They are also included in Expand Test Report, page 31 initiated from a keypad or by a Skeds, page 210. Phone line fail events are assigned to Area 1 and use the Area 1 configuration. For example, the Area 1 account number is used for reporting. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Phone and Phone Parameters > Phone Supervision Time 3.1.5 Alarm on Fail Default: No Selections: – Yes - initiate an alarm response for phone line fail events. – No -. initiate an alarm response for phone line fail events To use this Alarm on fail feature, enable phone line supervision at the Phone Supervision Time, page 30 parameter. The alarm response for phone line fail events includes: – activating the Area 1 Burglar Bell, – activating the alarm tone at keypads – sending alarm reports RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Phone and Phone Parameters > Alarm on Fail 3.1.6 Buzz on Fail Default: No Selections: – Yes - the control activates a panel-wide trouble tone at all keypads when a phone line fail event occurs. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en – 31 No - the control does not activate the trouble tone at any keypad when a phone line fail event occurs. To use this Buzz on fail feature, enable phone line supervision at the Phone Supervision Time, page 30 parameter. Panel-wide trouble tones are enabled and disabled for individual keypads at their Trouble Tone parameter (Trouble Tone, page 113). The default for the Trouble Tone parameter for all keypads is No (panel wide troubles do not sound). RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Phone and Phone Parameters > Buzz On Fail 3.1.7 Expand Test Report Default: No Selections: – Yes - Send expanded test reports. – No - Do not send expanded test reports. When this parameter is set to Yes, the control panel expands test reports to include off-normal system status information. The control panel expands manually initiated test reports and Sked initiated (scheduled) test reports. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Phone and Phone Parameters > Expand Test Report 3.1.8 PSTN Compatibility Default: USA Selections: – USA – Australia – New Zealand This parameter configures the control panel and the B430 Plug-in Telephone Communicator to support public switched telephone networks (PSTN) in the USA, Australia, or New Zealand. Notice! PSTN requirement for Australia / New Zealand, disable RPS answer armed/disarmed If you set this PSTN Compatibility parameter to Australia or New Zealand, you must set Panel Wide Parameters > RPS Parameters > Answer Armed and Answer Disarmed to 0 (disabled). RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Phone and Phone Parameters > PSTN Compatibility 3.2 On Board Ethernet (IP) Communicator 3.2.1 IPv6 Mode Default: No Selections: – Yes - Enable IPv6 – No - Disable IPv6 (Use IPv4 mode). This parameter configures IP communication for IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6) or IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4) When IPv6 Enable is set to Yes, the IPv4 parameters are read only (grayed out and not editable). Set DHCP/AutoIP enable to Yes. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 32 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel When IPv6 Enable is set to No, the IPv6 parameters are read only (grayed out and not editable). RPS Menu Locations Panel Wide Parameters > Onboard Ethernet Communicator > IPv6 Mode, 3.2.2 IPv4 DHCP/AutoIP Enable Default: Yes Selections: – Yes - enable DHCP to automatically configure the IP Address, IP Default Gateway, and IP DNS Server Address. – No - manually configure the IP Address, IP Default Gateway, and IP DNS Server Address. Use this setting if there is no DHCP service. DHCP enables a computer to be automatically configured which eliminates the need for interaction by a network administrator. DHCP also provides a central database that tracks computers that connect to the network, which prevents two computers from accidentally being configured with the same IP address. AutoIP enables dynamic IP addresses to be assigned to a device when the device is started up. DHCP requires a DHCP server. When this parameter is set to Yes, the IPv4 address, IPv4 Subnet Mask, and IPv4 Default Gateway are grayed out. You cannot change them. When this parameter is set to No, set the IPv6 Mode parameter to No. When the IPv6 Mode parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is not available (grayed out). RPS Menu Locations Panel Wide Parameters > Onboard Ethernet Communicator > IPv4 DHCP/AutoIP Enable 3.2.3 IPv4 Address Default: 0.0.0.0 Selections: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 This parameter sets the IPv4 address. If the IPv4 DHCP/Auto IP Enable parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is grayed out (you do not have access to it). If the IPv4 DHCP/Auto IP Enable parameter is set to No, enter the IPv4 address here. Further Information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Onboard Ethernet Communicator > IPv4 address 3.2.4 IPv4 Subnet Mask Default: 255.255.255.0 Selections: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 This parameter sets the address for the IPv4 Subnet Mask. If the IPv4 DHCP/Auto IP Enable parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is grayed out (you do not have access to it). If the IPv4 DHCP/Auto IP Enable parameter is set to No, enter the IPv4 sub-network mask here. Subnetting breaks the network into more efficient subnets to prevent the excessive rates of packet collision in a large network. A significant feature of subnets is the subnet mask. Applying a subnet mask to an IP address allows control panels to more efficiently identify the network and node parts of the address. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 33 Further information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 RPS Menu Locations Panel Wide Parameters > Onboard Ethernet Communicator > IPv4 Subnet Mask 3.2.5 IPv4 Default Gateway Default: 0.0.0.0 Selections: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 This parameter sets the address for the local network gateway to the internet or intranet. If the IPv4 DHCP/Auto IP Enable parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is grayed out (you do not have access to it). If the IPv4 DHCP/Auto IP Enable parameter is set to No, enter the Default Gateway address here. A gateway is an address on a TCP/IP network that serves as an entrance to another network. A host uses a default gateway when an IP packet's destination is outside the local subnet. The default gateway address is usually an interface belonging to a LAN's border router. Further information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 RPS Menu Locations Panel Wide Parameters > Onboard Ethernet Communicator > IPv4 Default Gateway4 Default Gateway 3.2.6 IPv4 DNS Server IP Address Default: 0.0.0.0 Selections: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 This parameter sets the IPv4 DNS server address in Static IP mode. A Domain Name Server (DNS) converts internet domain names or hostnames to their corresponding IP addresses. In DHCP mode, the DHCP server’s default DNS is used. To use a custom DNS server in DHCP mode, change this parameter to the custom DNS server’s IP address. Further information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 RPS Menu Locations Panel Wide Parameters > Onboard Ethernet Communicator > IPv4 DNS server IP address 3.2.7 IPv6 DNS Server IP Address Default: :: Selections: 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000 to FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF This parameter configures the IPv6 DNS server address in Static IP mode. A Domain Name Server (DNS) converts internet domain names or hostnames to their corresponding IP addresses. In DHCP mode, the DHCP server’s default DNS is used. To use a custom DNS server in DHCP mode, change the parameter to the custom DNS server’s IP address. When this address is set by the DHCP service, do not change it. This IPv6 DNS server address is the only IPv6 address entered as numbers. Further information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 RPS Menu Locations Panel Wide Parameters > Onboard Ethernet Communicator > IPv6 DNS server IP address Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 34 en | Panel Wide Parameters 3.2.8 Control Panel UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) Enable Default: Yes Selections: – Yes – open port forwarder using UPnP – No – do not use UPnP. When this parameter is set to Yes, the control panel sends a request to the premises router to open a port forwarder. The port forward allows inbound RPS and RSC (Remote Security Control) connections. The UPnP parameter has no effect on event reporting to a central station receiver. Notice! UPnP requires IP Address / Host Name and Panel Port be configured In the Panel Data – View, Network tab, verify that the IP Address / Host Name and Panel Port parameters are configured. RPS Menu Locations Panel Wide Parameters > Onboard Ethernet Communicator > UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) Enable 3.2.9 ARP Cache Timeout (sec.) Default: 600 Selections: 1 to 600 (seconds) This parameter specifies the time-out for ARP cache entries (time-out value in seconds). RPS Menu Locations Panel Wide Parameters > Onboard Ethernet Communicator > ARP Cache Timeout 3.2.10 Module Hostname Default: Blank Selections: Up to sixty-three characters (letters, numbers, and dashes) The hostname indentifies the ip communicator (onboard or SDI2 module) on the network. Use this parameter to create a custom hostname. Notice! Leave this parameter blank to use factory default hostname The factory default hostname begins with the letter B, followed by the last six digits of the modules MAC address. Use RPS diagnostics or installer (keypad) diagnostics to view the hostname. Use the hostname on a local network using DHCP. To use the hostname externally, you must enter the hostname in the DNS server. You can use the hostname to connect to the control panel with RPS or RSC (Remote Security Control), or for module web configuration and diagnostics. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Onboard Ethernet Communicator > Module Hostname 3.2.11 TCP / UDP Port Number Default: 7700 Selections: 0 - 65535 This parameter sets the local port number that the IP communicator listens to in-coming network traffic. It also uses this port for outgoing communications. The TCP/UDP Port is typically left at the default, 7700, for control panel communications with a central station receiver, RPS, automation, or Remote Security Control (RSC). 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 35 Port numbers are categorized into three ranges: System ports 0-1023 User ports 1024-49151 Dynamic or private ports 49152-65535 Notice! Limit unwanted traffic, choose a port number greater than 1023 In order reduce the risk of unwanted network traffic interfering with control panel IP communications, select a port number above 1023. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Onboard Ethernet Communicator > TCP/UDP Port Number 3.2.12 TCP Keep Alive Time (sec.) Default: 45 Selections: 0 - 65 (seconds) This parameter sets the time in seconds between TCP keep-alive transmissions to verify that an idle connection is still active. RPS Menu Locations Panel Wide Parameters > Onboard Ethernet Communicator > TCP Keep Alive Time (sec.) 3.2.13 IPv4 Test Address Default: 8.8.8.8 Selections: IPv4 address or Domain Name The default test address works for most networks. The control panel uses the IP communicator to ping the IPv4 Test Address to verify the integrity of the network and the network configuration settings. Further information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 RPS Menu Locations Panel Wide Parameters > Onboard Ethernet Communicator > IPv4 Test Address 3.2.14 IPv6 Test Address Default: 2001:4860:4860::8888 Selections: IPv6 address or Domain Name The default test address works for most networks. This parameter is only available when IPv6 Mode is set to Yes. The control panel uses the IP communicator to ping the IPv4 Test Address to verify the integrity of the network and the network configuration settings. Further information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Onboard Ethernet Communicator > IPv6 Test Address. 3.2.15 Alternate IPv4 DNS server IP address Default: 0.0.0.0 Selections: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 This parameter provides an alternate IPv4 DNS server IP address. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 36 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel If the IP communicator fails to obtain an address from the primary server, it tries the alternate DNS server. Further information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 RPS Menu Locations Panel Wide Parameters > Onboard Ethernet Communicator > Alternate IPv4 DNS server IP address 3.2.16 Alternate IPv6 DNS server IP address Default: :: Selections: 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000 to FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF This parameter provides an alternate IPv6 DNS server IP address. The Alternate IPv6 Domain Name Server (DNS) address has a hexadecimal notation, which consists of the eight groups of the address expressed separately in hexadecimal and separated by colons. Each group has a value between 0000-FFFF. When this is defined through the DHCP service, leave the default value. If the module fails to obtain an address from the primary server, the Alternate IPV6 DNS server is used, if specified. The module can use the Alternate IPv6 DNS server only when the Primary address is not the default address. Further information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 RPS Menu Locations Panel Wide Parameters > Onboard Ethernet Communicator > Alternate IPv6 DNS server IP address 3.3 Cellular Plug-in Module 3.3.1 Inbound SMS Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: Yes Selections: Yes - Enabled No - Disabled This parameter enables an RPS user to start a control panel initiated download with an SMS message. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Cellular Plug-in Module > Inbound SMSB450 Cellular > Inbound SMS 3.3.2 Session Keep Alive Period (min.) Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 37 Default: 0 Selections: 0 to 1000 (minutes) – 0 - Disabled. Panel does not verify the connection is active. – 1 to 1000 - Enabled. Panel verifies an active connection exists. This parameter sets the length of time in minutes between session keep alive reports to verify that an idle connection is still active. This parameter is pre-configured for optimal performance. Leave at the default setting. Default settings should only be changed for high security UL1610 commercial listed installations requiring low signal notification. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Cellular Plug-in Module > Session Keep Alive PeriodKeep Alive Period 3.3.3 Inactivity Timeout (min.) Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: 0 Selections: 0 to 1000 (minutes) – 0 - Disabled. Panel does not verify the connection is active. – 1 to 1000 - Enabled. Panel verifies an active connection exists. This parameter specifies the time before the control panel will disconnect a session with no data traffic. This parameter is pre-configured for optimal performance. Leave at the default setting. Default settings should only be changed for high security UL1610 commercial listed installations requiring low signal notification. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Cellular Plug-in Module > Inactivity Timeout 3.3.4 Reporting Delay for Low Signal Strength (sec.) Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: 0 Selections: 0-3600 (seconds) – 0 - Disabled. – 1 to 3600 - seconds of delay before Cellular Low Signal event. Notice! UL Requirement To meet UL requirements, the entry for this parameter should not exceed 200 seconds. The control panel creates a Cellular Low Signal event when the signal strength is below the "unacceptable" threshold (indicated by the red LED) for the number of seconds specified in this Reporting Delay for Low Signal Strength parameter. (Low signal is defined as 80% of the measurements taken during the time period are below the threshold). Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 38 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel The control panel creates a Cellular Low Signal Restoral event when the signal strength is above the "good" threshold (indicated by the green LED) for the number of seconds specified in this Reporting Delay for Low Signal Strength parameter. (Good signal is defined as 80% of the measurements taken during the time period are above the threshold). RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Cellular Plug-in Module > Reporting Delay for Low Signal Strength 3.3.5 Reporting Delay for No Towers (sec.) Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: 0 Selections: 0-3600 (seconds) – 0 - Disabled. – 1 to 3600 - Enabled. When there are no towers present the control panel starts two timers, one for a No Towers event, one for a No IP Address event. The control panel uses the duration set by this Reporting Delay for No Tower parameter for both timers. If the cellular plug-in module does not find a tower before the end of the delay, the control panel creates a No Towers event and a No IP Address event at the same time. The control panel creates a No Tower restoral event when one or more towers are available for the duration set by this Reporting Delay for No Tower parameter. The contro panel creates a No IP Address restoral event when the cellular plug-in module successfully registers with one or more towers and receives an IP address. Notice! When one or more towers are available, 60 second delay for No IP Address event If the cellular plug-in module successfully registers with one or more towers, but does not receive an IP address within 60 seconds, the control panel creates a No IP Address event. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Cellular Plug-in Module > Reporting Delay for No Towers 3.3.6 Outgoing SMS Length Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: 160 Selections: 0 to 3600 (bytes) – 0 - Disabled. – 1 to 3600 - Outgoing SMS length (number of bytes) This parameter sets the maximum length for outgoing messages. Outgoing SMS messages are rejected if over this length. This maximum length must match the maximum length set by the cellular provider that is transmitting the SMS message (for example, Verizon). 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 39 RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Cellular Plug-in Module > Outgoing SMS Length 3.3.7 Network Access Point Name (APN) Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: wyless.apn Selections: 0-99 ASCII characters This parameter sets the IP address for the network access point. Enter up to 99 alphanumeric characters. The field is case sensitive. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Cellular Plug-in Module > Network Access Point Name 3.3.8 Network Access Point User Name Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: Blank Selections: 0-30 ASCII characters This parameter specifies the user name for the Network Access Point. Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters. The field is case sensitive. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Cellular Plug-in Module > Network Access Point User Name 3.3.9 Network Access Point Password Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: Blank Selections: 0-30 ASCII characters This parameter sets the password required to access the Network Access Point. Enter up to 30 alpha-numeric characters. The password is case sensitive. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Cellular Plug-in Module > Network Access Point Password 3.3.10 SIM PIN Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: Blank Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 40 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel Selections: 4-8 numbers This is an optional parameter. This parameter is only necessary if the SIM card uses a PIN for security. The SIM PIN is hidden on the display and appears as asterisks (********) when entered. If an invalid SIM PIN is entered, an event is logged in history. A report is sent only if the report function is enabled. If no SIM PIN is required, you can leave the field blank. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Cellular Plug-in Module > SIM PIN 3.4 Cloud Remote Connect 3.4.1 Cloud Remote Connect (Ethernet) Default: Enable Selections: – Enable – Disable Use this parameter to enable the Bosch Cloud-based Service, Remote Connect, for communication via an Ethernet connection. Notice! Bosch Installer Services, Remote Connect subscription required Before you can utilize Remote Connect for RPS or RSC connections you need to visit https:// installerservices.boschsecurity.com/ to sign up for Bosch Installer Services. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Cloud Remote Connect > Cloud Remote Connect via Ethernet 3.4.2 Cloud Remote Connect (Cellular) Default: Disable Selections: – Enable – Disable Use this parameter to enable the control panel to use the Bosch Cloud-based Service, Remote Connect, for communication via a Cellular connection. Notice! Bosch Installer Services, Remote Connect subscription required Before you can utilize Remote Connect for RPS or RSC connections you need to visit https:// installerservices.boschsecurity.com/ to sign up for Bosch Installer Services. Notice! Bosch Installer Services, Bosch Cellular Service required Before you can utilize cellular communication for reporting or for RPS or RSC connections you need to visit https://installerservices.boschsecurity.com/ to sign up for Bosch Installer Services. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Clould Remote Connect > Cloud Remote Connect via Ethernet 3.5 IP cameras The B6512 supports Cameras 1 to 6. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel 3.5.1 Panel Wide Parameters | en 41 Camera name Default: Camera # Selections: 0-32 characters This parameter allows the user to enter a description for a Bosch IP camera. Enter up to 32 characters of text, numbers, and symbols. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > IP Cameras > Camera Name 3.5.2 Camera name (second language) Default: Blank Selections: Enter up to 32 characters. This parameter allows the user to enter a description for a Bosch IP camera. Enter up to 32 characters from the Latin-1 8-bit (ISO/IEC 8859-1) character set to describe the area. First and Second languages are programmed during panel account setup in the Panel Data View window. Refer to Panel Data - View > Panel Info tab > Additional Info. Language options are: English, Spanish, French and Portuguese. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > IP Cameras > Camera Name (second language) 3.5.3 URL or IP address Default: Blank Selections: 0-128 ASCII characters This parameter sets the URL or IP address for the Bosch IP camera. The control panel or RSC application uses the URL or IP address to communicate with the camera over a network. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > IP Cameras > URL or IP Address 3.6 Bosch Connected Cameras Products – B6512 with on-board IP communicator – All Bosch IP cameras Applications Bosch IP cameras are best for small commercial and residential applications where conventional video integration hardware and applications are cost prohibitive. Implementation This control panel communicates with Bosch IP cameras using a low-level language (RCP+). Configure compatible control panels to use Bosch IP cameras as inputs, outputs, or both. Environment Install compatible control panels and Bosch IP cameras on the same network (LAN). Panel Configuration Configure the control panel with each camera's IP address. RCP+ port #, Service password, and Supervision period (sec) parameters configure network communication and supervision with connected Bosch IP cameras. Other panel configuration for using IP cameras New Point Source option "IP Camera" (ref. Points > Point Assignments > Source) New Output Source option "IP Camera" (ref. Output Parameters > Output Configuration > Output Source) Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 42 en | Panel Wide Parameters 3.6.1 Control Panel RCP+ port # Default: 1756 Selections: 0-65535 This parameter identifies the port number the Bosch IP camera listens to for RCP+ protocol. Only change from the default, 1756, if an IP camera has been configured to listen on a different port. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > IP Cameras > Bosch Connected Camera > RCP+ Port # 3.6.2 Service password Default: Blank Selections: 0, 1-32 characters 0 = Disable feature This parameter sets the password required to access the Bosch IP camera's data. The password is case sensitive. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > IP Cameras > Bosch Connected Camera > Service Password 3.6.3 Supervision period (sec.) Default: 0 Selections: 0, 30-255 sec 0 = Disable supervision This parameter sets the length of time the control panel monitors a missing Bosch IP camera before reporting the camera as missing. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > IP Cameras > Bosch Connected Camera > Supervision Period 3.7 Live (video) Products – B6512 with on-board IP communicator – All Bosch IP cameras – RSC (Remote Security Control) Applications Live video is best for small commercial and residential applications where conventional video integration hardware and applications are cost prohibitive. Implementation This control panel communicates with Bosch IP cameras using a low-level language (RCP+). Configure the control panels to use Bosch IP cameras as inputs, outputs, or both. The device configuration is independent, but native. Environment Install control panels and Bosch IP cameras on the same network (LAN). Panel Configuration RSC uses the Port #, Use HTTPS?, User Name, and Password parameters to access video images within the IP cameras. 3.7.1 Port # Default: 80 Selections: 0-65535 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 43 This parameter assigns a port number for the destination the RSC application uses to communicate with the camera and view live video feed. If the live viewer URL is assigned to a router, configure the router with the value specified here. Notice! When using HTTPS, set this parameter to 443. The B6512 supports Cameras 1 to 6. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > IP Cameras > Live (Video) > Port # 3.7.2 Use HTTPS? Default: No Selections: Yes - Enable HTTPS No - Disable HTTPS Use this parameter to encrypt data for a secure network communications between the Bosch IP camera and the RSC. Set to "Yes" if the live viewer requires HTTPS. Notice! When using HTTPS, set Panel Wide Parameters > IP Cameras > Live (Video) > Port # to 443. The B6512 supports Cameras 1 to 6. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > IP Cameras > Live (Video) > Use HTTPS? 3.7.3 User Name Default: live Selection: Enter up to 32 characters. This parameter specifies the user name that the RSC application uses to show video from the camera. The B6512 supports Cameras 1 to 6. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > IP Cameras > Live (Video) > User Name 3.7.4 Password Default: Blank Selections: 0-32 characters This parameter sets the password required by the RSC application to view video from the camera. The password is case sensitive. The B6512 supports Cameras 1 to 6. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > IP Cameras > Live (Video) > Password Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 44 en | Panel Wide Parameters 3.8 Control Panel Reporting Overview Control Panel Event Processing 1 Report Route Group 1 Fire Gas Fire Burglar Route Group 4 Burglar Burglar xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx User Test xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx Diag Output Auto Fnc Point xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx RPS xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx Usr Chng xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx Point Gas Per Emer Output Auto Fnc RPS xxxxxx xxxxxx Test Fire xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx User Diag Usr Chng xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx Point Gas Per Emer Test Output Auto Fnc RPS xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx User Diag Usr Chng xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx Per Emer xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx Point xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx Usr Chng xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx 4 Test Fire Output Auto Fnc RPS Route Group 3 Route Group 2 Burglar User Diag 3 xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx Per Emer xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx xxxxxx 2 Gas Primary Destination Device Backup Destination Device Primary Destination Device Backup Destination Device Primary Destination Device Backup Destination Device Primary Destination Device Backup Destination Device Network, Cellular, or PSTN Network, Cellular, or PSTN Network, Cellular, or PSTN Network, Cellular, or PSTN Network, Cellular, or PSTN Network, Cellular, or PSTN Network, Cellular, or PSTN Network, Cellular, or PSTN Destination Destination Destination Destination Destination Destination Destination Destination Central Station Receiver Central Station Receiver Central Station Receiver Central Station Receiver Central Station Receiver Central Station Receiver Central Station Receiver Central Station Receiver Figure 3.1: Reporting Overview 1 - Reports begin with events The control panel monitors points, modules, keypads, and it's own power (AC and battery) for off-normal conditions. When it detects an off-normal condition (or a restoral from an offnormal condition), it creates an event. The control panel logs events in its history log and can send them as reports to a central station receiver or to users as Personal Notification. When the control panel has reports to send it first sorts them into the Route Groups (1 to 4). Each Route Group has its own communicator, with a primary destination device, and secondary destination device, to send the reports in the Route Group to a central station receiver. 2 - Report Routing parameters Use the Report Routing, page 46 parameters to configure the four Route Groups (1 to 4). The parameters under the Report Routing heading assign reports to Route Groups by category (all Fire Reports or all Burglar Reports for example) or individually (Fire Alarm for example). You can assign reports to one or more Route Groups. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 45 3 - Communicator parameters, The parameters under the Communicator, overview, page 58 heading assign a Primary Destination Device and a Backup Destination Device to each Route Group. The control panel uses the Route Group's Primary Destination Device first to send reports. If the Primary Destination Device fails to send the report, the control panel creates a Comm Trouble Event and switches to the Backup Destination Device. The control panel makes up to ten communication attempts switching between the primary and backup destination devices to send reports from a Route Group. If unsuccessful after 10 attempts, it creates a Comm Fail Event. 4 - Destinations The control panel sends reports from each Route Group using their Primary and Secondary Destination Devices to the Destinations configured for the device. Configure for Onboard IP Destinations here: On Board Ethernet (IP) Communicator, page 31, and here: Enhanced Communication, page 62. Configure for Plug -in Cellular IP Destinations here: Cellular Plug-in Module, page 36, and here Enhanced Communication, page 62. Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for more information. Configure for Plug-in Phone Destinations here: Phone and Phone Parameters, page 29. Configure for SDI2 Address Destinations here: (B42x) IP Communicator, page 231 or here: B450 cellular, page 238, and here: Enhanced Communication, page 62. Route Group priority Route Group 1 has the highest priority. Route Group 4 has the lowest priority. When there are reports in more than one Report Group to be sent at the same time, the control panel sends the report in the highest priority Route Group first. For example if there are reports in Route Group 2 and Route Group 3, the control panel sends the report in Route Group 2 first. Priority within a Route Group Within a Route Group, reports to be sent are prioritized as shown in the list below. The control panel sends the highest priority report first. 1 is the highest priority. 1. Diagnostic Reports: Watchdog Reset, Reboot. RPS Reports: Remote Reset. 2. Fire Reports: Fire Alarm. 3. Gas Reports: Gas Alarm. 4. Personal Emergency Reports: Medical Alarm, Silent / Hold-up Alarm, Panic Alarm, Duress. 5. Burglar Reports: Alarm Report. 6. Fire Reports: Fire Cancel. Gas Reports: Gas Cancel. Burglar Reports: Non-Fire Cancel. Diagnostic Reports: SDI2 Device Failure, Parameter Checksum Fail, Phone Line Fail, AC Failure, Battery Missing, Battery Low, Battery Restoral, Route Comm Fail, Route Comm Fail Restore. 7. Fire Reports: Fire Restoral (after Alarm), Fire Missing, Fire Trouble, Fire Supervision, Fire Restoral (after Trouble), Fire Supervision Missing, Fire Supervision Restoral. Gas Reports: Gas Restoral from Alarm, Gas Missing, Gas Trouble, Gas Supervision, Gas Restoral from Trouble, Gas Supervision Missing, Gas Supervision. Burglar Reports: Non-Fire Supervision. Personal Emergency Reports: Medical Alarm Restoral, Silent / Hold-up Alarm Restoral, Panic Alarm Restoral. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 46 en | Panel Wide Parameters 8. Control Panel Burglar Reports: Burg Restore (after Trouble), Missing Alarm, Trouble Report, Missing Trouble, Point Bus Fail, Point Bus Restoral, Alarm Restore, Supervision Missing, Unverified Event. 9. User Reports: Forced Point, Was Force Armed, Forced Close, Forced Close Part On Instant, Forced Close Part On Delay. Diagnostic Reports: Service Smoke Detector, Service Smoke Detector Restore. Output Reports: Sensor Reset, Output Set, Output Reset. Auto Function Reports: Sked Executed, Sked Changed, Fail to Execute (Sked). Point Reports: Bypass, Bypass Restore. User Change Reports: Change Level. 10. Burglar Reports: User Code Tamper. User Reports: Fail to Open, Fail to Close, Extend Close Time, Opening Report, Closing Report, Point Opening, Point Closing, Part On Instant, Part On Delay. Test Reports: Status Report, Test Report. Diagnostic Reports: SDI2 Device Restoral, Phone Line Restoral, AC Restoral, Checksum Fail, Network Fail (and Restoral), Network Condition, RF Interference (and Restore), Equipment Fail (and Restore), Personal Notification Communication Trouble (and Restore). RPS Reports: Event Log Threshold, Event Log Overflow, Parameters Changed, RPS Access OK, RPS Access Fail, Remote Reset, Program Access OK, Program Access Fail. Point Reports: Service Start, Service End, Fire Walk Start, Fire Walk End, Walk Test Start, Walk Test End, Extra Point, RF Low Battery, RF Battery Restore. User Change Reports: Date Changed, Time Changed, Delete User, User Code Change, Area Watch, Keyfob Assigned, Keyfob Removed, Change Level. Access Reports: Access Granted, No Entry, Door Left Open, Cycle Door, Door Unlocked, Door Secure, Door Request, Door Locked. See also 3.9 – Report Routing, page 46 – Communicator, overview, page 58 – On Board Ethernet (IP) Communicator, page 31 – Enhanced Communication, page 62 – Cellular Plug-in Module, page 36 – Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 – Phone and Phone Parameters, page 29 – (B42x) IP Communicator, page 231 – B450 cellular, page 238 Report Routing Default: Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 Report Category Fire Reports, page 47 Yes Yes Yes Custom Gas Reports, page 48 Yes Yes Yes Custom Burglar Reports, page 48 Yes Yes Yes Custom Personal Emergency Reports, Yes Yes Yes Custom page 48 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 47 Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 Report Category User Reports, page 48 Custom Custom Custom Custom Test Reports, page 49 Yes Yes Yes No Diagnostic Reports, page Custom Custom Custom Custom Output Reports, page 50 Yes Yes Yes Custom Auto Function Reports, page Yes Yes Yes No RPS Reports, page 50 Custom Custom Custom No Point Reports, page 50 Yes Yes Yes No User Change Reports, page Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes 49 50 50 Access Reports, page 51 Selections: Yes - assign all of the reports in this category to the Route Group. No - assign all of the reports in this category to the Route Group. Custom - you can not select Custom. Custom shows for a category when at least one of the reports in the category is configured individually. Notice! Configuration for individual reports lost on change from Custom to Yes or No When Custom appears for a category of reports, it indicates that not all of the reports are set the same (all Yes or all No). The reports have been set individually. If you change the reports for a category from Custom to Yes or No, the configuration for the individual reports in the category is lost. To individually re-assign reports from a report category to a Route Group, you must click on the report category in the menu tree, Fire Reports, page 51 for example. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing Fire Reports Reports in the Fire category: – Fire Alarm – Fire Restoral (After Alarm) – Fire Missing – Fire Trouble – Fire Supervision – Fire Restoral (After Trouble) – Fire Cancel – Fire Supervision Missing – Fire Supervision Restoral To individually assign reports from the Fire category to a Route Group, click Fire Reports, page 51 in the menu tree. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 48 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel Notice! UL 864 Requirement To comply with UL 864 requirements for Commercial Fire Systems, set the Fire Reports parameter to Yes for Route Groups 1 and 2. Gas Reports Reports in the Gas category: – Gas Alarm – Gas Restoral From Alarm – Gas Missing. – Gas Trouble – Gas Supervision – Gas Restoral From Trouble – Gas Cancel – Gas Supervision Missing – Gas Supervision Restoral To individually assign reports from the Gas category to a Route Group, click Gas Reports, page 52 in the menu tree. Burglar Reports Reports in the Burglar category: – Alarm Report – Burg Restore (After Trouble) – Duress – Missing Alarm – User Code Tamper – Trouble Report – Missing Trouble – Non-Fire Supervision – Point Bus Fail – Point Bus Restoral – Non-Fire Cancel – Alarm Restore – Supervision Missing – Unverified Event To individually assign reports from the Burglar category to a Route Group, click Burglar Reports, page 52 in the menu tree. Personal Emergency Reports Reports in the Personal Emergency category: – Medical Alarm – Medical Alarm Restoral (reserved for future use) – Silent / Hold-Up Alarm – Silent / Hold-Up Alarm Restoral – Panic Alarm – Panic Alarm Restoral (reserved for future use) To individually assign reports from the Personal Emergency category to a Route Group, click Personal Emergency Reports, page 53 in the menu tree. User Reports Reports in the User category: – 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Forced Point: Reports forced point event. Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en – Point Opening: Reports point opening event. – Point Closing: Reports point closing event. – Was Force Armed: Reports point forced armed. – Fail To Open: Reports fail to open event. – Fail To Close: Reports fail to close event. – Extend Close Time: Reports extend close time event. – Opening Report: Reports opening events. – Forced Close – Closing Report – Forced Close Part On Instant – Forced Close Part On Delay – Part On Instant – Part On Delay 49 To individually assign reports from the User category to a Route Group, click User Reports, page 53 in the menu tree. Test Reports Reports in the Test category: – Status Report – Test Report To individually assign reports from the Test category to a Route Group, click Test Reports, page 54 in the menu tree. Diagnostic Reports Reports in the Diagnostic category: – SDI2 Device Failure – SDI2 Device Restoral – Watchdog Reset – Parameter Checksum Fail – Reboot – Phone Line Fail – Phone Line Restoral – AC Failure – AC Restoral – Battery Missing – Battery Low – Battery Restoral – Route Comm Fail – Route Comm Restore – Checksum Fail – Network Fail – Network Restoral – Network Condition – RF Interference – RF Interference Restoral – Equipment Fail – Equipment Fail Restoral – Service Smoke Detector – Service Smoke Detector Restoral – Personal Notification Communication Trouble – Personal Notification Communication Trouble Restoral Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 50 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel To individually assign reports from the Diagnostic category to a Route Group, click Diagnostic Reports, page 54 in the menu tree. Output Reports Reports in the Output category: – Sensor Reset – Output Set – Output Reset To individually assign reports from the Output category to a Route Group, click Output Reports, page 55 in the menu tree. Auto Function Reports Reports in the Auto Function category: – Sked Executed – Sked Changed – Fail to Execute To individually assign reports from the Auto Function category to a Route Group, click Auto Function Reports, page 56 in the menu tree. RPS Reports Reports in the RPS category: – Event Log Threshold – Event Log Overflow – Parameters Changed – RPS Access OK – RPS Access Fail – Remote Reset – Program Access OK – Program Access Fail To individually assign reports from the RPS category to a Route Group, click RPS Reports, page 56 in the menu tree. Point Reports Reports in the Point category: – Service Start – Service End – Fire Walk Start – Fire Walk End – Walk Test Start – Walk Test End – Extra Point – Send Point Text – RF Low Battery – RF Low Battery Restore – Bypass – Bypass Restore To individually assign reports from the Point category to a Route Group, click Point Reports, page 57 in the menu tree. User Change Reports Reports in the User Change category: – Date Changed – Time Changed 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en – Delete User – User Code Change – Area Watch – Keyfob Assigned – Keyfob Removed – Change Level 51 To individually assign reports from the User Change category to a Route Group, click User Change Reports, page 57 in the menu tree. Access Reports Reports in the Access category: – Access Granted – No Entry – Door Left Open – Cycle Door – Door Unlocked – Door Secure – Door Request – Door Locked To individually assign reports from the Access category to a Route Group, click Access Reports, page 58 in the menu tree. 3.9.1 Fire Reports Default: Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 Fire Reports Fire Alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes Fire Restoral (after Alarm) Yes Yes Yes No Fire Missing Yes Yes Yes No Fire Trouble Yes Yes Yes No Fire Supervision Yes Yes Yes No Fire Restoral (after Yes Yes Yes No Fire Cancel Yes Yes Yes No Fire Supervision Missing Yes Yes Yes No Fire Supervision Restoral Yes Yes Yes No Trouble) Selections: – Yes - assign this report to the Route Group. – No - do not assign this report to the Route Group. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > Fire Reports. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 52 en | Panel Wide Parameters 3.9.2 Control Panel Gas Reports Default: Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 Gas Reports Gas Alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes Gas Restoral from Alarm Yes Yes Yes No Gas Missing Yes Yes Yes No Gas Trouble Yes Yes Yes No Gas Supervision Yes Yes Yes No Gas Restoral from Trouble Yes Yes Yes No Gas Cancel Yes Yes Yes No Gas Supervision Missing Yes Yes Yes No Gas Supervision Restoral Yes Yes Yes No Selections: – Yes - assign this report to the Route Group. – No - do not assign this report to the Route Group. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > Gas Reports. 3.9.3 Burglar Reports Default: Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 Burglar Reports Alarm Report Yes Yes Yes Yes Burg Restore (after Alarm) Yes Yes Yes No Duress Yes Yes Yes Yes Missing Alarm Yes Yes Yes No User Code Tamper Yes Yes Yes No Trouble Report Yes Yes Yes No Missing Trouble Yes Yes Yes No Non-Fire Supervision Yes Yes Yes No Point Bus Fail Yes Yes Yes No Point Bus Restoral Yes Yes Yes No Non-Fire Cancel Yes Yes Yes No Alarm Restore Yes Yes Yes No Supervision Missing Yes Yes Yes No Unverified Event Yes Yes Yes No 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 53 Selections: – Yes - assign this report to the Route Group. – No - do not assign this report to the Route Group. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > Burglar Reports. 3.9.4 Personal Emergency Reports Default: Personal Emergency Reports Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 Medical Alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes Medical Alarm Restoral Yes Yes Yes No Silent / Hold-Up Alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes Silent / Hold-Up Alarm Yes Yes Yes No Panic Alarm Yes Yes Yes Yes Panic Alarm Restoral Yes Yes Yes No Restoral Selections: – Yes - assign this report to the Route Group. – No - do not assign this report to the Route Group. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > Personal Emergency Reports. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > Personal Emergency Reports 3.9.5 User Reports Default: Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 User Reports Forced Point Yes Yes Yes No Point Opening Yes Yes Yes No Point Closing Yes Yes Yes No Was Forced Armed Yes Yes Yes No Fail to Open Yes Yes Yes No Fail to Close Yes Yes Yes No Extent Close Time Yes Yes Yes No Opening Report No No No No Forced Close No No No No Closing Report No No No No Forced Close Part On No No No No Instant Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 54 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 User Reports Forced Close Part On Delay No No No No Part On Instant No No No No Part On Delay No No No No Send User Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Selections: – Yes - assign this report to the Route Group. – No - do not assign this report to the Route Group. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > User Reports. 3.9.6 Test Reports Default: Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 Test Reports Status Report Yes Yes Yes No Test Report Yes Yes Yes No Selections: – Yes - assign this report to the Route Group. – No - do not assign this report to the Route Group. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > Test Reports. 3.9.7 Diagnostic Reports Default: Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 Diagnostic Reports 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 SDI2 Device Failure Yes Yes Yes No SDI2 Device Restoral Yes Yes Yes No Watchdog Reset Yes Yes Yes No Parameter Checksum Fail Yes Yes Yes No Reboot Yes Yes Yes No Phone Line Fail Yes Yes Yes No Phone Line Fail Restoral Yes Yes Yes No AC Failure Yes Yes Yes No AC Restoral Yes Yes Yes No Battery Missing Yes Yes Yes No Battery Low Yes Yes Yes No Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 55 Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 Diagnostic Reports Battery Restoral Yes Yes Yes No Route Comm Fail Yes Yes Yes No Route Comm Restoral Yes Yes Yes No Checksum Fail Yes Yes Yes No Network Fail No No No No Network Restoral No No No No Network Condition No No No No RF Interference Yes Yes Yes No RF Interference Restore Yes Yes Yes No Equipment Fail Yes Yes Yes No Equipment Fail Restore Yes Yes Yes No Service Smoke Detector Yes Yes Yes No Service Smoke Detector Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Restore Personal Notification Communication Trouble Personal Notification Communication Trouble Restore Send Version Text Selections: – Yes - assign this report to the Route Group. – No - do not assign this report to the Route Group. Notice! Enable Route Comm Fail and Rout Comm Restore reports in only one route group. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > Diagnostic Reports. 3.9.8 Output Reports Default: Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 Output Reports Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Sensor Reset Yes Yes Yes No Output Set Yes Yes Yes No Output Reset Yes Yes Yes No Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 56 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 Output Reports Send Output Name Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Selections: – Yes - assign this report to the Route Group. – No - do not assign this report to the Route Group. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > Output Reports. 3.9.9 Auto Function Reports Default: Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 Auto Function Reports Sked Executed Yes Yes Yes No Sked Changed Yes Yes Yes No Fail to Execute Yes Yes Yes No Selections: – Yes - assign this report to the Route Group. – No - do not assign this report to the Route Group. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > Auto Function Reports. 3.9.10 RPS Reports Default: Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 RPS Reports Event Log Threshold Yes Yes Yes No Event Log Overflow Yes Yes Yes No Parameters Changed Yes Yes Yes No RPS Access OK Yes Yes Yes No RPS Access Fail No No No No Remote Reset Yes Yes Yes No Program Access OK Yes Yes Yes No Program Access Fail Yes Yes Yes No Selections: – Yes - assign this report to the Route Group. – No - do not assign this report to the Route Group. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > RPS Reports. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel 3.9.11 Panel Wide Parameters | en 57 Point Reports Default: Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 Point Reports Service Start Yes Yes Yes No Service End Yes Yes Yes No Fire Walk Start Yes Yes Yes No Fire Walk End Yes Yes Yes No Walk Test Start Yes Yes Yes No Walk Test End Yes Yes Yes No Extra Point Yes Yes Yes No Send Point Text Yes Yes Yes No RF Low Battery Yes Yes Yes No RF Low Battery Restore Yes Yes Yes No Bypass Yes Yes Yes No Bypass Restore Yes Yes Yes No Selections: – Yes - assign this report to the Route Group. – No - do not assign this report to the Route Group. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > Point Reports. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > Point Reports 3.9.12 User Change Reports Default: Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 User Change Reports Date Changed Yes Yes Yes Yes Time Changed Yes Yes Yes No Delete User Yes Yes Yes No User Code Change Yes Yes Yes No Area Watch Yes Yes Yes No Keyfob Assigned Yes Yes Yes No Keyfob Removed Yes Yes Yes No Change Level Yes Yes Yes Yes Selections: – Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Yes - assign this report to the Route Group. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 58 en | Panel Wide Parameters – Control Panel No - do not assign this report to the Route Group. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > User Change Reports. 3.9.13 Access Reports Default: Route Group 1 Route Group 2 Route Group 3 Route Group 4 Access Reports Access Granted Yes Yes Yes Yes No Entry Yes Yes Yes Yes Door Left Open Yes Yes Yes Yes Cycle Door Yes Yes Yes Yes Door Unlocked Yes Yes Yes Yes Door Secure Yes Yes Yes Yes Door Request Yes Yes Yes Yes Door Locked Yes Yes Yes Yes Selections: – Yes - assign this report to the Route Group. – No - do not assign this report to the Route Group. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > Access Reports. 3.10 Communicator, overview There are four Route Groups. Reports are assigned to Route Groups by category (Fire Reports or Burglar Reports for example) or individually (Fire Alarm for example) . Refer to Reporting Overview, page 44 for information about assigning reports to Route Groups. Use the parameters under this Communicator heading to assign a Primary Destination Device and a Backup Destination Device to each Route Group. The Primary Destination Device is the first used to send reports. If the Primary Destination Device fails to send the report, the Backup Destination Device destination device is used. The control panel makes up to ten communication attempts using the primary and backup destination devices to send reports in a Route Group. The control panel alternates between the primary and backup destination devices as shown below. If unsuccessful after 10 attempts, it creates a Comm Fail Event. 1. Primary Destination Device 2. Primary Destination Device 3. Backup Destination Device 4. Backup Destination Device 5. Primary Destination Device 6. Backup Destination Device 7. Primary Destination Device 8. Backup Destination Device 9. Primary Destination Device 10. Backup Destination Device 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 59 When only the Primary Destination Device is programmed, the control panel makes all ten attempts using that device. COMM TROUBLE, COMM FAIL events When the Primary Destination Device fails to connect to the central station receiver after two attempts, the control panel switches to the Backup Destination Device. The control panel sends the original report along with a COMM TROUBLE report. If no Backup Destination Device is configured, no COMM TROUBLE report is sent. The control panel sends a COMM RESTORE event the next time it successfully sends a report using the Primary Destination Device. If the Primary Destination Device is an IP Destination (Onboard IP, Plug-in Cellular IP, SDI2 Address 1, or SDI2 Address 2), the control sends the original event along with a COMM TROUBLE report that includes an SDI2 number modifier (SDI2##). The SDI2 modifier identifies the IP Destination Device type. Refer to the table below. SDI2 number SDI2 number SDI2 number SDI2 number modifier for IP modifier for IP modifier for IP modifier for IP Destination 1 Destination 2 Destination 3 Destination 4 Onboard Ethernet 10 20 30 40 Plug-in Cellular 18 28 38 48 SDI2 Address 1 11 21 31 41 IP Destination Type For example, a COMM TROUBLE report for Route Group 1 with the Primary Destination Device assigned to Plug-in Cellular, Destination 2 would be: COMM TROUBLE RG1 SDI228 The control panel generates COMM TROUBLE events when positive acknowledgement from the central station receiver to a polls are not received after the configured number of retries. If all attempts to both the primary destination device and the backup destination device fail, a COMM FAIL RG# event is generated. COMM RESTORE events are not generated for COMM FAIL events. Notice! CAN/ULC S304 requirement, do not clear pending reports When CAN/ULC S304 is set to YES, the control panel does not clear pending reports before creating a COMM FAIL event. It continues to queue reports for the failed route until one of the failed routes in the route group restores. If the queue reaches the capacity of the panel event log, the oldest reports are cleared (overwritten). 3.10.1 Primary Destination Device Default: No Device Selections: – No Device – Onboard IP Destination 1 – Onboard IP Destination 2 – Onboard IP Destination 3 – Onboard IP Destination 4 – (Plug-in) Cellular Destination 1 – (Plug-in) Cellular Destination 2 – (Plug-in) Cellular Destination 3 – (Plug-in) Cellular Destination 4 – (Plug-in) Phone Destination 1 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 60 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel – (Plug-in) Phone Destination 2 – (Plug-in) Phone Destination 3 – (Plug-in) Phone Destination 4 – SDI2 address 1 Destination 1 – SDI2 address 1 Destination 2 – SDI2 address 1 Destination 3 – SDI2 address 1 Destination 4 This parameter sets the Primary Destination Device for a Route Group. The control panel uses the device to send reports to the central station receiver. The Primary Destination Device selections pair a communicator (onboard IP communicator, plug-in cellular communicator, plug-in phone communicator, or SDI2 module) and a destination (Network Address, page 62, or Phone and Phone Parameters, page 29) RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Communicator > Primary Destination Device Further information For more information on how the control panel sends reports, refer to Reporting Overview, page 44 and Communicator, overview, page 58. 3.10.2 Backup Destination Device Default: No Device Selections: – No Device – Onboard IP Destination 1 – Onboard IP Destination 2 – Onboard IP Destination 3 – Onboard IP Destination 4 – (Plug-in) Cellular Destination 1 – (Plug-in) Cellular Destination 2 – (Plug-in) Cellular Destination 3 – (Plug-in) Cellular Destination 4 – (Plug-in) Phone Destination 1 – (Plug-in) Phone Destination 2 – (Plug-in) Phone Destination 3 – (Plug-in) Phone Destination 4 – SDI2 address 1 Destination 1 – SDI2 address 1 Destination 2 – SDI2 address 1 Destination 3 – SDI2 address 1 Destination 4 This parameter sets the Backup Destination Device for a Route Group. The control panel uses the backup device to send reports to the central station receiver when the primary device fails. The Backup Destination Device selections pair a communicator (onboard IP communicator, plug-in cellular communicator, plug-in phone communicator, or SDI2 module) and a destination (Network Address, page 62, or Phone and Phone Parameters, page 29) Do not select the same destination device for both Primary Destination Device and Backup Destination Device for a Route Group. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Communicator > Backup Destination Device 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 61 Further information For more information on how the control panel sends reports, refer to Reporting Overview, page 44 and Communicator, overview, page 58. 3.10.3 RG Same Network Receiver Default: Yes Selections: – Yes - the control panel uses the same authentication key to communicate with both the primary and backup destinations that are the same receiver. Upon detection of a Communication Trouble on either the primary or backup enhanced communication destinations, the working destination immediately changes to the faster poll rate. – No - the control panel uses separate authentication keys to communicate with the primary and backup receivers. Upon detection of a Communication Trouble on either the primary or backup enhanced communication destination, the working destination continues to use its configured poll rate. For example: this would be used when reporting to a receiver over a LAN / WAN and another is reporting to the same receiver over the Internet from the cellular service provider. This configuration also typically has the poll rate set to a slower poll rate than the primary such as every 4 hours. Use the Route Group Same Network Receiver parameter to ensure that the authentication keys from the control panel to receiver are the same when the destinations to the receiver use different IP Addresses or Port Numbers. This parameter also enables the backup destination poll time to change to the primary poll time in the event of a Communication Trouble event. Set this parameter to Yes when the following applies: – Both primary and backup devices use enhanced communication via an IP destination (onboard or SDI2). – Both primary and backup destinations are the same receiver with different IP Addresses that can be accessed from more than one network such as on a LAN / WAN and over the Internet – Both primary and backup destinations use different poll rates, although it is not necessary. If the poll rate is set to 5 minutes or faster, there is a possibility that data usage might exceed your cellular data plan. Be sure that any Communication Trouble events are addressed as soon as possible. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Communicator > RG Same Network Receiver 3.10.4 Time Synchronization Default: Route Group 1: Yes Route Groups 2-4: No Selections: Yes / No This parameter enables the control panel to synchronize its time and date with the central station receiver. Time synchronization requires the control panel to be configured to send reports to the central station receiver over an IP network (Ethernet or cellular) using the Reporting Format, page 62. – Time Sync does not work when the Destination Device is set to telephone or the reporting format is Contact ID. – Time Sync must be performed over a network connection (Ethernet or cellular). – Time Sync is applicable to all route groups, but can only be enabled for one route group at a time Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 62 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel Off by 30 Minutes or Less When the control panel time is off by 30 minutes or less, it adjusts its timekeeping to make up the difference. If the control panel's time is slow, the control panel counts seconds faster than once per second. If the control panel's time is fast, the control panel counts seconds slower than once per second. The modified counting of seconds remains in effect until the control panel time is in synchronization with the central station receiver time. Since every second occurs, there are no skips in time. No Skeds scheduled to be run are skipped. Off by More than 30 Minutes When the control panel time is off by more than 30 minutes, it checks its date. If the day, month, or year is different from the central station receiver, the control panel sets its date and time to the central station receiver date. The control panel then sets its time to the Central Station receiver time. Due to a forward change in time, scheduled Skeds might not run. Due to a backward change in time, scheduled Skeds might be repeated. RPS Menu Location: Panel Wide Parameters > Communicator > Time Synchronization 3.11 Enhanced Communication 3.11.1 Reporting Format Default: Modem4 Selections: – Contact ID - Use this format when the central station receiver only supports contact ID. – Modem4 - The control panel sends expanded Modem4 Communication Format reports to the central station receiver. This parameter sets the central station receiver format for transmission of reports. When using telephone or network reporting, event reports can be routed to a central station receiver using either Contact ID or Modem4 format. Contact ID and Modem4 reports identify points and passcode User ID codes at the receiver. When reporting point events, Modem4 also sends point text as programmed in Point Assignments. Notice! When using Contact ID, you must disable Time Synchronization, page 61 RPS Menu Location: Panel Wide Parameters > Enhanced Communications > Reporting Format 3.11.2 Network Address Default: Blank Selections: IPv4 Address (0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255) or Hostname (Up to 255 Characters) This parameter sets the IP address for Destinations 1-4. There are four available Destinations to route events to. If events are going to be routed to an IP Address (in a Private Local or Wide Area Network application), you need to determine which Destination to use (Destination 1 – Destination 4) and enter the appropriate IP Address for that Destination. Whenever the central station requests a change to the Network Address, page 62 or Port Number, page 63 configured in the control panel, the central station receiver might resynchronize the control panel's anti-replay/anti-substitution static key. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 63 When Port Number/IP Address pairs have duplicate values in a control panel, RPS shows a warning message and asks if you wish to continue. If you click No, RPS forces you to enter unique values for the Port Number and IP Address fields. If you click Yes, RPS allows you to enter duplicate values. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Enhanced Communications > Network Address (Destinations 1-4) 3.11.3 Port Number Default: 7700 Selections: 1 to 65,535 This parameter assigns a unique port number for each destination used to communicate with the central station over a network. When upgrading a non-control panel account to a control panel account, RPS forces the default to 7700. Whenever the central station requests a change to the Network Address, page 62 or Port Number, page 63 configured in the control panel, the central station receiver might resynchronize the control panel's anti-replay/anti-substitution static key. When Port Number/IP Address pairs have duplicate values in a control panel, RPS shows a warning message and asks if you wish to continue. If you click No, RPS forces you to enter unique values for the Port Number and IP Address fields. If you click Yes, RPS allows you to enter duplicate values. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Enhanced Communications > Port Number (Destination 1 to 4) 3.11.4 Receiver Supervision Time Default: 4 Hours - Medium Security Selections: – 200 Seconds - UL1610 – 300 Seconds - NFPA 72 2010 – 1 Hour - NFPA 72 2013 – 4 Hours - Medium Security – 24 Hours - Daily – 25 - Hours – 90 Seconds - High Security – No Polling – 95-195, 205-1275 Seconds - selections available in 5 second intervals – 2, 3, 5-23, 26-255 Hours – Custom With the exception of the Custom selection, the Receiver Supervision Time selection automatically sets the Poll Rate (sec.), page 64, ACK Wait Time (sec.), page 66, and Retry Count, page 66 parameters. These parameters can only be edited when the Receiver Supervision Time parameter is set to Custom. The first time Custom is selected, the default value for the Poll Rate, ACK Wait and Retry Count parameters is zero. Once these parameters are changed from the default, RPS retains the values even if the Receiver Supervision Time parameter is changed from the Custom selection. Each time Custom is reselected the Poll Rate, ACK Wait and Retry Count parameters are set to the saved values. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 64 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel Important Cellular Service Information To avoid monthly overages, Bosch offers service plans that align with the common applications for cellular connectivity on alarm panels. WARNING: This parameter is critical for optimized communication. Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for important information regarding how to set up your control panel to ensure proper cellular communication with the central station receiver. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Enhanced Communication > Receiver Supervision Time 3.11.5 Poll Rate (sec.) Default: 0 (Receiver Supervision Time parameter set to Custom) Selections: (in seconds) – 0 - disables the ‘heartbeat’ poll. – 5 to 65534 - enables the poll rate for the amount of time programmed here (in seconds). – 65535 - the 'heartbeat' poll occurs once a day. Notice! Receiver Supervision Time, page 63 parameter must be set to Custom to edit Poll Rate (sec.), page 64, ACK Wait Time (sec.), page 66 and Retry Count, page 66 parameters With the exception of the Custom selection, the Receiver Supervision Time parameter automatically sets the Poll Rate, ACK Wait Time, and Retry Count parameters. These parameters can only be edited when the Receiver Supervision Time parameter is set to Custom. The first time Custom is selected, the default value for the Poll Rate, ACK Wait and Retry Count parameters is zero. Once these parameters are changed from the default, RPS retains the values even if the Receiver Supervision Time parameter is changed from the Custom selection. Each time Custom is reselected the Poll Rate, ACK Wait and Retry Count parameters are reset to the saved values. When the Receiver Supervision Time is set to Custom, use this parameter to set the interval (in seconds) in which each SDI2 destination sends a heartbeat poll to the central station receiver for supervision purposes. This ensures the integrity of the connection at all times. The value entered in ACK Wait Time (Destinations 1 to 4) is the length of time the control panel waits for an acknowledgment of a heartbeat poll. If the acknowledgment is not received, the control panel checks to determine if the destination's retry count entry is greater than zero. If so, the control panel retries the number of times entered in Retry Count (Destinations 1 to 4) to send the heartbeat poll before declaring the path failed and generating a COMM FAIL SDI2 ## event. (Refer to the table below for the correct ## value.) Device Destination 1 Destination 2 Destination 3 Destination 4 SDI2-1 11 21 31 41 Onboard 10 20 30 40 Onboard Cellular 18 28 38 48 Ethernet 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 65 Poll Rate (Destinations 1 to 4), ACK Wait Time (Destinations 1 to 4), and Retry Count (Destinations 1 to 4) determine how the network destination is supervised between the communication device and the central station receiver(s). Do not confuse the SDI2 destination supervision with the supervision of the SDI2 device itself (the connection of the SDI2 device to the control panel). If this parameter is programmed with a value and the central station does not acknowledge the poll from the control panel, keypads sound a trouble event. To send this event to the central station, refer to Comm Fail for more information. Heartbeat Example: – Poll Rate (Destinations 1 to 4) = 120 seconds – ACK Wait Time (Destinations 1 to 4) = 10 seconds – Retry Count (Destinations 1 to 4) = 2 When the control panel first powers up, the first heartbeat poll for Destination 1 is sent and acknowledged in 1 second. 120 seconds after the first heartbeat poll is sent, the second heartbeat poll for Destination 1 is sent to the central station receiver. Retry Count Example: An acknowledgement of the heartbeat was not received within 10 seconds. The control panel sends the next heartbeat poll after the first 10-second ACK wait period expires. If the central station does not acknowledge this heartbeat poll, the control panel continues to resend. When the resend count is reached, the control panel declares this path as failed and generates the Comm Fail ## event. The control panel continues to re-send the heartbeat poll every 10 seconds until it receives an acknowledgement, even after declaring a Comm Fail. When the control panel receives acknowledgement from the central station, the control panel returns to the normal poll rate. If more than one network destination is used, the control panel handles them on a successive basis. For example, if acknowledgement from SDI Destination 1 is not received within 10 seconds (based on the above example), the control panel moves to SDI Destination 2 to send its heartbeat poll, and subsequently waits for the ACK before returning to SDI Destination 1 to resend the heartbeat poll. Entries are made in 1-second increments. – 5 minutes = 300 seconds – 1 hour = 3600 seconds – 12 hours = 43,200 seconds – 18 hours = 64,800 seconds If heartbeat polls are enabled to send by an SDI Destination, and ACK Wait Time (Destinations1 to 4) is exceeded, a COMM FAIL ## event occurs. When this event occurs, all events routed to this destination go immediately to the backup destination. Notice! When sending reports to a central station receiver over a network destination, set this parameter to a non-zero value. Failure to program a value into this parameter could prevent a failed network communication destination from restoring to normal. If the control panel is programmed to send a heartbeat poll to the central station, a rate of 75 seconds maintains the virtual link in most network configurations. Decreasing the value for this parameter increases the amount of idle communication between the SDI2 device and the central station receiver. Increased idle communication between the control panel and receiver decreases the control panel's event reporting efficiency. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 66 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel The control panel readjusts the heartbeat poll rate temporarily from less than 300 seconds to 300 seconds when online with RPS. The poll rate returns to the programmed value after the RPS session ends. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Enhanced Communications > Poll Rate 3.11.6 ACK Wait Time (sec.) Default: 0 (Receiver Supervision Time parameter set to Custom) Selections: 5 to 65535 (seconds) Notice! Receiver Supervision Time, page 63 parameter must be set to Custom to edit Poll Rate (sec.), page 64, ACK Wait Time (sec.), page 66 and Retry Count, page 66 parameters With the exception of the Custom selection, the Receiver Supervision Time parameter automatically sets the Poll Rate, ACK Wait Time, and Retry Count parameters. These parameters can only be edited when the Receiver Supervision Time parameter is set to Custom. The first time Custom is selected, the default value for the Poll Rate, ACK Wait and Retry Count parameters is zero. Once these parameters are changed from the default, RPS retains the values even if the Receiver Supervision Time parameter is changed from the Custom selection. Each time Custom is reselected the Poll Rate, ACK Wait and Retry Count parameters are reset to the saved values. This parameter determines how long the control panel will wait for an acknowledgement from the central station after a heartbeat poll or an actual event has been transmitted. Actual (nonheartbeat) events will wait the set value or a maximum of 15 seconds before the next communication attempt is made. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Enhanced Communications > ACK Wait Time 3.11.7 Retry Count Default: 0 (Receiver Supervision Time parameter set to Custom) Selections: 0 - continuous retries. Path failure events are not generated. 1 to 255 - path failure events are generated after the number of retries are reached. Notice! Receiver Supervision Time, page 63 parameter must be set to Custom to edit Poll Rate (sec.), page 64, ACK Wait Time (sec.), page 66 and Retry Count, page 66 parameters With the exception of the Custom selection, the Receiver Supervision Time parameter automatically sets the Poll Rate, ACK Wait Time, and Retry Count parameters. These parameters can only be edited when the Receiver Supervision Time parameter is set to Custom. The first time Custom is selected, the default value for the Poll Rate, ACK Wait and Retry Count parameters is zero. Once these parameters are changed from the default, RPS retains the values even if the Receiver Supervision Time parameter is changed from the Custom selection. Each time Custom is reselected the Poll Rate, ACK Wait and Retry Count parameters are reset to the saved values. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 67 This parameter determines how many times the control panel will re-send the heartbeat event before declaring a Path Failure for a given SDI2 Destination. An event is defined by the following device and destination combinations. Device Destination 1 Destination 2 Destination 3 Destination 4 SDI2-1 11 21 31 41 Onboard 10 20 30 40 Onboard Cellular 18 28 38 48 Ethernet RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Enhanced Communications > Retry Count 3.11.8 AES Key Size Default: No Encryption Selections: – No Encryption – 128 bit key length is 16 bytes. – 192 bit key length is 24 bytes. – 256 bit key length is 32 bytes. This parameter identifies the AES key size. RPS Menu Location: Panel Wide Parameters > Enhanced Communications > AES Key Size 3.11.9 AES Encryption Key Default:(not encrypted) Selections: Thirty-two hexadecimal characters represented by an ID (01 to 100). This parameter allows each receiver destination to be configured with a unique AES encryption key. The AES Encryption Key is based on AES Key Size, page 67. For the encryption key configuration, only Key ID & Name is displayed. By default RPS sets the AES Key string to . RPS validates if two or more network destinations have the same network address. If yes, then RPS notifies the user to use the same encryption key for those network destinations. AES key strings are configured in Config >> System >> Encryption Key Tab RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Enhanced Communications > AES Encryption Key 3.12 SDI2 RPS / Enhanced Communication 3.12.1 Enable Enhanced Communication? Default: Yes Selections: – Yes - enables reporting using an IP communicator (onboard, plug-in cellular, or SDI2). – No - disables reporting using an IP communicator. To enable reporting using an IP communicator (onboard, plug-in cellular, or SDI2), set this parameter to Yes, and set the Primary Destination Device, page 59 or Backup Destination Device, page 60 for at least one Route Group to an Onboard IP, Plug-in Cellular, or SDI2 device. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 68 en | Panel Wide Parameters 3.12.2 Control Panel Answer RPS Over Network? Default: Yes Selections: – Yes - enables automatic RPS initiated connections over the network. – No - prevents automatic RPS initiated connections over the network. This parameter determines if the control panel automatically accepts RPS initiated connections through the onboard Ethernet communicator or a network interface module on the SDI2 bus. If this parameter is set no, RPS initiated connections can be accepted at a keypad by selecting Answer from the RPS menu (Actions > RPS > Answer). Notice! Service Mode allows RPS connections over network When the control panel is in service mode, the control panel automatically accepts RPS initiated connections over the network, even if this parameter is set to No. To place the control panel in installer mode, press and hold the control panel RESET button until the Heartbeat LED flashes fast. Keypads show SERVICE MODE and prompt for the installer passcode. Enter the installer passcode and press [ENTER]. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > SDI RPS/Enhanced Communication > Answer RPS Over Network 3.12.3 RPS Address Verification Default: No Selections: – Yes - this setting verifies that the incoming RPS IP address matches the address entered in RPS Network Address, page 68. – No this setting allows RPS to connect to the control panel from any IP address. No verification is performed. When enabled, this parameter verifies that RPS connects to the control panel from a known IP address. This verification can be temporarily disabled by selecting ALLOW ANSWER in the MENU 34 menu. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > SDI RPS/Enhanced Communication > RPS Address Verification 3.12.4 RPS Network Address Default: Blank Selections: IPv4 address or Hostname This parameter sets the IP address or hostname for RPS. Be sure to contact your network administrator to find out which IP Address or hostname your RPS computer is connected to. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > SDI RPS/Enhanced Communication > RPS Network Address 3.12.5 RPS Port Number Default: 7750 Selections: 1 – 65535 This parameter is used as the destination UDP port for control panel-initiated RPS network sessions. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 69 RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > SDI RPS/Enhanced Communication > RPS Port Number 3.13 Power Supervision 3.13.1 AC Fail Time Default: 01:00 Selections: 00:01 to 90:00 (Minutes:Seconds) This parameter sets the amount of time that the AC power must be off before the control panel sends an AC Failure report. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Power Supervision > AC Fail Time 3.13.2 Resend AC Fail Default: No Reports Selections: – No Report -do not re-send AC Fail report. – After 6 Hours - e-send AC Fail report to central station after 6 hours of non-restoral. – After 12 Hours - re-send AC Fail report to central station after 12 hours of non-restoral. This parameter sets the time interval that must pass without the AC failure event being restored before the control panel re-sends the AC Failure report to the central station. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Power Supervision > Resend AC Fail 3.13.3 AC Fail Display Default: 60 Selections: 10 to 300 (seconds) (increments of 5) This parameter sets the amount of time in seconds the system waits before sounding a local AC Failure annunciation. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Power Supervision > AC Fail Display 3.13.4 AC Fail / Restoral Report Default: No Selections: – Yes - end AC Fail and AC Restoral reports. – No - do not send AC Fail and AC Restoral reports. This parameter sends AC Power Supervision reports to the central station at the time programmed for AC Fail Time. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Power Supervision > AC Fail/Restoral Report 3.13.5 AC Tag Along Default: Yes Selections: – Yes - send AC messages as tag along events. – No - do not send AC messages as tag along events. This parameter sends AC reports only if any other event occurs while AC is off-normal. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Power Supervision > AC Tag Along. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 70 en | Panel Wide Parameters 3.13.6 Control Panel AC / Battery Buzz Default: No Selections: – Yes - initiate panel-wide trouble tone at all keypads. – No - do not Initiate panel-wide trouble tone at keypads. This parameter initiates a panel-wide trouble tone at keypads when the AC fails or the battery is low or missing. This parameter does not prevent AC fail or low battery displays at the keypad. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Power Supervision > AC/Battery Buzz 3.13.7 Battery Fail / Restoral Report Default: Yes Selections: – Yes - battery failure and restoral reports are sent to the central station. They are routed to the telephone number programmed for Power/Phone events. – No - battery failure and restoral reports are NOT sent to the central station. This parameter determines if a report is sent if the battery is low or missing. The battery must be discharged below 12.1 VDC for 16 seconds before the control panel responds to a low battery. It takes between 10 and 60 seconds for a missing battery to be detected. Modem reports: Missing or shorted BATTERY MISSING; discharged below 12.1 VDC BATTERY LOW Contact ID reports: Missing or shorted BATTERY MISSING/DEAD; discharged below 12.1 VDC LOW SYSTEM BATTERY RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Power Supervision > Battery Fail/Restoral Report. 3.14 RPS Parameters 3.14.1 RPS Passcode Default: 999999 Selections: 6 - 24 alphanumeric characters in length This parameter verifies that the RPS operator has valid access to connect to the control panel. Enter a minimum of six characters. Do not use spaces in the passcode. Passcode is casesensitive. The control panel provides an RPS passcode configuration option. This option accepts up to 24 characters, but will allow shorter passcodes. When RPS connects to the control panel, the correct passcode must be supplied before the control panel will allow RPS to access any configuration data or control functions. The RPS passcode defaults to "999999" in the control panel. In an RPS default account, the passcode is also "999999". A default RPS account can connect to a default control panel without modifying the RPS passcode in either the RPS account or in the control panel. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > RPS Parameters > RPS Passcode 3.14.2 Log % Full Default: 0 Selections: 0 to 99 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 0 (zero)- 71 This setting disables the LOG THRESHOLD and LOG OVERFLOW events. These events are not put in the log nor reported to the central station receiver. The control panel continues to log events after the LOG THRESHOLD report is sent. When it reaches 100% capacity (memory logger is full and previously stored events will be overwritten), the control panel generates a local LOG OVERFLOW event. This parameter determines how full the memory log should be before initiating a call to RPS at the central station. This allows the central station to call the control panel and copy the memory log before messages could be overwritten. The control panel does not call RPS again until it downloads the log and the Log % Full percentage is again reached. These events are also sent to the control panel's event log. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > RPS Parameters > Log % Full. 3.14.3 Contact RPS if Log % Full Default: No Selections: Yes - the control panel automatically contacts RPS when the “Log % Full” threshold is reached. No - the control panel does not automatically contact RPS when the “Log % Full” threshold is reached. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > RPS Parameters > Contact RPS if Log % Full. 3.14.4 RPS Call Back Default: No Selections: – Yes - when the control panel hears the proper RPS passcode, it hangs up the phone, seizes the phone line, then dials the programmed RPS phone number Refer to RPS Phone #, page 73. This ensures that only the control panel communicates with the RPS PC connected to the dialed phone number. – No - the RPS session is initiated immediately; no call back is required. The control panel engages in RPS sessions when called from any phone number and a proper RPS passcode is identified. Notice! When using the RPS Callback function, enter a "C" as the last digit in the RPS phone number if DTMF dialing is used. This parameter allows the control panel, after it has verified the RPS passcode, to provide an additional level of security by hanging up and dialing the RPS phone number to call RPS at the central station prior to allowing any upload or download. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > RPS Parameters > RPS Call Back 3.14.5 RPS Line Monitor Default: Yes Selections: – Yes - this setting allows the control panel to communicate with RPS after the answering machine has answered the phone. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 72 en | Panel Wide Parameters – Control Panel No - use this setting if the control panel is not sharing the phone line with an answering machine. This parameter enables a control panel that shares a phone line with an answering machine to communicate with RPS at the central station even though the answering machine has answered the phone. You must set Answer Armed, page 72 and/or Answer Disarmed, page 72, and the control panel must be in the proper armed state. Notice! If RPS Call Back, page 71 is set to Yes, the control panel hangs up the phone after the RPS tone and a proper RPS passcode is identified, then it calls the RPS phone number. Notice! Set this parameter to No if it causes false seizures of the phone line, or if you are not using RPS. This would indicate that a device using the same frequency tone is also using the phone line to which the control panel is connected. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > RPS Parameters > RPS Line Monitor 3.14.6 Answer Armed Default: 7 Selections: 0 to 15 (rings) – 0 (zero) This setting disables answering the phone. – 1 to 15 Use this setting to have the control panel answer the phone after the specified number of rings when all areas are All On Notice! RPS considers Part On as a disarmed state. This parameter sets the telephone ring counter to answer when all areas are All On. If any area in the control panel is Part On or disarmed, the Answer Disarmed, page 72 ring counter is used. Notice! PSTN requirement for Australia / New Zealand, disable RPS answer armed/disarmed If you set the Panel Wide Parameters > Phone Parameters > PSTN Compatibility parameter to Australia or New Zealand, you must set this Answer Armed and the Answer Disarmed parameter to 0 (disabled). RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > RPS Parameters > Answer Armed 3.14.7 Answer Disarmed Default: 7 Selections: 0 to 15 (rings) – 0 (zero) - this setting disables answering the phone. – 1 to 15 - use this setting to have the control panel answer the phone after the specified number of rings when all areas are All On. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 73 Notice! RPS considers Part On as a disarmed state. This parameter sets the telephone ring counter to answer when any area is in a Part On or disarmed state. Notice! PSTN requirement for Australia / New Zealand, disable RPS answer armed/disarmed If you set the Panel Wide Parameters > Phone Parameters > PSTN Compatibility parameter to Australia or New Zealand, you must set the Answer Armed and this Answer Disarmed parameter to 0 (disabled). RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > RPS Parameters > Answer Disarmed. 3.14.8 RPS Phone # Default: Blank Selections: Up to 24 characters This parameter specifies the phone number the control panel dials to contact RPS. The control panel dials the programmed number using RPS Phone # as a result of the following events: – Log % Full, page 70 threshold is achieved (if enabled). – The control panel is contacted by RPS and RPS Call Back, page 71 is programmed Yes. – User selects MENU > Actions > RPS > Call Via Phone (only one attempt is made). If this parameter is left empty (blank), the control panel does not dial a phone number for RPS. Refer to Phone Destination 1 (to 4), page 29 when programming this parameter. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > RPS Parameters > RPS Phone 3.14.9 RPS Modem Speed Default: 1200 Selections: – 300 – 1200 – 2400 This parameter sets the baud rate for RPS-to-control panel-communication when using a PSTN connection. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > RPS Parameters > RPS Modem Speed. 3.15 Miscellaneous 3.15.1 Duress Type Default: 0 Selections: – 0 - disabled. – 1 - increase the last digit by 1 to generate an alarm. For example: – Bosch Security Systems, Inc. If the passcode is 6123, 6124 activates a duress alarm. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 74 en | Panel Wide Parameters – Control Panel If the last digit of the passcode is 0, a duress alarm occurs when the user enters 1 as the last digit of the passcode. – If the last digit of the passcode is 9, a duress alarm occurs when the user enters 0 as the last digit of the passcode. – 2 -increase the last digit by 2 to generate an alarm. For example: – If the last digit of the passcode is 8, a duress alarm occurs when the user enters 0 as the last digit of the passcode. – If the last digit of the passcode is 9, a duress alarm occurs when the user enters 1 as the last digit of the passcode. – 3 -send a Duress event when any user passcode entered with Send Duress, page 165 set to Yes. This parameter determines whether users add one (+1) or two (+2) to the last digit of the passcode. To activate a duress alarm, the user increases the value of the last digit of their passcode when entering it at the keypad. Notice! SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction requirement To comply with SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction, set this parameter to 3. Refer to SIA CP-01 Verification for more information Duress is enabled or disabled by area in Area Parameters, Duress Enable, page 93. The duress alarm is activated when a user enters the duress combination followed by the termination keys (ESC or ENT). RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Duress Type. 3.15.2 Cancel Reports Default: Yes Selections: – Yes - send Cancel, Fire Cancel and Gas Cancel reports according to Routing. – No - do not send Cancel, Fire Cancel and Gas Cancel reports. Use this parameter to determine whether or not Cancel, Fire Cancel and Gas Cancel reports are sent. Notice! SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction requirement To comply with SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction, set this parameter to Yes. Refer to SIA CP-01 Verification for more information. A Cancel, Fire Cancel and Gas Cancel report is created when a passcode is entered to silence an Alarm Bell, Gas Bell or a Fire Bell before the bell time expires. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Cancel Reports 3.15.3 Call for Service Text - First Language Default: Contact your dealer Selections: Enter up to 32 characters. This parameter allows the user to customize the Call for Service message that is displayed at keypads. Enter up to 32 characters of text, numbers and symbols. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 75 Keypads display the first 20 characters. If more than 20 characters are used, the text scrolls across the display one time. To scroll the text again, press [ESC]. Spaces before, after and within a string of text are treated as text and are included in the 32 character limit. Note: First and Second languages are programmed during panel account setup in the Panel Data window. Supported languages include English, Spanish, French and Portuguese. To view the languages selected during account set-up, refer to Panel Wide Parameters > Personal Notification > User Language. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Call for Service Text - English 3.15.4 Call for Service Text - Second Language Default: Blank Selections: Enter up to 32 characters. This parameter allows the user to customize the Call for Service message that is displayed at keypads. Enter up to 32 characters of text, numbers and symbols. Keypads display the first 20 characters. If more than 20 characters are used, the text scrolls across the display one time. To scroll the text again, press [ESC]. Spaces before, after and within a string of text are treated as text and are included in the 32 character limit. Note: First and Second languages are programmed during panel account setup in the Panel Data window. Supported languages include English, Spanish, French and Portuguese. To view the languages selected during account set-up, refer to Panel Wide Parameters > Personal Notification > User Language. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Call for Service Text- Second Language 3.15.5 On Site Authorization for Firmware Update Default: No Selections: – Yes - require on-site authorization. – No - on-site authorization is not required. This parameter requires authorized on-site personnel to enter the authorization code at one of the keypads at the designated time during the remote firmware update process. Notice! Set this parameter to "Yes" for UL listed systems. If authorization is required, you can modify the authority level required for the authorized user. NOTE: It is recommend that a full system test be performed whenever firmware is updated locally or remotely. Remote firmware updates through Remote Programming Software (RPS) using the RPS Firmware Update Wizard through the IP connection (on-board ethernet connection or a B42x module), provides for easy feature enhancements without replacing ROM chips. Remote firmware updates must be authorized on-site for UL listed systems. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > On-Site Authorization for Firmware Update. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 76 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel Further information Firmware Update, page 169 3.15.6 Enclosure Tamper Enable Default: No Selections: – Yes - this setting enables the tamper input to generate a system trouble. – No - no tamper events will be generated from the tamper input. This parameter monitors the enclosure and processes an enclosure tamper event when the enclosure is opened. Note: This function can only be set from RPS. If the option is changed from Yes to No, an existing enclosure tamper event is cleared, but its restoral is not logged or reported. If the option is changed from No to Yes, the tamper input is not processed until after the control panel detects that the tamper input is normal. Tamper or tamper restoral is recognized if the event lasts for at least 250 milliseconds. When the control panel is powered up, or is re-starting for any reason, the tamper input is ignored until the control panel sees the tamper input become normal. (The installer closes the enclosure.) Once normal (closed), opening the enclosure might cause an enclosure tamper trouble. When an enclosure tamper event is processed, it is indicated on the keypads' displays and the keypads sound a trouble tone. When the enclosure tamper has been restored, the control panel automatically removes the tampered enclosure message from the keypads' displays and the trouble tone is silenced if no other trouble events exist. While an enclosure tamper is displayed at the keypad, the tamper event does not affect the arming or disarming process. If installed and enabled, detects control panel door has been opened. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Enclosure Tamper Enable 3.15.7 Fire Summary Sustain Default: Yes Selections: – Yes - forces the Summary Fire and Summary Gas output to remain on after the Alarm Silence command. – No - allows Summary Fire and Summary Gas output to activate when a corresponding point in the system goes into alarm. This output provides a steady output until all silenced fire or gas points in the system are returned to normal. This parameter provides a continuous alarm output to keep fire or gas strobes active after the fire or gas bell has stopped sounding. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Fire Summary Sustain 3.15.8 Fire Supervision Event Type Default: 2 (Fire Supervision Restoral) Selections: – 0 (Fire Trouble Restoral) - the control panel transmits a FIRE TROUBLE RESTORE when a Fire Supervision point restores to normal. – 1 (Fire Alarm Restoral) - the control panel transmits a FIRE ALARM RESTORE when a Fire Supervision point restores to normal. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en – 77 2 (Fire Supervision Restoral) - the control panel transmits a FIRE SUPERVISION RESTORE when a Fire Supervision point restores to normal. This parameter determines how the control panel transmits a Fire Supervision Restoral event. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Fire Supervision Event Type 3.15.9 Fire Trouble Resound Default: No Fire Trouble Resound Selections: – No Fire Trouble Resound - keypads will not re-sound the trouble tone. – Fire Trouble Resound @ 12:00 PM - keypads will re-sound the trouble tone at 12:00 P.M. (noon) if any fire or gas point that falls within the scope of a keypad is in an off-normal state. – Fire Trouble Resound @ 12:00 AM - keypads will re-sound the trouble tone at 12:00 A.M. (midnight) if any fire or gas point that falls within the scope of a keypad is in an offnormal state. This parameter determines if a fire or gas trouble event, although previously acknowledged and silenced at a keypad, will automatically resound the trouble tone at 12:00 P.M., 12:00 A.M., or not at all if the point is still in an off-normal state. A user's passcode must have an authority level of 1 or greater in an area to silence troubles. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Fire Trouble Resound 3.15.10 Early Ambush Time Default: 10 Selections: 5 to 30 (minutes) (1-minute increments) Use this parameter to enter the amount of time allowed for the user to enter a second passcode at the keypad when the Area parameter, Early Ambush?, page 97 is set to Yes. If a second passcode is not entered before the Early Ambush Time ends, a Duress event is generated based on the first user passcode. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Early Ambush Time 3.15.11 Second Ambush Code Default: Unique Selections: – Unique - the passcode used to end the Early Ambush Time, page 77 must be different from the passcode used to disarm the area. – Any - the Early Ambush Time can be stopped using a different passcode, or the same passcode used to disarm the area. This parameter determines whether the same passcode can be used to start and end the Early Ambush?, page 97 process. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Second Ambush Code 3.15.12 Abort Window Default: 30 sec Selections: 15 to 45 (seconds) (1-sec increments) Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 78 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel Use this parameter to enter the number of seconds the control panel delays sending an alarm event to the central station from a point assigned to a Point Index with the Alarm Abort, page 194 feature enabled. Notice! To meet UL requirements, the combined Entry Delay, page 185 and Abort Window time must not exceed 60 sec. Notice! For SIA CP-01 Compliance, Abort Window is a required parameter. If an alarm silence operation is performed before this time elapses, the alarm transmission is aborted and the keypad shows an optional message (Refer to Abort Display, page 115). When an abort alarm timer starts, it does not stop until an alarm silence operation is performed, or the time expires. This feature does not apply to fire alarms or invisible point alarms. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Abort Window 3.15.13 Passcode Length Default: Disabled Selections: – Disabled – 3, 4, 5, or 6 digits Select the number of digits allowed in all passcodes. Notice! To comply with SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction, set this parameter between 3 and 6 digits. Refer to SIA CP-01 Verification for more information. If the passcode length is changed and duplicate or unusable passcodes are created as a result, a WARNING! Duplicate / Unusable Passcodes Present window opens. Passcodes identified as a duplicate appear in bold red. Passcodes identified as unusable (length is under or over the value entered in this parameter), appear in bold blue. To change a passcode: 1. Click the appropriate cell in the User Passcode column to select the passcode. 2. Press the [Backspace] key on your keyboard to clear the cell. 3. Enter the new passcode. There are two option buttons that control how this parameter handles passcode entries: – Save corrected passcodes: This option is selected by default. All passcodes marked as duplicate or unusable must be fixed before you click OK to save the passcode corrections. – Disable passcode length and store the data in this account: This option disables the Passcode Length parameter and allows you to save passcodes of varying lengths in the RPS account. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 79 Notice! When the second option (Disable passcode length and store the data in this account) is selected, RPS sets the SIA CP-01 Verification parameter to No and then notifies the RPS operator with a Yes/No dialog for each of the following scenarios. Select Yes or No as appropriate. Notice! Change in Passcode Length Parameter RPS displays the following message dialog: "This operation will cause the Passcode Length to be disabled, SIA CP-01 Verification parameter will be set to No and previously existing RPS passcode data will be stored. Are you sure you want to continue?” Notice! Passcode Length Changes via the SIA CP-01 Verification Parameter RPS displays the following message dialog: “This operation will cause the Passcode Length to be disabled, all other parameters previously updated in the SIA Compliance Warning window will be saved, SIA CP-01 Verification parameter will be set to No and previously existing RPS passcode data will be stored. Are you sure you want to continue?” Notice! Incorrect Passcodes RPS displays the following message dialog: “This operation will cause the Passcode Length to be disabled, SIA CP-01 Verification parameter will be set to No and the control panel’s passcode data will be stored. Are you sure you want to continue?” Notice! Passcode Length Change during Send/Receive RPS displays the following message dialog: “This operation will cause the Passcode Length to be disabled, all other parameters previously updated in the SIA Compliance Warning window will be saved, SIA CP-01 Verification parameter will be set to No and the control panel’s passcode data will be stored. Are you sure you want to continue? “ Similar and Duplicate Passcodes – Similar Passcodes: If the passcode you enter resembles another existing passcode, the existing passcode appears in the Existing Similar Passcodes field. – Duplicate Passcodes: If you enter a passcode that matches an existing passcode, the existing passcodes appear in the Duplicate/Duress Passcodes field. Passcode matches are based on duplicate entries with the length set to the lowest value that complies with SIA CP-01 (3). For example, if you enter "478123" as a passcode for User 2, and "478321" as a passcode for User 3, and you set Passcode Length to three digits, the passcodes for Users 2 and 3 appear in the Duplicate/Duress Passcodes field because both of these passcodes share "478" as the first three digits. If Passcode Length were changed from four digits to three digits, all of these passcodes would become duplicate passcodes of "478." RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Passcode Length 3.15.14 Swinger Bypass Count Default: 2 Selections: 1 to 4 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 80 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel This parameter sets the maximum number of faults allowed on a point within an hour before it is automatically bypassed. Notice! To comply with SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction, set this parameter to either 1 or 2. Refer to SIA CP-01 Verification for more information. When upgrading a non-control panel account to a control panel account, RPS forces the default to 4. Use this value for backward compatibility with previous control panel operation. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Swinger Bypass Count 3.15.15 Remote Warning Default: No Selections: – Yes. The system uses the alarm bell output to annunciate the arming and disarming of an area through remote software, or a remote arming device (keyswitch, Inovonics Pendant Transmitter or RADION keyfob). – No. No remote warning occurs to annunciate the arming or disarming of an area through remote software, or a remote arming device (keyswitch, or RADION keyfob). This parameter pulses the Alarm Bell, page 129 once (2-sec ON, then OFF) when the assigned area is remotely armed, and twice (2-sec ON, 2-sec OFF, 2-sec ON, then OFF) when the area is remotely disarmed. This parameter also applies to keyswitch arming and disarming. Notice! Type and source of hazard To comply with SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction, set this parameter to Yes. Refer to SIA CP-01 Verification for more information. When upgrading a non- control panel account to a control panel account, RPS forces the default to No. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Remote Warning 3.15.16 Crystal Time Adjust Default: No Selections: – Yes - the control panel uses the on-board crystal frequency to regulate its clock time. – No - the control panel uses traditional AC frequency to regulate its clock time. This parameter determines how the control panel regulates its clock time. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Crystal Time Adjust 3.15.17 Part On Output Default: No Selections: – Yes - the Fail to Close outputs become Part On outputs. This output is activated when all areas assigned to the same output are armed Part On Instant or Part On Delayed. – No - the Fail to Close outputs operate when the closing window expires for the specified area. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 81 This parameter activates outputs when all areas assigned to the same output are armed as Part On Instant or Part On Delay. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Part On Output Further information Fail to Close/Part On Armed, page 130 3.15.18 Early Area Armed Output Default: No Selections: – Yes - activates the area wide armed or Part On output at the start of Exit Delay time. – No - activates the area wide armed or Part On output at the end of Exit Delay time. This parameter activates the area wide armed output RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Early Area Armed Output 3.15.19 Daylight Saving Time Default: No DST Selections: – No DST – The control panel will not adjust its clock for daylight saving time. – US DST – Brazil DST – Mexico DST – Paraguay DST – Australia DST – New Zealand DST – EU DST This parameter enables the control panel to adjust its clock according to daylight saving time rules for the countries shown. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Daylight Saving Time 3.15.20 Date Format Default: mm dd yy Selections: – mm dd yy – dd mm yy – yy mm dd This parameter determines how the date is displayed. Choose how the month, day, and year are delimited (separated) in the Date Delimiter parameter. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Date Format 3.15.21 Date Delimiter Default: / (forward slash) Selections: – / (forward slash) – . (period) Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 82 en | Panel Wide Parameters – Control Panel - (dash) This parameter determines how the month (mm), day (dd), and year (yy) are delimited (separated). Choose how the month, day, and year are displayed in the Date Format parameter. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Date Delimiter 3.15.22 Time Format Default: 12 hour (with AM/PM) Selections: – 12 hour (with AM/PM) – 24 hour This parameter determines how time of day is displayed. Choose the 12 hour format, hh:mm AM (or PM), or 24 hour format, hh:mm (00:00 to 23:59). RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Time Format 3.15.23 Time Zone Default: UTC-05:00 (Eastern Time, US & Canada) Selections: Time Zones and UTC This parameter identifies the time zone for the region where the control panel is installed. (UTC-12:00) International Date Line West (UTC-11:00) Midway Island, Samoa (UTC-10:00) Hawaii (UTC-09:00) Alaska (UTC-08:00) Pacific Time (US & Canada) (UTC-08:00) Tijuana, Baja California (UTC-07:00) Arizona (UTC-07:00) Chihuahua, La Paz, Mazatlan (UTC-07:00) Mountain Time (US & Canada) (UTC-06:00) Central America (UTC-06:00) Central Time (US & Canada) (UTC-06:00) Guadalajara, Mexico City, Monterrey (UTC-06:00) Saskatchewan (UTC-05:00) Bogota, Lima, Quito (UTC-05:00) Eastern Time (US & Canada) (UTC-05:00) Indiana (East) (UTC-04:30) Caracas (UTC-04:00) Asuncion (UTC-04:00) Atlantic Time (Canada) (UTC-04:00) Georgetown, La Paz, San Juan (UTC-04:00) Manaus (UTC-04:00) Santiago (UTC-03:30) Newfoundland (UTC-03:00) Brasilia (UTC-03:00) Buenos Aires (UTC-03:00) Cayenne (UTC-03:00) Greenland (UTC-03:00) Montevideo (UTC-02:00) Mid-Atlantic 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en 83 (UTC-01:00) Azores (UTC-01:00) Cape Verde Is. (UTC) Casablanca (UTC) Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London (UTC) Monrovia, Reykjavik (UTC+01:00) Amsterdam, Berlin, Bern, Rome, Stockholm, Vienna (UTC+01:00) Belgrade, Bratislava, Budapest, Ljubljana, Prague (UTC+01:00) Brussels, Copenhagen, Madrid, Paris (UTC+01:00) Sarajevo, Skopje, Warsaw, Zagreb (UTC+01:00) West Central Africa (UTC+02:00) Amman (UTC+02:00) Athens, Bucharest, Istanbul (UTC+02:00) Beirut (UTC+02:00) Cairo (UTC+02:00) Harare, Pretoria (UTC+02:00) Helsinki, Kyiv, Riga, Sofia, Tallinn, Vilnius (UTC+02:00) Jerusalem (UTC+02:00) Minsk (UTC+02:00) Windhoek (UTC+03:00) Baghdad (UTC+03:00) Kuwait, Riyadh (UTC+03:00) Moscow, St. Petersburg, Volgograd (UTC+03:00) Nairobi (UTC+03:00) Tbilisi (UTC+03:30) Tehran (UTC+04:00) Abu Dhabi, Muscat (UTC+04:00) Baku (UTC+04:00) Port Louis (UTC+04:00) Yerevan (UTC+04:30) Kabul (UTC+05:00) Ekaterinburg (UTC+05:00) Islamabad, Karachi (UTC+05:00) Tashkent (UTC+05:30) Chennai, Kolkata, Mumbai, New Delhi (UTC+05:30) Sri Jayawardenepura (UTC+05:45) Kathmandu (UTC+06:00) Almaty, Novosibirsk (UTC+06:00) Astana, Dhaka (UTC+06:30) Yangon (Rangoon) (UTC+07:00) Bangkok, Hanoi, Jakarta (UTC+07:00) Krasnoyarsk (UTC+08:00) Beijing, Chongqing, Hong Kong, Urumqi (UTC+08:00) Irkutsk, Ulaan Bataar (UTC+08:00) Kuala Lumpur, Singapore (UTC+08:00) Perth (UTC+08:00) Taipei (UTC+09:00) Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo (UTC+09:00) Seoul Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 84 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel (UTC+09:00) Yakutsk (UTC+09:30) Adelaide (UTC+09:30) Darwin (UTC+10:00) Brisbane (UTC+10:00) Canberra, Melbourne, Sydney (UTC+10:00) Guam, Port Moresby (UTC+10:00) Hobart (UTC+10:00) Vladivostok (UTC+11:00) Magadan, Solomon Is., New Caledonia (UTC+12:00) Auckland, Wellington (UTC+12:00) Fiji, Marshall Is. (UTC+12:00) Petropavlovsk-Kamchatsky (UTC+13:00) Nuku'alofa RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Miscellaneous > Time Zone 3.16 Personal Notification Destinations 3.16.1 Description Default: Blank (text is for reference only) Selections: 0 to 32 characters in length This parameter sets the text to identify the personal notification device or notification addressee. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Personal Notification > Personal Notification Destinations > Description. 3.16.2 SMS Phone # / email address Default: Blank Selections: Up to 255 alphanumeric characters This parameter specifies either the destination phone number that will receive an SMS text notification or the email address that will receive an email message. SMS Phone # The control panel sends personal notifications to a cellular device when the programmed destination is a valid cellular telephone number containing only numbers 0-9. Hyphens are not allowed. Email Address The control panel sends personal notifications to email accounts when the programmed destination is a valid email address. An email address is considered valid if it is copied verbatim from an internet email provider. Note: if the destination is neither a valid phone nor valid email, no message will be sent and an SMS send error will be logged. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Personal Notification > Personal Notification Destinations > SMS Phone #/email address 3.16.3 User Language Default: 1:(language programmed as first language in Panel Data window) Selections: – 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 1:(first language) Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Panel Wide Parameters | en – 85 2:(second language) This selection determines the language that the personal notification message is sent in. First and Second languages are programmed during panel account setup in the New Panel Data window. Supported languages include English, Spanish, French and Portuguese. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Personal Notification > Personal Notifications Destinations > User Language 3.16.4 Method Default: Plug in Cellular Sms Selections: – None – Plug-in Cellular SMS - may be selected if you have a B44x plug-in cellular module. – Plug-in Cellular Email - may be selected if you have a B44x plug-in cellular module. – Bus Device Cellular SMS - may be selected if you have a B450 v2 module. – Bus Device Email - may be selected if you have a B450 v2, or a B426 v3 module. – On-board Ethernet Email - may be selected if your connection is on-board IP. This selection will determine if an SMS (text message) or email is sent to the desired Personal Notification destination and it determines which device will be used to route the message. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Personal Notification > Personal Notifications Destinations > Method 3.17 Personal Notification Reports IMPORTANT CELLULAR SERVICE INFORMATION Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for important information regarding how to set up your control panel to ensure proper cellular communication with the central station receiver. This parameter can be set to send personal notifications to a cellular device or email address. The control panel sends personal notifications to a cellular device when the programmed destination is a valid cellular telephone number containing only numbers 0-9. Properly interspersed hyphens are allowed, but not required. The control panel sends personal notifications to email accounts when the programmed destination is a valid email address. An email address is considered valid if it is copied verbatim from an internet email provider. Notice! If the destination is neither a valid phone or valid email, no message will be sent, and an SMS send error will be logged. Notice! You are not required to set the Primary or Backup Destination Device parameters to Cellular IP for Personal Notification by SMS to work. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Personal Notification > Personal Notifications Reports > Personal Notification 1-4 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 86 en | Panel Wide Parameters 3.18 Control Panel Personal Notification Routing Attempts Default: 3 Selections: 1-6 This parameter sets the maximum number of attempts the control panel makes to send a personal notification. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Personal Notification > Personal Notification Routing Attempts 3.19 Email Server Configuration You can program the control panels to send personal notifications to one or more email addresses (up to 16 destinations). When an event occurs, the control panel transmits a report across an IP network to an email server. The SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) email server translates the incoming data into text and then pushes it out to the destinations you programmed. This is a one-way communication from the control panel to the user. Callout - Description 1 - Alarm event 2 - Compatible Bosch control panel 3 - Internet 4 - SMTP email server 5 - Computer or other device used to receive email SMTP Email Servers SMTP email servers transfer messages to personal notification email addressees. Refer to Email Server Name/Address for a list of some of the more popular servers and their addresses. If you can't locate the address for your SMTP email server, contact your email provider. Setting up an Email Account To setup an email account that sends emails to the Personal Notification Destinations: 1. Register for an email account from an email provider (example: Google, Yahoo, AOL, Microsoft). 2. Choose a user name that makes it easy for the individuals receiving the notifications to identify which emails are coming from the control panel (example: panelacctstore52). 3. Enter the address associated with the SMTP email server you chose in the Email Server Name/Address parameter. 4. Enter the user name you specified when registering for this account in the Authentication User Name parameter. 5. Enter the password you specified when registering for this account in the Authentication Password parameter. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel 3.19.1 Panel Wide Parameters | en 87 Email server name/address Default: Blank Selections: Domain name or IP address This parameter specifies either the domain name or address for the SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) email server for your chosen email provider. The control panel uses the server's domain name (or address) to transfer event messages from the control panel to designated personal notification email addressees. SMTP Email Servers Refer to the table below for the some of the more popular email providers and their server's domain name. If your provider doesn't appear in the table, contact them for their domain name (or IP address). Email provider Domain name 1&1 smtp.1and1.com Airmail mail.airmail.net AOL smtp.aol.com AT&T outbound.att.net Bluewin smtpauths.bluewin.ch BT Connect mail.btconnect.tom Comcast smtp.comcast.net Earthlink smtpauth.earthlink.net Gmail smtp.gmail.com Gmx mail.gmx.net HotPop mail.hotpop.com Libero mail.libero.it Lycos smtp.lycos.com O2 smtp.o2.com Orange smtp.orange.net Outlook.com (former Hotmail) smtp.live.com Tin mail.tin.i Tiscali smtp.tiscali.co.uk Verizon outgoing.verizon.net Virgin smtp.virgin.net Wanadoo smtp.wanadoo.fr Yahoo smtp.mail.yahoo.com Further information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 88 en | Panel Wide Parameters Control Panel RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Personal Notification > Email Server Configuration > Email Server Name/Address 3.19.2 Email server port number Default: 25 Selections: 1-65535 This parameter specifies the port number for the email server. Port 25 is the default SMTP port for most outgoing servers. If the IP denies the default port number (generally because of the massive spam and malware traffic), try another commonly used port such as port 587 or port 465 to avoid the block. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Personal Notification > Email Server Configuration > Email Server Port Number 3.19.3 Email server authentication/encryption Default: Authenticate Selections: – Basic - no authentication, no encryption – Authenticate - authentication required, no encryption – Encrypted - authentication required, encryption required Use this parameter to set the security level required by the email server to receive messages from the control panel. Authentication means that the email server requires an authentication user name and authentication password. This is sometimes referred to as SMTP-AUTH. The Encryption used is Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) / Transport Layer Security (TLS) RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Personal Notification > Email Server Configuration > Email Server Authentication/Encryption 3.19.4 Authentication user name Default: Blank Selections: Blank, 1 to 255 characters This parameter specifies the user name for the email account that is set up to receive messages from the SMTP server sent by the control panel. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Personal Notification > Email Server Configuration > Authentication User Name 3.19.5 Authentication password Default: Blank Selections: Blank, 1 to 49 characters This parameter sets the password that the SMTP server uses to send emails to the Personal Notification destinations. RPS Menu Location Panel Wide Parameters > Personal Notification > Email Server Configuration > Authentication Password 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Area Wide Parameters | en 4 Area Wide Parameters 4.1 Area / Bell Parameters, Open / Close Options 89 An area is defined as a geographically grouped set of points. Configurations Area programming offers a wide selection of different system configurations. The control panel assigns an account number to each area to define annunciation, control, and reporting functions. Make area arming conditional on other areas (master or associate), if desired. You can configure any area for perimeter and interior arming, not requiring a separate area for this function. Link multiple areas to a shared area which is automatically controlled (hallway or lobby). For systems with more than one area, all areas must be under the responsibility of one ownership and management. This may be a group of buildings attached or unattached and may even have different addresses but are under the responsibility of someone having mutual interest (other than the alarm installing company). This does not apply to strip mall applications where each independent business must have their own separate alarm system. An example for a commercial system would be a business that has an OFFICE area and a WAREHOUSE area in a building where each area can be armed or disarmed independently. As a residential example a system could be configured with the garage and house as separate areas. In each of the examples above all of the areas are under the sole responsibility of a single owner. In multi-area systems the bell (or siren) and control panel must be in one of the protected areas. The bell or siren must be located where it can be heard by users who turn areas on and off (arm and disarm). The B6512 supports up to 6 areas. 4.1.1 Area Name Text Default: Area # (# = the Area number) Selections: Up to 32 characters This parameter sets what is displayed at keypads. This is for informational purposes only. Enter up to 32 characters of text, numbers and symbols to describe the area. – Keypads display the first 20 characters. If more than 20 characters are used, the area name text scrolls across the display one time. To scroll the text again, press [ESC]. – Spaces before, after and within a string of text are treated as text and are included in the 32 character limit. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Area Name Text 4.1.2 Area Name Text (Second Language) Default: Blank Selections: Up to 32 characters This parameter sets what is displayed at keypads. This is for informational purposes only. Enter up to 32 characters of text, numbers and symbols to describe the area. – Keypads display the first 20 characters. If more than 20 characters are used, the area name text scrolls across the display one time. To scroll the text again, press [ESC]. – Spaces before, after and within a string of text are treated as text and are included in the 32 character limit. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 90 en | Area Wide Parameters Control Panel RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Area Name Text (Second Language) 4.1.3 Area On Default: – B6512: – Area 1: Yes – Areas 2 to 6: No Selections: – Yes Area is enabled. – No Area is disabled. This parameter enables or disables the specified area. Notice! To comply with UL 864 requirements for Commercial Fire Systems, set this parameter to Yes. When an area is set to No: – Points assigned to this area do not generate events. – When arming and disarming, this area number is not displayed at keypads with the scope to view this area. – Status for this area is not reported with status reports. – All user authority in this area is turned off while the area is disabled. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Area On 4.1.4 Account Number Default: 0000 Selections: 4 or 10 digit numbers, 0-9, B-F This parameter determines the account number reported for this area. An account number must be assigned to each active area. If 5 or more digits are used in the account number, RPS automatically pads the number with leading zeros to make it a ten-digit number. Notice! Make sure the central station automation software is compatible with 10-digit account numbers before programming a 10-digit account number into the control panel. Notice! Account numbers must not include 'A' for any digit. Account numbers are used to group areas together. Each area can have a different account number, or several areas might share the same account number. The control panel uses the account number as a reference for arming and keypad text displays. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Account Number. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel 4.1.5 Area Wide Parameters | en 91 Force Arm/Bypass Max Default: 2 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 30 This parameter specifies the maximum number of combined controlled points that can be faulted or in a bypassed state when arming this area. Refer to Force Arm Returnable, page 190 and Bypass Returnable, page 190 in the Point Index for returning a point to the system when the point returns to normal or when the area is disarmed. Notice! Points must have Bypassable, page 191 set to Yes to be bypassed or force armed. Force arming does not bypass 24-hour points. Notice! To comply with UL1610, set this parameter to 0 for wireless keyfobs. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Force Arm/Bypass Max. 4.1.6 Delay Restorals Default: No Delay Selections: – No Delay. Point restoral events are logged and reported when the point physically restores. – Delay Until Bell Expires. Point restoral events are not logged or reported until the point has physically restored and the bell silenced or bell time expires. Use this parameter to delay restoral reports. For Fire/Gas Alarm/Supervisory points, restoral events are not logged or reported until the point has physically restored, the bell silenced, and the event cleared from the keypads. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Delay Restorals 4.1.7 Exit Tone Default: Yes Selections: – Yes Sound an exit tone at all keypads during exit delay. – No Turn off exit tones for individual keypads (based on their KP# 1 through 8). This parameter sounds an exit tone during exit delay at all keypads assigned to this area. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Exit Tone 4.1.8 Exit Delay Time Default: 60 Selections: 0 to 600 (seconds, in increments of 5) Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 92 en | Area Wide Parameters Control Panel This parameter sets the amount of time users have to leave the premises without creating an alarm event after turning their system All On - Exit or Part On - Exit. They must leave through a point assigned to a point profile that is configured for a controlled point type with a delayed alarm response (refer to Point Response, page 179) Points programmed for instant alarm response generate alarms immediately, even during exit delay. Notice! To comply with SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction, set this parameter between 45 and 255 seconds. Refer to SIA CP-01 Verification for more information. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Exit Delay Time 4.1.9 Auto Watch Default: Manual Selections: – Manual – users must turn Watch Mode on and off manually from a keypad. – On at Disarm – the control panel automatically turns Watch Mode on when the area is turned off (disarmed). When an area is off (disarmed), Watch Mode is on, and points configured as Watch Point, page 188s are faulted, a watch tone sounds at keypads assigned to the area. When the area is Part On, only interior points configured as Watch Points sound the watch tone when they are faulted. Perimeter points report faults as alarms or troubles. If this Auto Watch parameter is set to Manual and Watch Mode is on when the area is turned On (armed), Watch Mode will be on when the area is turned off (disarmed). RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Auto Watch 4.1.10 Restart Time Default: 5 Selections: 5 to 55 (seconds) (in 1 second increments) This parameter sets the length of time to wait for the sensor to stabilize after an alarm verification point is faulted and the sensor reset has reapplied power to the sensors. This allows the control panel to double-check alarm verification point activations before generating alarm signals. Alarm verification is a feature of automatic fire detection and alarm systems to reduce false alarms where sensors report alarm conditions for a minimum period of time, or confirm alarm conditions within a given period of time after being reset, in order to be accepted as a valid alarm initiation signal. Notice! Do not enable the Cross Point Feature in Point Indexes that are designated for fire points. Notice! Check the sensor's datasheet for the stabilization time and enter a value at least 5 seconds higher than the longest time specified by any sensor in the loop. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Area Wide Parameters | en 93 Notice! Check with your Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) to determine the maximum verification time allowed. Alarm verification points are programmed individually to activate the verification feature. Refer to Point Index. Any resettable fire point can activate alarm verification for the area to which it is assigned. Bosch recommends using separate area alarm verification outputs. To enable alarm verification on a point, set Point Type to Fire, and Alarm Verify and Resettable to Yes. When an alarm verification point is faulted, the control panel automatically removes power to all resettable points connected to the areas Reset Sensors output. Power is removed for 4.5 seconds. When power is reapplied, the control panel ignores alarms from the resettable points for the amount of time programmed in Restart Time. After Restart Time has expired, a 65 second confirmation window begins. If the alarm verification point is still in alarm, or faults again during the confirmation window, or if a different alarm verification point in the area faults, an alarm is generated. 4.5 sec 10-60 sec 65 sec Callout - Description 1 - Sensor detects possible event. 2 - Power removed from resettable points. 3 - Power reapplied to resettable points. Restart Time begins. 4 - Confirmation window begins. Any alarm during this period will be annunciated. 5 - Confirmation window ends. The sequence is re-initiated the next time an alarm verification point is faulted. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Restart Time 4.1.11 Duress Enable Default: No Selections: – Yes. Enable Duress alarm for this area. – No. Disable Duress alarm for this area. This parameter determines if this area allows duress alarms to be generated. Notice! To comply with SIA CP-01, set this parameter to Yes. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 94 en | Area Wide Parameters Control Panel If [MENU 35] is used to move the keypad display to an area where this parameter is set to No, a valid duress disarm passcode does not send a duress report. If you set the parameter to No in a particular area, the passcode you normally enter for Duress is no longer valid in that area. If this parameter is set to No, and a passcode with the appropriate disarm authority is used to duress-disarm the area, NO AUTHORITY appears in the keypad display. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Duress Enable Additional resources Refer to Duress Type, page 73 for an explanation of Duress 4.1.12 Area Type Default: Regular Selections: (selections vary depending on the control panel type) – Regular - will arm or disarm as an independent area. – Master - will not allow arming for this area unless all Associate areas with the same A# Acct Number are exit delay arming or are All On Delay. A Check Area message displays if the Associate areas have not yet been armed. EXCEPTION: RPS allows Master areas to be armed without all Associate areas being in the armed state. A Master area can be disarmed regardless of the armed state of the other areas in the account. Multiple Master areas can be programmed in a single account. Notice! Keypad Scope affects master arming. When arming a master area from a keypad with Keypad Scope set to Panel Wide or Account Wide, all Associate areas enter Exit Delay as soon as the Master area is armed. If there is a Shared area within the same account, it begins its Exit Delay after all Associate areas are armed. Notice! Using the arming sked requires that you first use an arming sked to arm the Associate areas before using an arming sked to arm the Master area. Arming Master areas with RPS, Keyswitch, or Auto Close parameters occurs before all Associate areas are armed. – Associate - will allow arming and disarming regardless of the armed state of the other areas with the same A# Acct Number . This type of area is used with a Master Area and is associated by having the same account number. Using the arming Sked requires that you first use an arming Sked to arm the Associate areas before using an arming Sked to arm the Master area. Keypads assigned to Associate areas, when used in conjunction with Shared areas, should have the KP# Scope programmed to encompass the Shared Area. Notice! Keypads assigned to Associate areas, when used with Shared areas, must have Keypad Scope programmed. – Shared - shared areas cannot be armed using a passcode, keyswitch, Sked or by the RPS. The scope of all Associate areas must include the Shared area(s) in order to view faulted points. Shared areas: – Are not associated to other areas by account number, they are shared panel wide. – Are armed when all Associate areas in the control panel are put into All On Delay state. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Area Wide Parameters | en – 95 Are disarmed when at least one Associate area in the control panel is taken out of All On Delay state. Notice! Arming commands intended for a Shared area must be executed on a keypad with Panel Wide scope by a user with appropriate authority in all Associate areas. Shared areas associate with all Associate areas regardless of their account assignments. The shares area does not begin to arm until all Associates finish arming. Shared Area Characteristic Description Arming a Shared Area Requires all Associate areas to be armed. As soon as the last Associate area is armed, the Shared area begins its arming sequence automatically. Shared areas cannot be armed by passcode, keyswitch or RPS. To allow faulted points to be displayed at associated areas, the shared and associate areas must share the same account number. Disarming a Shared Area Shared areas automatically disarm when any Associate area in the control panel is disarmed. Shared areas cannot be disarmed by passcode, cards, keyswitch or RPS. Shared Area Arming Sequence When Shared areas automatically begin to arm, the arming is based on the A# Exit Dly Time programmed for the Area # where the keypad has been assigned. Shared Area Not Ready If a point is faulted in the Shared area, [CHECK AREA] will display on the Associate keypad that is arming the last Associate area. Associate area keypads can display faults from Shared areas as long as the Shared areas fall within the scope of the Associate area. Force Arming a Shared Area When [CHECK AREA] is displayed, press the NEXT key until the Force Arm? prompt is shown.. Pressing the ENTER key will force arm the Shared area if: the user has authority to bypass points, the point is bypassable, AND the number of faulted points does not exceed the force arm max amount for the Shared area. Remember to include the Shared area in the Associate area's scope. Viewing Shared Area Armed Status [VIEW AREA STATUS] can be used from a keypad outside of the Shared area to view the Shared areas armed state. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 96 en | Area Wide Parameters Control Panel Shared Area Characteristic Description Silencing Sounders in the Shared Area Shared area alarms and troubles can be silenced from any keypad. To silence sounders, the user must have an authority level assigned to the Shared area. Access Control Readers Assigned to the If the entry area is armed and is a Shared Shared Area area, then the exit delay will restart and allow a user to walk to an Associate area and disarm. If the card reader assigned to the Shared area includes any Associate area in the D## KP# Scope (in the ACCESS CONTROL section, both the Associate area and Shared area will disarm when the card is presented. Closing Reports for Shared Areas If closing reports for Shared areas are required, Passcodes must also have a valid authority level assigned in the Shared area. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Area Type 4.1.13 Two Man Rule? Default: No Selections: – Yes - two valid and unique passcodes, entered using the same keypad, are required to disarm the area. – No - one passcode with a valid authority level can disarm the area. This parameter sets the requirement for two valid passcodes to be entered on the same keypad to disarm the area. Notice! To comply with SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction, set this parameter to No for all enabled areas. Refer to SIA CP-01 Verification for more information. Use this parameter in an area that is disarmed from All On using a keypad with Scope, page 109. An alarm event occurs if entry delay ends before the second valid passcode is entered. If the area is already in an alarm event, the first passcode entry silences the alarm. The second passcode entry disarms the area. If the second passcode is entered using a different keypad than the first passcode, the second keypad displays a warning that the Two Man Rule is already running. Enter both passcodes using the same keypad. The area scope that is disarmed is determined by the first passcode that starts the Two Man Rule?, page 96. A single area keypad (with Scope, page 109) is required for this feature. You can create a custom function that will disarm the area using passcode disarm. Set this parameter to Yes in facilities that require a higher level of security to gain access to the secured area. For example, a bank might enable this parameter to gain access to the vault. If this parameter is enabled, set the Scope, page 109 parameter for keypads in the affected areas to "Area Wide." 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Area Wide Parameters | en 97 You should not set Two Man Rule to Yes in an area that also has Early Ambush?, page 97 set to Yes. This function only works when you use passcode disarm. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Two Man Rule 4.1.14 Early Ambush? Default: No Selections: – Yes - two valid passcodes are required to disarm the area within the time limit set in the Early Ambush Time, page 77 parameter. – No - one passcode with a valid authority level can disarm the area. This parameter requires two valid passcodes to disarm the area within the time limit set in the Early Ambush Time, page 77 parameter. Notice! To comply with SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction, set this parameter to No for all enabled areas. Refer to SIA CP-01 Verification for more information. The first passcode entry disarms the area, and the second passcode entry validates the disarm command. The passcodes can be entered from any two keypads in the area. It is recommended that you use this parameter when disarming from an All On area, or during the entry delay period for All On. You can create a custom function that will disarm the area using passcode disarm. If the second passcode is not entered before the Early Ambush Time, page 77 ends, the control panel generates a duress event based on the primary user. You should not set Early Ambush?, page 97 to Yes in an area that also has Two Man Rule?, page 96 set to Yes. This function only works when you use passcode disarm. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Early Ambush 4.1.15 Fire Time Default: 6 Selections: 1 to 90 (minutes) (in one minute increments) This parameter sets the length of time in minutes the bell rings for fire alarm points. Notice! Check with your Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) to determine the appropriate bell time for your geographical area. The output activated for this time is programmed in A# Fire Bell. The A## Gas Bell is completely independent of the A## Fire Bell, but also follows the time programmed in this prompt. The bell output starts as soon as the fire alarm occurs. It shuts off the bell when the programmed number of minutes expires. Set this parameter for two minutes or more to ensure you have ample output time. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Fire Time Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 98 en | Area Wide Parameters 4.1.16 Control Panel Fire Pattern Default: Pulsed Selections: – Steady -steady output. – Pulsed - pulsed march time. 60 beats per minute at an even tempo (0.5 seconds on and 0.5 seconds off). – California Standard - 10 seconds audible + 5 seconds silent + 10 seconds audible + 5 seconds silent. This sequence repeats until bell time expires. – Temporal Code 3 - 0.5 seconds On, 0.5 seconds Off, 0.5 seconds On, 0.5 seconds Off, 0.5 seconds On, 1.5 seconds Off; pattern repeats. This sequence repeats for a minimum of 3 minutes with ± 10% timing tolerance. (1999 NFPA standards allow automatic silencing as permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), and carry a minimum ring time of 5 minutes.) This parameter selects the bell pattern this area uses to signal an alarm on a fire point. Notice! When two fire points sharing the same output go into alarm, the bell pattern of the most recent fire event takes precedence. RPS Menu location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Fire Pattern 4.1.17 Burg Time Default: 6 Selections: 1 to 90 (minutes) (in one minute increments) This parameter sets the number of minutes the bell rings for burglary alarm points. Notice! Check with your Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) to determine the appropriate bell time for your geographical area. Notice! To comply with SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction, set this parameter to 6 minutes or higher in all enabled areas. Refer to SIA CP-01 Verification for more information. The output activated for this time is programmed in A# Alarm Bell, page 129.The bell output starts as soon as the burglary alarm occurs. It shuts off the bell when the programmed number of minutes expires. When the control panel's internal clock begins a new minute, it considers the first minute expired. Set this parameter for two or more minutes. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Burg Time 4.1.18 Burg Pattern Default: Steady Selections: – Steady - steady output. – Pulsed - pulsed march time. 60 beats per minute at an even tempo (0.5 seconds on and 0.5 seconds off). 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Area Wide Parameters | en – 99 California Standard - 10 seconds audible + 5 seconds silent + 10 seconds audible + 5 seconds silent. This sequence repeats until bell time expires. – Temporal Code 3 - 0.5 seconds On, 0.5 seconds Off, 0.5 seconds On, 0.5 seconds Off, 0.5 seconds On, 1.5 seconds Off; pattern repeats. This sequence repeats for a minimum of 3 minutes with ± 10% timing tolerance. (1999 NFPA standards allow automatic silencing as permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), and carry a minimum ring time of 5 minutes.) Select the bell pattern this area uses to signal an alarm on a non-fire point. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Burg Pattern 4.1.19 Gas Pattern Default: Temporal Code 4 Selections: – Steady. Steady output. – Pulsed. Pulsed march time. 60 beats per minute at an even tempo (0.5 seconds on and 0.5 seconds – off). – California Standard. 10 seconds audible + 5 seconds silent + 10 seconds audible + 5 seconds silent. This sequence repeats until bell time expires. – Temporal Code 3. 0.5 seconds On, 0.5 seconds Off, 0.5 seconds On, 0.5 seconds Off, 0.5 seconds On, 1.5 seconds Off; pattern repeats. This sequence repeats for a minimum of 3 minutes with ± 10% timing tolerance. (1999 NFPA standards allow automatic silencing as permitted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ), and carry a minimum ring time of 5 minutes.) – Temporal Code 4. 0.1 seconds On, 0.1 seconds Off, 0.1 seconds On, 0.1 seconds Off, 0.1 seconds On, 0.1 seconds Off, 0.1 seconds On, 5 seconds Off; pattern repeats. Select the bell pattern this area uses to signal an alarm on a non-fire point. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Gas Pattern 4.1.20 Single Ring Default: No Selections: – Yes - this setting produces one bell output per arming period. After one alarm, alarms on non-fire points in the same area cannot restart the bell until the armed state changes. – No - restart bell output with each alarm event. This parameter determines if an alarm from a non-fire point can restart the alarm bell time with each alarm event, or only initiate alarm output once per arming period. Notice! If an alarm occurs on a 24-hour point while the area is disarmed, arming that area with a keyswitch does not clear the Single Ring flag. Notice! Silencing the bell resets Single Ring. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 100 en | Area Wide Parameters Control Panel This parameter does not silence the keypad alarm bell tone or prevent any reports. Fire points are not affected and bell time is restarted with each new alarm. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Single Ring 4.1.21 Bell Test Default: No Selections: – Yes - initiate bell test. – No - do not initiate bell test. This parameter provides an alarm output from the output programmed at Alarm Bell, page 129 after the closing report has been confirmed or the exit delay time has expired. When more than one area is armed at the same time (for example, ARM ALL AREAS? Function is used), the bell sounds for two seconds with a two-second pause between each bell activation if all areas have the same exit delay time programmed. Otherwise, the bell test occurs as each area is armed and it complete its exit delay time. When areas are armed simultaneously and report to the central station, the bell test occurs as each area is confirmed by the central station receiver. Bell Test After Closing Confirmation In areas that report opening and closing activity, the bell test occurs after the control panel sends the closing report and receives the acknowledgment from the central station receiver. For proper operation of the bell test after closing confirmation, the following rules apply: – The control panel must report opening and closings to the central station. – Restricted openings and closings, and opening and closing windows, should not be used. Area Armed Confirmation In areas that do not report opening and closing activity, the alarm bell output for this area is activated for two seconds after exit time expires. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Bell Test 4.1.22 Account O/C Default: No Selections: – Yes - send opening and closing reports by account. Use this selection if the control panel sends reports to an automation system that cannot interpret multiple area opening/ closing reports. – No - do not send opening and closing reports by account. This parameter determines if account opening and closing reports are generated by this area. Set this parameter the same for all areas in the account. An account opening report is generated when the first area in an account is opened (disarmed). After the account opening report is sent, disarming other areas in the account does not generate another account opening report. An account closing report is generated only when the last area in an account is closed (armed). Account opening and closing reports do not contain any area information. If an account opening or closing is generated while an opening or closing window for this area is in effect, and Disable O/C in Window, page 101 is set to Yes, the report is not sent. Bosch recommends that all areas sharing the same account number use the same opening and closing window times. Note: Account numbers are sent over the network to the central station receiver. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Area Wide Parameters | en 101 RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Account O/C 4.1.23 Area O/C Default: Yes Selections: – Yes - include the area number and generate opening and closing reports for this area when it is armed. – No - do not include the area number or generate opening and closing reports for this area. This parameter determines if the area number and the account number are sent upon arming and disarming. As long as Account O/C, page 100 is set to No, the account number is sent when arming this area individually. If Acct O/C is set to Yes, all areas with the same account number must also be armed. An area opening report is generated when each individual area is opened (disarmed). An area closing report is generated when each individual area is closed (armed). Do not set this parameter to Yes if the control panel sends reports to an automation system that cannot interpret multiple area opening/closing reports. Opening/Closing Reports are only sent for users with Authority Levels, page 153 assigned as follows: – Ready to Arm: Area Open/Close = E – Not Ready to Arm (Force Arm/Bypass Arm): Restricted Open/Close = E – Part On Arm: Part On Open/Close = E RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Area O/C 4.1.24 Disable O/C in Window Default: Yes Selections: – Yes - do not send opening and closing reports to the central station if they occur inside an active window. If an opening or closing report occurs outside of a window, send it with an early or late modifier. Refer to O/C Windows. – The active window must be a closing window for closing reports. It must be an opening window for opening reports. – No - send opening and closing reports to the central station even when they occur inside a programmed window. If an opening or closing occurs outside of the appropriate window, it reports but does not have an early or late modifier. – If you want to monitor all opening and closing activity, but you also want to use features provided by opening and closing windows, set this parameter to No, and program appropriate O/C windows. This parameter determines if opening and closing activity is reported when it occurs inside an opening or closing window as programmed in O/C Windows. Reports are always logged and printed on a local printer, if installed. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Disable O/C in Window 4.1.25 Auto Close Default: No Selections: Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 102 en | Area Wide Parameters – Control Panel Yes - the area automatically arms All On Delay at the end of the close window. When the area automatically arms, the control panel sends a closing report if area and/or account reports are programmed to do so. – No - do not automatically arm the area at the end of the close window. With this parameter, the control panel can automatically arm the area All On Delay at the end of the closing window regardless of the previous armed state. Regardless of Force Arm/Bypass Max, page 91 or Bypassable, page 191, an unconditional force arm occurs resulting in faulted points being left out of the system. Refer to Force Arm Returnable, page 190 or Bypass Returnable, page 190 for details on returning these points to service. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Auto Close 4.1.26 Fail to Open Default: No Selections: – Yes - a Fail to Open report is sent for this area if the area is not disarmed when the opening window stop time occurs. – No - a Fail to Open report is not sent for this area. This parameter allows you to determine if a Fail to Open report is sent for this area. This parameter can also be used to determine if a user failed to disarm the area before the opening window expired. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Fail To Open 4.1.27 Fail to Close Default: No Selections: – Yes - a Fail to Close report is sent for this area if the area is not armed when the closing window stop time occurs. – No - a Fail to Close report is not sent for this area. This parameter allows you to determine if a Fail to Close report is sent for this area. This parameter can also be used to determine if a user failed to arm the area before the closing window expired. Normal opening and closing reports do not need to be programmed to use this parameter. An exit delay time must be programmed in Exit Delay Time, page 91. If Auto Close, page 101 is set to Yes, a report is sent because it occurs when the closing window stop time occurs. If Disable O/C in Window, page 101 is set to Yes, Fail to Close report is followed by Closing Late or Force Close Late report. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Fail To Close 4.1.28 Latest Close Time Default: Disabled Selections: – Disabled - RPS sends 0:00 to the control panel. – 00:30 to 23:30 - set the time for latest close. Set in 30 minute increments using 01 to 24 to specify the hour. – 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Midnight - RPS sends 24:00 to the control panel. Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Area Wide Parameters | en 103 Use this parameter to set a latest close time boundary when an open/close window is assigned to the selected area. If the Latest Close Time setting is set to a non-zero value, the time of day specified in the Close Window Start, page 206 parameter cannot be greater than or equal to the Latest Close Time setting. For example, if the Latest Close Time parameter is set to 17:30, the Close Window Start parameter cannot be set to 17:30 or higher. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Latest Close Time 4.1.29 Restricted O/C Default: No Selections: – Yes - restrict opening and closing reports for this area. Area O/C, page 101 must be set to Yes to generate restricted opening and closing reports. – No - do not restrict opening and closing reports for this area. Regardless of programming in Restricted O/C , reports are not restricted in this area when this item is set to No. This parameter determines if opening and closing report activity for this area is restricted. Was Force Armed and Forced Close events are still sent to the central station if enabled in routing when force arming the system. A restricted opening report means the control panel sent an area opening report only when the area is disarmed after a non-fire/gas alarm. A restricted closing report means the control panel sent an area closing report only when the area was All On with controlled points that were faulted during the arming sequence. The sequence of reports generated by a restricted closing are: Was Force Armed, Forced Point, Forced Close, then Closing Report. Opening and Closing reports can be restricted for certain users by configuring the user authority Restricted Open/Close. If a passcode is not required for turning the system on, closing reports are always restricted when A# Restricted O/C is Yes. If a passcode is required for turning the system on, the user must also be assigned an Authority Levels, page 153 with Restricted Open/Close = E (enabled) in order for O/C reports to be restricted. Open/Close Windows does not prevent restricted opening and closing reports from being sent. Early or late designations are not added to opening/closing reports when they are sent according to the rules for restricted opening/closing reports. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Restricted O/C 4.1.30 Part On O/C Default: No Selections: – Yes - this area can send Part On opening and closing reports. – No - this area cannot send Part On opening and closing reports. This parameter determines if this area can send Part On, Instant and Part On, Delay closing reports and normal opening reports to the central station. This event is not suppressed by opening/closing windows. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Part On O/C Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 104 en | Area Wide Parameters 4.1.31 Control Panel Exit Delay Restart Default: Yes Selections: Yes - enable Exit Delay Restart. No - do not restart Exit Delay. The Exit Delay Restart feature automatically restarts exit delay when an end-user reenters the premises before exit delay expires. For example, a home owner turns on (arms) their system, leaves and closes the door, then realizes they forgot to pick up the car keys. When they open the door to retrieve their keys, the control panel restarts exit delay, giving them plenty of time to turn the system off. With this parameter is set to Yes, following these steps restarts exit delay (Exit Delay Time, page 91): 1. Turn the system All On or Part On. 2. Fault and restore a point (open and close a door) assigned to a Point Profile configured for the Point Type, Part On, and a delayed alarm Point Response (4, 5, 6, 7, or 8). (Point Profiles, page 176, Point Type, page 178, Point Response, page 179) 3. With exit delay still running, fault any point (open a door) assigned to a Point Profile configured for the Point Type, Part On, and a delayed alarm Point Response (4, 5, 6, 7, or 8). Exit Delay restarts. Notice! Exit delay restarts only one time Exit Delay can only be restarted one time. Faulting the same point a again, or faulting another point in the restarted exit delay does not restart the delay a second time. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Exit Delay Restart 4.1.32 All On- No Exit Default: Yes Selections: Yes – switch the arming state of the area from All On Delay to Part On Delay if no Part On Delay points are faulted and restored during the exit delay time. No – keep the arming state of the area All On Delay, whether or not, a Part On Delay point is faulted and restored during the exit delay time. This parameter selects whether or not the arming state for an area changes from All On to Part On if no Part On Delay points are faulted during Exit Delay. Only the final armed state is reported and displayed at the keypads. When arming from a keyfob or SKED, the panel ignores this option. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > All On - No Exit 4.1.33 Exit Delay Warning Default: No Selections: – Yes - pulse the alarm output for the last 10 seconds of Exit Delay – No - do not pulse the alarm output during Exit Delay This parameter enables the alarm bell to pulse on and off every two seconds for the remaining 10 seconds of Exit Delay. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Area Wide Parameters | en 105 Notice! To comply with SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction, set this parameter to Yes. Refer to SIA CP-01 Verification for more information. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Exit Delay Warning 4.1.34 Entry Delay Warning Default: No Selections: – Yes - pulse the alarm output for the last 10 seconds of Entry Delay – No - do not pulse the alarm output during Entry Delay When this parameter is set to Yes, the alarm bell pulses on and off every two seconds for the remaining 10 sec of Entry Delay. Notice! To comply with SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction, set this parameter to Yes. Refer to SIA CP-01 Verification for more information. When upgrading a non-control panel account to a control panel account, RPS forces the default to No. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Entry Delay Warning 4.1.35 Area Re-Arm Time Default: 00:00 Selections: 00:00 thru 23:59 00:00 = disabled This parameter sets the length of time (HH:MM) that a disarmed area delays until it rearms to All On Delay. For example if Area Re-Arm Time is set to four hours (04:00) and the area is disarmed (turned off) at 1:30 pm, it rearms to All On Delay at 5:30 pm. Any points not ready to arm (faulted) are force armed. Notice! Force Arm / Bypass Max is ignored when re-arming All points not ready to arm (faulted) are force armed when the area re-arms at the end of Area Re-Arm Time. The area automatically re-arms at 11:59 pm regardless of when the Area Re-Arm timer started. For example, if the Area Re-Arm timer is set to 4 hours (04:00) and the area is disarmed (turned off) at 10:30 pm, the area rearms to All On Delay at 11:59 pm (1 hour and 29 minutes after disarm). Users can use Extend Close time from a system keypad to extend an active Area Re-arm delay (On/Off Menu > Extend Close time). Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 106 en | Area Wide Parameters Control Panel Notice! Configuring Closing Window and Area Re-Arm Time may cause unexpected Area behavior. When both a Closing Window and Area Re-Arm Time are configured for the same area, the Closing Window is running simultaneously with the Area Re-arm timer, and a user uses the Extend Close time from a system keypad, the control panel extends only the Closing Window, not the Area Re-Arm Time. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Area Re-Arm Time 4.2 Area Arming Text The B6512 supports up to 6 areas. 4.2.1 Area name text Default: Area # (# = the Area number) Selections: Up to 32 characters This parameter sets what is displayed at keypads. This is for informational purposes only. Enter up to 32 characters of text, numbers and symbols to describe the area. – Keypads display the first 20 characters. If more than 20 characters are used, the area name text scrolls across the display one time. To scroll the text again, press [ESC]. – Spaces before, after and within a string of text are treated as text and are included in the 32 character limit. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Area Arming Text > Area Name Text 4.2.2 Account is On text Default: Blank Selection: Enter up to 32 characters. This parameter displays the text to display at the keypad for each area as required. Notice! When using a D1255F, D1256F, or D1257F keypad, program this parameter as *Fire System*. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Area Arming Text > Account is On Text 4.2.3 Area # is On text Default: Blank Selection: Enter up to 32 characters. This parameter displays the text to display at the keypad for each area as required. Notice! When using a D1255F, D1256F, or D1257F keypad, program this parameter as *Fire System*. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Area Wide Parameters | en 107 RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Area Arming Text > Area # is On Text 4.2.4 Area # is not Ready text Default: Blank Selection: Enter up to 32 characters. This parameter displays the text to display at the keypad for each area as required. Notice! When using a D1255F, D1256F, or D1257F keypad, program this parameter as *Fire System*. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Area Arming Text > Area # Not Ready Text 4.2.5 Area # is Off text Default: Blank Selection: Enter up to 32 characters. This parameter displays the text to display at the keypad for each area as required. RPS Menu Location Area Wide Parameters > Area/Bell Parameters, Open/Close Options > Area Arming Text > Area # is Off Text Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 108 en | Keypads Control Panel 5 Keypads 5.1 Keypad Assignments The B6512 control panel supports SDI2 Keypads 1 to 12. 5.1.1 Keypad Name Default: Keypad# Selections: Up to 32 characters This parameter sets what is displayed at keypads. This is for informational purposes only. Enter up to 32 characters of text, numbers and symbols to describe the keypad. – Keypads display the first 20 characters. If more than 20 characters are used, the keypad name text scrolls across the display one time. To scroll the text again, press [ESC]. – Spaces before, after and within a string of text are treated as text and are included in the 32 character limit. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Keypad Name 5.1.2 Keypad Name (Second Language) Default: blank Selections: Up to 32 characters This parameter sets what is displayed at keypads. This is for informational purposes only. Enter up to 32 characters of text, numbers and symbols to describe the keypad. – Keypads display the first 20 characters. If more than 20 characters are used, the keypad name text scrolls across the display one time. To scroll the text again, press [ESC]. – Spaces before, after and within a string of text are treated as text and are included in the 32 character limit. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Keypad Name (second language) 5.1.3 Keypad Type Default: – Address 1 = B92x Two-line Keypad – All other addresses = No Keypad Installed Selections: – No keypad installed – B91x Basic Keypad – B92x Two-line Keypad – B93x ATM Style Keypad – B94x Touch Screen Keypad This parameter identifies the type of keypad that is connected to the control panel at this address. The information in this parameter is auto-configured when the keypad is first installed. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Keypad Type Additional Information for fire keypads Account is On text, page 106 Area # is On text, page 106 Area # is not Ready text, page 107 Area # is Off text, page 107 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel 5.1.4 Keypads | en 109 Area Assignment Default: 1 (for all KP addresses) Selections: – B6512: 1 to 6 This parameter assigns the keypad to an area. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Area Assignment 5.1.5 Keypad Language Default: First Language, follow User language (for all KP addresses) Selections: – First Language, follow User Language – First Language, ignore User Language – Second Language, follow User language – Second Language, ignore User language This parameter sets the language that is displayed at the keypad. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Keypad Language 5.1.6 Scope Default: – Address 1: Panel Wide – All other Addresses: Area Wide Selections: – Area Wide – An area keypad is restricted to the viewing information and arming/disarming functions for the area it is assigned to. – Account Wide – An account keypad can view information, and perform arming and disarming functions for all areas that have the same account number. This is normally used for an associate area. – Panel Wide – A panel wide keypad can view information and perform arming and disarming functions for all areas in the control panel. This is normally used with a Master area. – Custom – For a custom keypad you select the Areas in Scope. Use this parameter to define what areas are affected when this keypad is armed, what areas can be viewed with this keypad, and what areas this keypad can move to. Whenever the custom scope is changed, RPS shows the following warning dialog: If you click Yes, RPS resets the Area(s) In Scope parameter. If you click No, no changes are made in RPS. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Scope Further information Account Number, page 90 Area Type, page 94 Area in Scope, page 110 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 110 en | Keypads 5.1.7 Control Panel Area in Scope Default: – Address 1: All – All other Addresses: 1 Selections: – All All areas within the scope of this keypad are affected. – 1 Only area 1 is affected. – Dbl click to view. Areas included within the scope of the keypad have been custom selected. Double click to view or select custom areas. This parameter identifies the areas included in the scope of this keypad for viewing status, arming or disarming. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Areas in Scope Further information Scope, page 109 5.1.8 Passcode Follows Scope? Default: Yes (for all KP addresses) Selections: – Yes - change the armed state of the areas within the scope of this keypad. If the areas in the scope are already at the intended armed state, they remain in that state. – No - view areas within the programmed scope, but only arm or disarm the area programmed in Area Assignment when a passcode is entered. This parameter determines whether this keypad follows Scope, or whether it only arms or disarms the area to which it is assigned. It does not affect the Function List arming and disarming parameters. Use this parameter to create a group of account wide keypads that arm only the area to which they are assigned, even if the user has a passcode with arming authority rights in all areas. If the area to which this keypad is assigned is armed, entering a valid passcode disarms this area and all other areas assigned to the scope of this keypad. If the area to which this keypad is assigned is disarmed, entering a valid passcode disarms this area and all other areas assigned to the scope of this keypad. Users must have authority enabled in Passcode Arm and Passcode Disarm. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Passcode Follows Scope Further information Scope, page 109 Area, page 173 Arm by Passcode, page 166 Disarm by Passcode, page 166 5.1.9 Enter Key Output Default: 0 (for all keypad addresses) Selections: – 0 – no output assigned to Passcode Enter Function, Cycle Output. – 1-3, 9-96 – assigns output for Passcode Enter Function, Cycle Output. This parameter assigns an output to Passcode Enter Function, Cycle Output function. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Keypads | en 111 When the Passcode Enter Function, page 111 is set to Cycle Output, and a user enters their passcode and presses [Enter], the output assigned by this parameter cycles (activates for 10 seconds). Two events are added to the panel log: Output ### Set with User ID and, Output ### Reset without User ID. Notice! Do not share Enter Key Output with other output functions The output you assign in this Enter Key Output parameter must not be assigned to any other output function. Erroneous output operation can result. You can use the Passcode Enter Function, Cycle Door and the Enter Key Output for a low-level access control strike on a door. It does not shunt a point. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Enter Key Output Further information Passcode Enter Function, page 111 5.1.10 Passcode Enter Function Default: Arm/Disarm (for all KP addresses) Selections: – Arm/Disarm - Passcode + [ENTER] starts All On Delay arming for all areas within the users scope if the current area is disarmed. If the area is not disarmed (off), then all areas in scope are disarmed. – Cycle Door - Passcode + [ENTER] cycles the door controller programmed in Assign Door, page 112 for the Strike Time, page 223 duration, then actuates the users authorized post access operations (Disarm, Perimeter Instant arm, or execute a Custom Function) if enabled. – Cycle Output - Passcode + [ENTER] key activates Enter Key Output, page 110 for 10 seconds. – Auto Re-Arm - If the area assigned to the keypad is armed All On Delay, passcode + [ENTER] starts Exit Delay. If the area is Off, passcode + [ENTER] does not arm, the area remains off. – Login Only - Passcode + [ENTER] key logs in the user. Dual authentication not enforced. – Login/Disarm - Passcode + [ENTER] key logs in the user and all armed areas within the users authorized scope are disarmed. Dual Authentication not enforced. This parameter defines a single purpose to this keypad; however entry of a passcode with authority in the current area will always silence alarms and troubles. When a Passcode Enter Function is unable to be executed due to configuration conflicts, then the control panel performs the Arm/Disarm function regardless of setting. The Service Passcode (User ID 0) cannot be used to operate the Passcode Enter Functions. Outputs used for the Cycle Output function must not be shared with any other point, sensor reset, control panel, or bell functions. Sharing can cause errors in output operation. Notice! To comply with SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction, keep this parameter at its default setting. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Passcode Enter Function Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 112 en | Keypads 5.1.11 Control Panel Dual Authentication Default: No Selections: This parameter sets the requirement that a user must present any two forms of authorization (passcode at a keypad, or credential or keyfob to a door reader) in order to gain access. Before setting this parameter to YES, first Assign Door, page 112 or Keypad Type, page 108. If the keypad is a B94X Touch Screen and the Assign Door prompt is set to No Door, then the keypad reader is used for Dual Authentication. If the keypad is a B94X Touch Screen and the Assign Door prompt is set to Door #, then the keypad reader is disabled and the door reader is used for Dual Authentication. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Dual Authentication 5.1.12 Dual Authentication Duration Default: 20 Seconds Selections: 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 seconds This parameter sets the time out between the presentation of the first and second form of authorization (passcode, credential or keyfob). RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Dual Authentication Duration 5.1.13 Assign Door Default: No Door Selections: No Door, Door 1 to Door 4 – No Door: No door controller is assigned for adding tokens or the CLOSE DOOR # display on the keypad. – 1 - 4: Assign the door controller that enters the Add User? mode when initiated. This door activates the CLOSE DOOR # display at this keypad if Close Door is set to Yes. Notice! The B6512 supports up to 12 keypads. Notice! A setting of No Door disables the Cycle Door option of Passcode Enter Function. Notice! A setting of No Door disables the Add Card option of the Add/Change User command for this keypad. Notice! A setting of No Door disables Dual Authentication for this keypad. Enter the door number that is used by this keypad for adding tokens/cards and displaying the Close Door display. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Keypads | en 113 NOT READY appears at this keypad when you are attempting to add a user if a door is not entered in this parameter and a door is not assigned to the area using the Entry Area, page 219 section. This indicates that access credentials cannot be assigned to a user through the ADD/ CHANGE User command at this keypad until a door number is assigned. A door does not need to be assigned to a keypad for the user to control the door(s) using the DOOR CONTROL function. Any door that is active can be controlled by a user who has the door control authority enabled at a keypad with the doors area, assigned in the ACCESS CONTROL section, within its scope. Notice! During the ADD USER? mode, token/cards, door control requests and RTE/REX do not function. If there is heavy activity for this door, set the door mode into an unlocked state before adding users. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Assign Door 5.1.14 Trouble Tone Default: No (for all keypad addresses) Selections: – Yes: Panel wide trouble tones sound and visual displays show at this keypad. – No: Panel wide troubles do not sound. Visual displays still show. This parameter determines whether this keypad or any keypad with the same address setting, sounds the panel wide trouble tones. Panel wide trouble tones include power, phone, SDI2 bus and bus. They do not include point troubles, or buzz on fault. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Trouble Tone 5.1.15 Entry Tone Default: Yes (for all KP addresses) Selections: – Yes: This keypad sounds entry tones. – No: This keypad does not sound entry tones. This parameter determines whether this keypad or any keypad with the same address setting sounds the entry delay tone. Any delay point within the area scope of this keypad initiates the entry sequence. This parameter allows you to manage the tone by keypad. Entry tone can also be turned off when programming Entry Tone Off in Point Index. Assign two keypads to the same area to have one sound the tone while the other does not. Set this parameter to Yes for UL installations. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Entry Tone Additional Resource Entry Tone Off, page 185 5.1.16 Exit Tone Default: Yes (for all KP addresses) Selections: – Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Yes - this keypad sounds exit tones. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 114 en | Keypads Control Panel – No - this keypad does not sound exit tones. This parameter determines whether this keypad or any keypad with the same address setting sounds the exit delay tone during the delay arming of an area. Any keypad that has a scope to arm this area can initiate the exit tone sequence. This parameter allows you to manage the tone by keypad. Exit tone can also be turned off when programming your Exit Tone in Area Parameters. Assign two keypads to the same area to have one sound the tone while the other does not. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Exit Tone 5.1.17 Arm Area Warning Tone Default: Yes (for all KP addresses) Selections: – Yes - this keypad activates a tone and warning display. – No - this keypad does not activate a tone or warning display. Use this parameter to determine whether this keypad sounds an audible tone and displays a warning on the keypad when a closing window has activated. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Arm Area Warning Tone 5.1.18 Close Door Warning Tone Default: Yes (for all KP addresses) Selections: – Yes - this keypad activates a tone and warning display. – No - this keypad does not activate a tone or warning display. Use this parameter to determine whether this keypad sounds an audible tone and displays the CLOSE DOOR # warning on the keypad when the door is physically held open past the Shunt Time, and Extend Time has a value greater than zero for the door assigned to this area in Assign Door, page 112. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Close Door Warning Tone 5.1.19 Idle Scroll Lock Default: No Selections: – Yes - enable Idle Scroll Lock. – No - allow the control panel's text to auto-scroll. This parameter prevents auto-scrolling of the keypad's text displaying existing control panel conditions, such as troubles. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Idle Scroll Lock 5.1.20 Function Lock Default: No (for all KP addresses) Selections: – – Yes - pressing the Bypass, Menu, or Shortcuts key requires a passcode before proceeding. No - pressing the Bypass, Menu, or Shortcuts key does not require a passcode until a function requiring one is selected. This parameter determines if the Function Lock requires a passcode when pressed to access the functions. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Keypads | en 115 The user is prompted to enter a passcode after pressing the Bypass, Menu, or Shortcuts key on the keypad. The items programmed in the function list for this specific keypad are filtered by the user’s authority level. Only those items in the function list for which the user has authority appear. If set to No, when the user presses the Bypass, Menu, or Shortcuts key, all items that are programmed in the Menu List for the keypad address appear, regardless of the user’s authority level. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Function Lock 5.1.21 Abort Display Default: Yes (for all KP addresses) Selections: – Yes - this keypad displays a message for all aborted alarms within its scope. – No - this keypad does not display a message for aborted alarms within its scope. Select whether or not the keypad shows ALARM NOT SENT if the alarm is aborted before an event report is sent to the central station. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Abort Display 5.1.22 Cancel Display Default: Yes (for all KP addresses) Selections: – Yes - this keypad displays a message for all canceled alarms within its scope. – No - this keypad does not display a message for canceled alarms within its scope. Select whether or not the keypad displays a message if a burglar alarm is canceled after the control panel sends a burglar alarm report to the central station. To show this message, Cancel Reports must be set to Yes. When upgrading a non-control panel account to a control panel account, RPS forces the default to No. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Cancel Display. Further information Cancel Reports, page 74 5.1.23 Nightlight Enable Default: No (for all KP addresses) Selections: Yes, No Users with authority to change the keypad display can select whether or not to enable the nightlight feature on the keypad. When set to Yes, The display backlight and key backlight (B920, B930) shall remain illuminated at the minimum level when the keypad is “Idle”. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Nightlight Enable 5.1.24 Nightlight Brightness Default: 2 Selections: 0 to 6 0 = Nightlight off Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 116 en | Keypads Control Panel 1 to 6 - increases or decreases nightlight brightness. The higher the number, the brighter the nightlight. This parameter sets the brightness level for the backlight on the keypad display. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Nightlight Brightness 5.1.25 Silence Keypress Tone Default: No (for all KP addresses) Selections: – Yes - disable key press acknowledgement tone. Keypad is silent when buttons are pressed. – No - enable key press acknowledgement tone. Users hear a tone each time they press a button on the keypad. This parameter enables or disables the key press acknowledgement tone on the keypad. This option can only be set from RPS. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Silence Keypress Tone 5.1.26 Show Date and Time Default: No (for all KP addresses) Selections: Yes, No Users with authority to change the keypad display can select whether or not the keypad displays the date and time. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Show Date and Time Additional Information Change Keypad Display, page 159 5.1.27 Keypad Volume Default: 7 (for all KP addresses) Selections: 0 to 7 – 0 - the minimum volume setting. – 1 to 7 - increases or decreases keypress volume. The higher the number, the louder the tone. This parameter sets the volume level for the keypress acknowledgement tone on the keypad. Adjusting the keypad volume in this parameter does not affect the volume of high priority tones such as alarms which always sound at maximum volume. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Keypad Volume 5.1.28 Keypad Brightness Default: 6 Selections: 0 to 6 0 - Lowest setting 1 to 6 - increases or decreases keypad display brightness. The higher the number, the brighter the display. This parameter sets the brightness for the LED display on the keypad. Keypad brightness can also be set at the keypad. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Keypads | en 117 RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Keypad Brightness 5.1.29 Disable Presence Sensor Default: No Selections: – Yes - disable Presence Sensor – No - enable Presence Sensor This parameter enables or disables the Presence Sensor on the keypad. When enabled, the Presence Sensor detects motion within close proximity to the keypad and brightens a dimmed display as a user approaches. Available for the B94x Touch screen keypads. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Disable Presence Sensor 5.1.30 Disable Token Reader Default: Yes Selections: – Yes - disable Token Reader. – No - enable Token Reader. This parameter enables or disables the Credential Reader on the keypad. Disable when the proximity reader is not in use with the system. Disabling the credential reader when not in use reduces power consumption. Available for the B94x Touch screen keypads. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Disable Token Reader 5.1.31 Enable Tamper Switch Default: No Selections: – Yes - enable the Tamper Switch. – No - disable the Tamper Switch. This parameter is only supported on SDI keypads and the B915. When a legacy keypad is selected from Keypad Type, page 108, this parameter can be modified. Otherwise it is grayed out. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Keypad Assignments > Enable Tamper Switch 5.1.32 Feature Button Option Default: Language Selection Selections: – Language - allows the user to switch between the first and second languages as configured under the Panel Info tab of the Panel Data dialog box. – Event Memory - allows the user to quickly access and view Event Memory. This parameter sets which feature shows in the upper left corner of a B94x keypad display. This parameter applies to B94x Touch Screen keypads only. RPS Menu Location Keypads > SDI2 Keypad Assignments > Feature Button Option Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 118 en | Keypads Control Panel 5.2 Global Keypad Settings 5.2.1 A key Response Default: No Response Selections: – No Response (Invalid key press response) – Manual Fire Alarm (When A key and 1 key are held together for 2 sec.) – Custom Function This parameter specifies how the control panel responds when the "A" key and 1 key are held on a keypad that has an "A" key. An alarm occurs each time the user presses the applicable keys regardless of whether or not the event has been cleared from the display. The "A" Key's default function is Manual Fire. To change the function, set this parameter to "A" Key Custom Function. If the "A" key is configured to execute a custom function, then the "A" Key Custom Function parameter must also be configured. Notice! Enabling the A key response for a FIRE ALARM ALSO enables the keypad CMD 7 response to generate a fire alarm when you enter CMD 7 from any keypad that has this function enabled. Notice! The "A" Key Custom Function option is not available with B942 touch screen keypads. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Global Keypad Settings > A Key Response. 5.2.2 A Key Custom Function Default: Disabled Selections: – B6512G: Disabled, Function 128 to Function 133 This parameter specifies the custom function that is run when an "A" key and 1 key are held together for 2 sec and the "A" key is configured to run a custom function. If the custom function number is disabled and the "A" key is configured to run a custom function, holding the "A" key and 1 key generates an invalid key press response. The number of custom functions supported varies based on the control panel type. Select the CF# that corresponds to the custom function programmed in Custom Functions. Notice! Enabling the A key Custom Function enables the keypad CMD 7 response to activate the custom function when you enter CMD 7 from any keypad that has this function enabled. Notice! The "A" Key Custom Function option is not available with B942 touch screen keypads. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Global Keypad Settings > A Key Custom Function 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel 5.2.3 Keypads | en 119 B Key Response Default: No Response Selections: – No Response (Invalid key press response) – Manual Medical Alarm, no Alarm output (when B key and 4 key are held together for 2 sec.) – Manual Medical Alarm, with Alarm output (when B key and 4 key are held together for 2 sec.) – Custom Function This parameter specifies how the control panel responds when the "B" key is held on a keypad that has a "B" key. The "B" Key's default function is Medical Alarm. To change the function, set this parameter to B Key Custom Function, page 119. If the "B" key is configured to execute a custom function, then the "B" Key Custom Function parameter must also be configured. Notice! The "B" Key Custom Function option is not available with B942 touch screen keypads. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Global Keypad Settings > B Key Response 5.2.4 B Key Custom Function Default: Disabled Selections: – B6512G: Disabled, Function 128 to Function 133 This parameter specifies the custom function that is run when an "B" key is held and the "B" key is configured to run a custom function. If the custom function number is disabled and the "B" key is configured to run a custom function, holding the "B" key generates an invalid key press response. The number of custom functions supported varies based on the control panel type. Select the CF# that corresponds to the custom function programmed in Custom Functions. Notice! The "B" Key Custom Function option is not available with B942 touch screen keypads. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Global Keypad Settings > B Key Custom Function 5.2.5 C Key Response Default: No Response Selections: – No Response (Invalid key press response) – Manual Panic Alarm, invisible and silent alarm output (when the C key and 7 are held together). – Manual Panic Alarm, visible with alarm output (when the C key and 7 key are held together). – Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Custom Function Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 120 en | Keypads Control Panel This parameter specifies how the control panel responds when a "C" key is held on a keypad that supports "C" keys. An alarm occurs each time the user presses the applicable keys regardless of whether or not the event has been cleared from the display. The "C" Key's default function is Manual Panic Alarm. To change the function, set this parameter to "C" Key Custom Function. If the "C" key is configured to execute a custom function, then the "C" Key Custom Function parameter must also be configured. Notice! Enabling the C Key Response for a panic alarm also enables the keypad CMD 9 response to generate a panic alarm when you enter CMD 9 from any keypad that has this function enabled. Notice! The "C" Key Custom Function option is not available with B942 touch screen keypads. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Global Keypad Settings > C Key Response 5.2.6 C Key Custom Function Default: Disabled Selections: – B6512G: Disabled, Function 128 to Function 133 This parameter specifies the custom function that is run when a "C" key is held and the "C" key is configured to run a custom function. If the custom function number is disabled and the "C" key is configured to run a custom function, holding the "C" key generates an invalid key press response. The number of custom functions supported varies based on the control panel type. Select the CF# that corresponds to the custom function programmed in Custom Functions. Notice! The "C" Key Custom Function option is not available with B942 touch screen keypads. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Global Keypad Settings > C Key Custom Function 5.2.7 Manual Silent Alarm Audible on Comm Trouble Default: No Selections: – Yes Enable the Alarm Bell to activate when the silent alarm event fails to reach central station. – No Disables the Alarm Bell from activating when the silent alarm fails to reach central station. This parameter enables the Alarm Bell output to activate for the remaining Burg Bell time if a keypad or RADION keyfob silent alarm fails in two attempts to transmit its report to the configured destination. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Keypads | en 121 The Alarm Bell outputs activated are the same outputs that would have been activated if the keypad or RADION keyfob alarm had been configured as a panic alarm. The bell timer was started when the silent alarm was generated so the Alarm Bell is only active for the configured Burg Time minus the time it took to attempt to report twice. This option only has an effect if a keypad's C key or a RADION keyfob panic is configured to create a silent alarm. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Global Keypad Settings > Manual Silent Alarm Audible on Comm Trouble 5.2.8 Comm Trouble Options Default: Comm Troubles are Audible and Visible Selections: – Comm Troubles are Silent and Invisible – Comm Troubles are Audible and Visible When this parameter is set to Comm Troubles are Audible and Visible, communication trouble events show at keypads and activate the trouble tone. When this parameter is set to Comm Troubles are Silent and Invisible, communication trouble events do not show at keypads. They do not activate the trouble tone. Notice! Enable trouble tone for each keypad Use the Trouble Tone, page 113 parameter in Keypad assignments to enable panel wide trouble tones (including the Comm Trouble) for individual keypads. The default for all keypad addresses for the Trouble Tone parameter is No (panel wide troubles do not sound). RPS Menu Location Keypads > Global Keypad Settings > Comm Trouble Sound Options 5.3 Global Wireless Keyfob 5.3.1 Keyfob Function A Custom Function Default: Disabled Selections: – B6512G: Disabled, Function 128 to Function 133 This parameter specifies the custom function that is run when the Auxiliary Function A button is pressed on the RADION keyfob. On the RADION four-button keyfobs, pressing the third button activates Auxiliary Function A. When the auxiliary function button is pressed, the control panel performs the custom function configured in this parameter. If it is configured as disabled, then no action occurs. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Global Wireless Keyfob > Keyfob Function A Custom Function 5.3.2 Keyfob Function B Custom Function Default: Disabled Selections: – B6512G: Disabled, Function 128 to Function 133 This parameter specifies the custom function that is run when the Auxiliary Function B button is pressed on the keyfob. On the RADION four-button keyfobs, pressing the fourth button activates Auxiliary Function B. When the auxiliary function button is pressed, the control panel performs the custom function configured in this parameter. If it is configured as disabled, then no action occurs. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 122 en | Keypads Control Panel RPS Menu Location Keypads > Global Wireless Keyfob > Keyfob Function B Custom Function 5.3.3 Keyfob Panic Options Default: Panic response disabled Selections: – Panic response disabled - the control panel ignores all panic button presses from every keyfob. – Audible panic response enabled - when a panic button is pressed on any keyfob the control panel activates an audible tone at the keypads and activates the Alarm Bell output. – Silent panic response enabled - when a panic button is pressed on any keyfob the control panel activates the Silent Alarm output and keypads remain silent. The keyfob panic response is enabled or disabled globally. The outputs activate for the Burg Time configured in their respective areas. If the Alarm Bell is active, silencing the alarm logs a Cancel event. No alarm abort window is supported. When an audible panic response is generated, a Burg Alarm is indicated and sounded on all keypads that have scope over the areas where the alarm bell is active. The control panel logs a Keyfob Panic Alarm event. The user number associated with the keyfob is logged with the event. No restoral event is logged. Keyfob panic alarm events have a configuration option enabling or disabling their reporting by route group. This option is available only from RPS in PANEL WIDE PARAMETERS > Report Routing. This option controls the reporting of both Keypad Panic Alarms and Keyfob Panic Alarms. When a silent panic response is generated, the control panel activates the Area Wide Output > Duress Output in each area that the keyfob user has authority. The outputs activate for the Burg Time configured in their respective areas. If the duress output is active, silencing the alarm logs a Cancel event. No alarm abort window is supported. When a silent panic response is generated, there is no indication or sound on any keypad. When a silent panic response is generated, the control panel logs a Key Fob Silent Alarm event. The user number associated with the keyfob is logged with the event. No restoral event is logged for a keyfob Silent Alarm. Keyfob silent alarm events have a configuration option, separate from the keyfob panic alarms, enabling or disabling their reporting by route group. This option is available only from RPS in PANEL WIDE PARAMETERS > Report Routing. This option controls the reporting of both Keypad Silent Alarms and keyfob Silent Alarms. RPS Menu Location Keypads > Wireless keyfob > keyfob Panic Options 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel 6 Custom Functions | en 123 Custom Functions Each Custom Function ### item has an 18 character programmable text. When the custom function is assigned to the Shortcut Menu Function the user can use the PREV or NEXT key to scroll to the Custom Function Text. The user must have the appropriate authority level enabled for the Custom Function in the User Configuration section, to be capable of using the custom function. The B6512 supports 6 custom functions 6.1 Custom Function Text Default: Function ### Selection: Enter up to 32 characters of text, numbers and symbols. – SDI2 keypads display the first 20 characters. If more than 20 characters are used, the text scrolls across the display one time. To scroll the text again, press [ESC]. – Spaces before, after and within a string of text are treated as text and are included in the 32 character limit. This parameter sets the menu text displayed at the keypad for the Custom Function item. RPS Menu Location Custom Function > Custom Function Text 6.2 Custom Function Text (Second Language) Default: Blank Selections: Enter up to 32 characters of text, numbers and symbols. This parameter sets the menu text displayed at the keypad for the Custom Function item when the user, keypad, or system is configured to use the second language. SDI2 keypads display the first 20 characters. If more than 20 characters are used, the text scrolls across the display one time. To scroll the text again, press [ESC]. Spaces before, after and within a string of text are treated as text and are included in the 32 character limit. RPS Menu Location Custom Function > Custom Function Text (second language) 6.3 Functions Default: Not in Use Selections: Refer to the list below. Use these Function parameters (Function 1 to Function 6) to assign up to six functions to a custom function. Double click in the Function 1 (to Function 6) field to show the function selection dialog box. Some functions require you to configure one or two parameters. For example, if you select the Disarm function, you select which areas to disarm in Parameter 1. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 124 en | Custom Functions Control Panel Notice! When a Custom Function initiates, assigned functions run in order, 1 to 6 The control panel runs the functions assigned to a custom function consecutively. The panel starts functions immediately after starting the previous function. It does not wait for the previous function to finish. Use the Delay function selection to create a delay between the start of two functions. Parameter 1 configures the length of the delay (1 to 90 seconds). For example: To toggle an output at the end of a Part On Delay with a 30 second exit delay, set Function 1 to "Part On Delay", set Function 2 to "Delay" with Parameter 1 set to greater than 30 seconds, and set Function 3 to "Toggle Output". Notice! Special Force Arm / Bypass Max rules for arming with Custom Functions When a Custom Function includes an arming function (All On Delay, All On Instant, Part On Instant, Part On Delay) special rules for the Force Arm/Bypass Max, page 91 limit for faulted points apply. If a user activates the Custom Function from a keypad using a shortcut or function key, from an RF Keyfob, or by presenting their credential (card or token) to a reader or keypad, and the Custom Function requires a passcode (Custom Function, page 152 = P), then the control panel enforces the Force Arm / Bypass Max limit for faulted points. If the number of faulted points exceeds the Force / Arm Bypass Max limit, the function fails The control panel does not arm the Area. There is no indication at keypads for the failed function. The control panel includes the user number in the arming event (history log and report). If a user activates a Custom Function from a keypad using a shortcut or function key, from an RF Keyfob, or by presenting their credential (card or token) to a reader or keypad, and the Custom Function does not require a passcode (Custom Function, page 152 = E), then the control panel enforces the Force Arm / Bypass Max limit for faulted points. If the number of faulted points exceeds the Force / Arm Bypass Max limit, the function fails The control panel does not arm the Area. There is no indication at keypads for the failed function. The control panel does not include the user number in the arming event (history log and report). If a custom function is activated by a Sked, point, or automation, the control panel does not enforce the Force Arm / Bypass Max limit for faulted points. The control panel arms all faulted points, even if the Force Arm / Bypass Max limit is exceeded. FUNCTION: Click on a function name for information about that function. Not In Use - This function is disabled and no functions after this will be performed. All On Delay, page 213 All On Instant, page 214 Part On Delay, page 214 Part On Instant, page 214 Disarm, page 214 Extend Close, page 214 Bypass a Point, page 214 Unbypass a Point, page 214 Unbypass All Points, page 214 Reset Sensors, page 214 Turn Output On, page 214 Turn Output Off, page 215 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Custom Functions | en 125 Toggle Output, page 215 One-Shot Output, page 215 Reset All Outputs, page 215 Delay, page 215 Cycle Door Unlock Door Lock Door Secure Door Access Ctrl Level Access Granted Events Access Denied Events Answer RPS, page 215 Contact RPS, page 215 Contact RPS User Port, page 216 Send Status Report, page 216 Send Test Report, page 216 Send Test on Off Normal, page 217 Go to Area, page 217 Watch On, page 217 Watch Off, page 217 Show Date & Time, page 217 Sound Watch Tone, page 217 Set Keypad Volume, page 218 Set Keypad Brightness, page 218 Trouble Silence, page 218 Alarm Silence, page 218 RPS Menu Location Custom Function > Function 1-6 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 126 en | Shortcut Menu Control Panel 7 Shortcut Menu 7.1 Function Default: – Shortcut Menu Item 1: – Shortcut Menu Item 2: All On Selected Area – Shortcut Menu Item 3: View Point Status – Shortcut Menu Item 4: Reset Sensors – Shortcut Menu Item 5: Change Watch Mode – Shortcut Menu Item 6: Brightness (SDI2) / Dim (SDI) – Shortcut Menu Item 7: Volume (SDI2) / Dim (SDI) – Shortcut Menu Item 8: View Log – Shortcut Menu Item 9-32: Disabled Item Off Select Area Selections: Refer to table below. This parameter assigns functions to menu items. Select the function from the drop down list in the dialogue box that appears when you doubleclick a cell in the Function column and next to the function in the User Configuration section. All supported custom functions are listed by their configured Custom Function Text, page 123. There is no restriction on how many times you might assign a specific function to the menu. By doing so, you can assign the same function at different keypads so they appear in a different order in some areas than they would in others. Function Function Function Disabled Item Invisible Walk Test Set Panel Time All On Delay Send Test Report Show Date/Time All On Instant Display Revisions Change Skeds All On Select Area RPS Answer Brightness (SDI2) Part On Delay RPS via Network Volume (SDI2) Part On Instant RPS via Network, Change Keypad Nightlight Part On Select Area Port Silence Key Tone Off RPS via Phone View Event Memory Off Select Area Go to Area Delete Event Memory Extend Close Update Firmware View Log Bypass a Point View Service Bypassed A Key Alarm (Fire) Unbypass a Point Cycle Door B Key Alarm (Medical) View Area Status Unlock Door C Key Alarm (Silent/Panic) View Point Status Lock Door Function ### (128 to 133) Send Status Report Secure Door Reset Sensors Change Passcode Change Output State Add User Fire Walk Test Edit User Intrusion Walk Test Delete User Service Walk Test Change Watch Mode Set Panel Date RPS Menu Location Shortcut Menu > Function 7.2 Set/Clear all Default: Set/Clear All 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Shortcut Menu | en 127 Selections: Address 1-32 Use this parameter to quickly enable or disable a selected function number at all available addresses or select set several addresses at once without the need to set each one individually. Any changes you make in the Set/Clear All window also appear in the specific keypad Address # cell. For example, if you check the boxes for Address 1 and Address 2 in the Set/Clear All Address window, the cells for Address 1 and Address 2 change to show Yes. Likewise, if you change any of the Address #, page 127 cells individually, those changes appear in the Set/Clear All Address window. RPS Menu Location Shortcut Menu > Set/Clear All 7.3 Address # Default: Yes (Shortcut Menu 1 to 8) Selections: – Yes - this menu item appears at this keypad address. – No - this menu item does not appear at this keypad address. This parameter determines at which keypad address setting this menu item appears. Any changes you make in the Set/Clear all, page 126 window also appear in the specific keypad Address # cell. For example, if you check the boxes for Address 1 and Address 2 in the Set/ Clear All Address window, the cells for Address 1 and Address 2 change to show Yes. Likewise, if you change any of the Address # cells individually, those changes appear in the Set/Clear All Address window. RPS Menu Location Shortcut Menu > Address # (B6512: 1 to 12, B5512, B4512: 1 to 8, B3512: 1 to 4) Shortcut Menu > Address # (B9512: 1 to 32, B8512: 1 to 16) Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 128 en | Output Parameters 8 Control Panel Output Parameters Outputs provide dry contact (normally open/closed) outputs for LED annunciation and other applications as well as wet (12vdc on/off) voltage outputs for basic alarm system functions (such as Bell output, Reset Sensors, etc.). The applications are endless, but primarily, outputs are used to enhance a systems capability to perform output functions. Output Types – Panel Wide Outputs: These outputs are used to provide an output related to a "panel wide" indication. For annunciation, these outputs can be used to indicate "system wide" troubles for power, phone and overall control panel summary of alarms, troubles and supervisory events. – Area Outputs: These outputs are used to provide an output "by the area" that the output is assigned to. An area can have its own bell and sensor reset indications. Outputs can also be used to indicate the area armed state and whether any off normal events such as a force arm have occurred. – On-board Outputs: There are 2 on-board 12 VDC voltage-outputs which provide power when activated on the control panel. These outputs are default programmed from the factory as outputs A(1), B(2) and C(3). Typically, output A(1) is used for the Bell, output B(2) is used for an alternate alarm output (such as another bell) and output C(3) is used for Sensor Reset. Off-board Outputs: The control panel can also control as many as 64 dry contact form "C" outputs when up to 8 optional B308 OctoOutput Modules are installed. These outputs are used for Area Output, Panel Wide Output, and Individual Point Fault Outputs. Output Follows Point Outputs can also be used to activate when a point programmed for, Output Response Type (in the point index section), is off normal or in alarm event. Output Reports When output activity is reported to the receiver (Refer to Routing ), on-board outputs are reported as follows: A(1) = 253, B(2) = 254, C(3) = 255, and others report as 001 to 58. The output report is Relay Set Output #rrrr when the output is turned ON and Relay Set Output #rrrr when the output is turned off. Output reports are also stored in the control panel memory log. Controlling Outputs As mentioned, outputs can be activated depending upon events that exist with the control panel. In addition, outputs can be controlled by the user using the [CHG OUTPUT?] function, Output On/Output Off skeds, and the RPS. The following programming tips, notes and applications are important for you to review prior to programming your outputs. Notice! Do not attempt to use the CHG OUTPUTS? function to toggle outputs reserved for special functions. Special function outputs are Area and control panel Wide output functions as well as outputs assigned to KP# Entr Key Rly and Output Response Type. Output C is always powered ON. Assigning any other output deactivates Output C so this output can be used for other functions. When Output C is programmed for Reset Sensors, power is always supplied from the AUX terminal of the control panel and the Output C provides a path to common. Output C turns off the common connection during sensor reset. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Output Parameters | en 129 Check output status after reprogramming or resetting the control panel. All outputs are turned off after the control panel is reset. Certain output functions are checked by the control panel each minute and will resume the correct state after the reset. Other outputs must be manually set to the correct state using the Change Output function (MENU 32). These output functions resume the proper state within one minute: Fire Bell Area Fault Part On Fault Summary Fire Summary Alarm AC Fail Summary Trouble Phone Fail Communications Fail Silent Alarm Watch Mode Reset Sensors Summary SupFire Alarm Bell Battery Trouble Summary Fire Tbl Area Armed Summary SupBurg These output functions need to be manually reset with Change Output function: Fail To Close Force Armed Duress Log % Full 8.1 Area Wide Outputs 8.1.1 Alarm Bell Default: 1 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 This output activates when an intrusion point assigned to this area goes into alarm. It will also activate for (non-fire) keypad and keyfob alarms that are configured to sound the Alarm Bell. Notice! To comply with SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction, set this parameter to a value other than 0 for each enabled area. Refer to SIA CP-01 Verification for more information. Burg Time, page 98 and Burg Pattern, page 98 must be programmed. This output activates according to the bell pattern and remains active until the bell time expires or is manually silenced. Silent Alarm, page 132 must be set to No in order for the bell to ring upon alarm. Each area can be assigned a unique output number for each of the events listed in this section. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Area Wide Outputs > Alarm Bell 8.1.2 Fire Bell Default: 1 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 This output activates when a fire point assigned to this area goes into alarm. It will also activate for keypad fire alarms. Fire Time and Fire Pattern must be programmed in Bell Parameters. This output activates according to the bell pattern and remains active until the bell time expires or is manually silenced. Silent Bell must be set to No in order for the bell to ring upon alarm. Each area can be assigned a unique output number for each of the events listed in this section. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 130 en | Output Parameters Control Panel Notice! To comply with UL 864 requirements for Commercial Fire Systems, program this parameter with a relay. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Area Wide Outputs > Fire Bell 8.1.3 Reset Sensors Default: 3 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 This parameter (output C) output de-activates for five seconds when the RESET SENSORS? function is initiated from the keypad or during a FIRE WALK? test. The Reset Sensor time converts from the five second default time to the time programmed in Restart Time (Area parameters section) when a point programmed for Alarm Verify, page 193 (Point Index Section) goes into an alarm event. When sharing one output to reset sensors in two or more areas, you must program the parameters below. Failure to do so can cause TROUBLE PT ### for all point types programmed as Resettable, page 193. – Scope, page 109 must include all the areas that are sharing the output. – Reset Sensor(s), page 162 for the user initiating the sensor reset must be enabled in all the areas that are sharing the output. – Restart Time, page 92 must be the same number of seconds for all the areas that are sharing the output. Each area can be assigned a unique output number for each of the events listed in this section. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Area Wide outputs > Reset Sensors 8.1.4 Fail to Close/Part On Armed Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 To change between the Fail To Close and Part On output functions described below, configure the Part On Output, page 80 parameter. This output activates when the closing window expires for the specified area. It remains activated until midnight, or until another closing window starts, or the control panel is reset, whichever occurs first. Each area can be assigned a unique output number for each of the events listed in this section. This output activates when all areas assigned to the same output are armed Part On Instant or Part On Delayed. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Area Wide Outputs > Fail to Close/Part On 8.1.5 Force Armed Default: 0 Selections: – 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 B6512: 0 to 96 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Output Parameters | en 131 This output activates when this area is force armed. It remains activated until the area is disarmed or the control panel is reset. This output does not activate when Part On force arming. Each area can be assigned a unique output number for each of the events listed in this section. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Area Wide Outputs > Force Armed 8.1.6 Watch Mode Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 This output activates when a controlled point programmed for Watch Point is tripped in the specified area while the area is in Watch Mode and the point is not armed. It remains activated for two seconds after each point is faulted. Each area can be assigned a unique output number for each of the events listed in this section. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Area Wide Outputs > Watch Mode 8.1.7 Area Armed Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 The output activates when the specified area becomes All On (exit delay must expire before the output activates). The output remains activated until the area is disarmed, it does not deactivate during the entry delay time. If multiple areas use the same output, the output activates when all areas are armed. It deactivates when the first area disarms. – Keyswitch area armed status with LED's. Use an module and connect an LED to display the armed state. – Alternate communication trigger: This output can be used to trigger the input zone of a device being used as a slave to report control panel arming status. Each area can be assigned a unique output number for each of the events listed in this section. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Area Wide Outputs > Area Armed 8.1.8 Area Off Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 When an area's arming state switches from All On (either delay or instant) to Part On or Disarmed, the output number configured here activates. When an area's arming state switches from Part On or Disarmed to All On (either delay or instant), the output number configured here de-activates. If the same output number is configured in more than one area's Area Off Output, the output will only activate when the first area is no longer armed All On. If the same output number is configured in more than one area's Area Off Output, the output will only de-activate if all area's using that same output number are armed All On. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 132 en | Output Parameters Control Panel The Area Off Output is also affected by the Early Area Armed Output, page 81. When the Early Area Armed Output is set to No,the Area Off Output does not activate until the end of exit delay. When the Early Area Armed Output is set to Yes, the Area Off Output de-activates as soon as exit delay starts and the area is armed All On. Note: if the All On- No Exit, page 104 option is set to Yes and the area switches to Part On at the end of exit delay, the Area Off Output will activate at that time. Simply starting entry delay does not affect the state of the output configured in Area Off. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Area Wide Outputs > Area Off 8.1.9 Area Fault Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 The output activates whenever a Part On, Interior or Interior Follower point is faulted. The output remains activated until all perimeter and interior points in the area are normal. Keyswitch area fault status with LED's: Use a B308 module and connect an LED to illuminate when this output is activated indicating that the area is not ready to arm. Assign a unique output number for each area. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Area Wide Outputs > Area Fault 8.1.10 Duress Output Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 The output activates when a duress event is generated from a keypad assigned to the area. Burg Time must have a bell period programmed and Duress Enable, page 93 must be set to Yes. This output activates "steady" regardless of bell pattern and remains active until the bell time expires. You can assign a different output number for the Duress Output each area. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Area Wide Outputs > Duress Output 8.1.11 Part On Fault Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 The output activates when a controlled perimeter point (Type 1) assigned to the specified area is faulted. This output activates regardless of the areas armed state. This output provides a steady output until all perimeter points in the area return to normal. This output does not activate on interior faults. To detect all area point faults, program all points as perimeter points in the area to which this output is assigned. Assign a unique output number for each area. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Area Wide Outputs > Part On Fault 8.1.12 Silent Alarm Default: 0 Selections: 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Output Parameters | en 133 – B6512: 0 to 96 This output activates when a point assigned to the specified area and programmed for Silent Bell, page 186 goes into alarm. Use this output for invisible/silent bell 24-hour panic/hold up applications. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Area Wide Outputs > Silent Alarm 8.1.13 Gas Bell Default: 1 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 This output activates when a gas point assigned to this area goes into alarm. The area-wide Gas alarm bell uses the time in Fire Time, page 97 and output cadence defined in Gas Pattern, page 99. This output activates according to the bell pattern and remains active until the bell time expires or is manually silenced. Each area can be assigned a unique output number for each of the events listed in this section. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Area Wide Outputs > Gas Bell 8.2 Panel Wide Outputs 8.2.1 AC Failure Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 This parameter enables the output to activate when the control panel responds to an AC power failure as programmed in AC Fail Time, page 69. The output automatically resets when AC power is restored. Connect a separate sounder to this output to create an audible annunciation from the keypads for all applications excluding commercial fire systems. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Panel Wide Outputs > AC Failure 8.2.2 Battery Trouble Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 This parameter enables the output to activate when battery voltage falls below 12.1 VDC, or when the battery is in a missing condition. The output automatically resets when battery power is restored. Connect a separate sounder to this output to create an audible annunciation from the keypads for all applications excluding commercial fire systems. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Panel Wide Outputs > Battery Trouble 8.2.3 Phone Fail Default: 0 Selections: – Bosch Security Systems, Inc. B6512: 0 to 96 Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 134 en | Output Parameters Control Panel This parameter enables the output to activate when a telephone line failure alarm is generated. The output automatically resets when the telephone line restores. A time must be entered in Phone Supervision Time in order for this output to activate. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Panel Wide Outputs > Phone Fail 8.2.4 Comm Fail Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 When there is a Comm Fail event for any Route Group the output you enter at this parameter activates. The output automatically resets when a report from the Route Group is sent to the central station receiver successfully. To learn more about Comm Fail events refer to Communicator, overview, page 58. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Panel Wide Outputs > Comm Fail 8.2.5 Log % Full Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 This parameter sets the number of the output that activates when the log has reached the programmed percentage of its capacity as programmed in Log % Full, page 70. A steady output is provided until the RPS pointer is set. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > control panel Wide Outputs > Log % Full (Outputs) Additional resources See Get History for more information. 8.2.6 Summary Fire Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 This parameter sets the number of the output that activates when any fire point in the system (Point type = Fire) goes into alarm. A steady output is provided until all fire points in the system are returned to normal, and all fire alarm events are cleared from keypad displays. Notice! This parameter only functions as described when Fire Summary Sustain, page 76 is set to No. Notice! To ensure proper operation, do not assign more than one function to the output associated with this summary function. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Panel Wide Outputs > Summary Fire 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel 8.2.7 Output Parameters | en 135 Summary Alarm Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 This parameter sets the number of the output that activates when a non-fire point goes into alarm. A steady output is provided until the alarm is silenced and the alarm event is cleared form the keypads' display. This output does not activate for silent alarms. Notice! To ensure proper operation, do not assign more than one function to the output associated with this summary function. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Panel Wide Outputs > Summary Alarm 8.2.8 Summary Fire Trouble Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 This parameter enables the output to activate when any fire point on the control panel is in trouble. A steady output is provided until all fire points have restored to a normal event and the event message is cleared by the user at the keypad. Notice! To ensure proper operation, do not assign more than one function to the output associated with this summary function. Notice! Fire/gas trouble points must be restored to normal before summary outputs can be cleared. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Panel Wide Outputs > Summary Fire Trouble 8.2.9 Summary Supervisory Fire Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 This output activates when any fire supervisory point on the control panel is in a supervisory event (off normal). A steady output is provided until all fire supervisory points are restored to a normal condition and the event message is cleared by the user at the keypad. Notice! To ensure proper operation, do not assign more than one function to the output associated with this summary function. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 136 en | Output Parameters Control Panel Notice! Fire/gas trouble points must be restored to normal before summary outputs can be cleared. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Panel Wide Outputs > Summary Supervisory Fire 8.2.10 Summary Trouble Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 This parameter output activates when any non-fire/gas point on the control panel is in a trouble condition. A steady output is provided until the event message is cleared by the user at the keypad. Notice! To ensure proper operation, do not assign more than one function to the output associated with this summary function. Notice! Fire/gas trouble points must be restored to normal before summary outputs can be cleared. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Panel Wide Outputs > Summary Trouble 8.2.11 Summary Supervisory Burg Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 This parameter enables the output to activate when any non-fire supervisory point on the control panel is in a supervisory condition. A steady output is provided until all Burg points are restored to a normal condition and the event message is cleared by the user at the keypad. Notice! To ensure proper operation, do not assign more than one function to the output associated with this summary function. Notice! Fire/gas trouble points must be restored to normal before summary outputs can be cleared. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Panel Wide Outputs > Summary Supervisory Burg 8.2.12 Summary Gas Output Default: 0 Selections: 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Output Parameters | en 137 – B6512: 0 to 96 This parameter sets the number of the output that activates when any gas point in the system goes into alarm. A steady output is provided until all gas points in the system are returned to normal and the event message is cleared by the user at the keypad. Notice! To ensure proper operation, do not assign more than one function to the output associated with this summary function. Notice! Fire/gas trouble points must be restored to normal before summary outputs can be cleared. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Panel Wide Outputs > Summary Gas Output 8.2.13 Summary Gas Supervisory Output Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 This parameter enables the output to activate when any gas supervisory point on the control panel is in a supervisory event (off normal). A steady output is provided until all gas supervisory points are restored to a normal condition and the event message is cleared by the user at the keypad. Notice! To ensure proper operation, do not assign more than one function to the output associated with this summary function. Notice! Fire/gas trouble points must be restored to normal before summary outputs can be cleared. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Panel Wide Outputs > Summary Gas Supervisory Output 8.2.14 Summary Gas Trouble Output Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 This parameter sets the output to activate when any gas point on the control panel is in trouble. A steady output is provided until all gas points have restored to a normal condition and the event message is cleared by the user at the keypad. Notice! To ensure proper operation, do not assign more than one function to the output associated with this summary function. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 138 en | Output Parameters Control Panel Notice! Fire/gas trouble points must be restored to normal before summary outputs can be cleared. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Panel Wide Outputs > Summary Gas Trouble Output 8.3 Output Configuration 8.3.1 Output Source Default: – Output A(1): On-board A – Output B(2): On-board B – Output C(3): On-board C – All other Outputs: Unassigned Selections: – On-board – Unassigned – Octo-output – IP Camera – Keypad This parameter guides the RPS operator with configuration rules, such as where the Octooutput devices are allowed to be configured, and what output number ranges are permitted. When a selection is grayed out it cannot be changed. You can install a B308 Octo-output Module on particular Output number boundaries starting at Output 11. Refer to B308 Octo-output Module switch settings, page 250. Notice! Use of IP Camera as Output Source is limited Each IP Camera (1 to 6 ) supports 4 outputs. You can select IP Camera as Output Source for Outputs 11 to 14, 21 to 24, 31 to 34, …61 to 64 only. Do not select IP Camera as Output Source for Outputs 15 to 18, 25 to 28, 35 to 38, …65 to 68. RPS Menu Location Output Parameters > Output Configuration > Output Source 8.3.2 Output Text Default: Output # Selections: Up to 32 alphanumeric characters This parameter provides a description for the physical location of the point for use by installation and service personnel. Enter up to 32 characters of text to describe the output. Note: To expand or collapse the list of Point numbers, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location Output Parameter > Output Configuration > Output Text 8.3.3 Output Text (Second Language) Default: Blank Selections: Up to 32 alphanumeric characters 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Output Parameters | en 139 This parameter provides a description for the physical location of the point for use by installation and service personnel. Enter up to 32 characters of text to describe the output. Note: To expand or collapse the list of Point numbers, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location Output Parameter > Output Configuration > Output Text-Second Language 8.3.4 Hide From User Default: No Selections: – Yes - The control panel denies access to this output for all users except the installer. – No - The control panel allows authorized end users to toggle the output manually at a keypad, or by using RSC, Automation Mode 1, or Automation Mode 2. This parameter gives the installer the ability to hide outputs from user control. Note: To expand or collapse the list of Point numbers, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location Output Parameter > Output Configuration > Hide from User Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 140 en | User Configuration Control Panel 9 User Configuration 9.1 User Assignments (passcodes) 9.1.1 User Name Default: – User 0: Installer – All others: USER # Selections: Up to 32 characters. This parameter sets the user name displayed at keypads, and included in user reports when transmitting in Modem4 format to the central station receiver. Enter up to 32 characters of text, numbers and symbols. Keypads display the first 20 characters. If more than 20 characters are used, the name scrolls across the display one time. To scroll the name again, press [ESC]. Spaces before, after and within the name are treated as text and are included in the 32 character limit. To expand or collapse the list of users, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Assignments > User Name 9.1.2 Passcode Default: – User 0: 123 – User 1: 123456 – All others: Blank Selections: Enter a 3-to-6-digits based on the entry made in Passcode Length, page 78. This parameter sets a value from three to six digits in length to enable a passcode for the Master User in this group. You cannot enter any passcode number that could conflict with a duress passcode. Regardless of the Duress Type, page 73 setting, passcodes within a range of 2 for existing passcodes cannot be entered. This rule applies even if duress is disabled. For example, once a passcode of 654327 is entered, 654325, 654326, 654328, and 654329 cannot be entered. A silence bell authority is built into all authority levels, even if they are default and none of the available programmable functions are enabled. A user passcode can silence a Fire/Burg bell as long as any authority level is assigned to the area where the bell can be silenced from. User 000 is the Service Authority Level (Level 15). You cannot change the programming for User 000. Only the Service Authority Level (User 000) can delete User 000. When a user other than User 000 tries to delete the passcode for User 000, the keypad displays NOT IN USE. User 000 cannot be added or changed at the keypad. Note: To expand or collapse the list of users, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Assignments (Passcodes) > Passcode 9.1.3 Remote Access Default: No (prohibit this user system access with RSC application) Selections: – Yes (allow this user system access with RSC application) – No (prohibit this user system access with RSC application) 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel User Configuration | en 141 When this parameter is set to Yes, the user can use the RSC (Remote Security Control) application on their mobile device to control their security system. When this parameter is set to No, the user is prohibited from using the RSC (Remote Security Control) application on their mobile device to control their security system. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Assignments > Remote Access 9.1.4 User Group Default: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 6 0 = no restrictions This parameter creates a group of users whose combinations can be enabled/disabled using an automatic user window. This is the number that is entered into the User Group, page 208 (Schedules > User Group Windows) for any active user window. Multiple windows can be programmed for one user group within one 24 hour period. For example, if User Group 1 has a window running from 8:00 AM (start time) to 4:00 PM (stop time), the users for that group can use their passcodes only between 8:00 AM and 4:00 PM. Between 4:00 PM and 8:00 AM the next day, the users cannot use their passcodes. To enable this user's passcode at all times, leave this item 0. User Group Window times cannot be changed from the keypad. Once a window is assigned to a user group, the users in that group rely on the window to be active (within the start and stop times) for their passcodes to function. The only way to disable the window is by reprogramming the control panel from RPS. Note: To expand or collapse the list of users, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Assignments (Passcodes) > User Group 9.1.5 Area Authorities Default: – User 0: All Area #'s Authority Level = 15 – User 1: – – Area #1 Authority Level = 1 – All other Area #'s Authority Level = 0 All Other User #'s: 0 Selections: – B6512: 0 to 6 Notice! When setting up a new User, assign an authority level to the user for at least one area. The Area Authorities parameter defaults to 0 (zero) for new users. Authority Level 0 (zero) means the user has no authority in the area indicated. Authority level 15 is reserved for User 0Installer and cannot be changed. 0 = No Authority Refer to User Configuration > Authority Levels, page 153 in RPS to view settings for each authority level. Note: To expand or collapse the list of users, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 142 en | User Configuration Control Panel RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Assignments > Area Authorities 9.1.6 Site Code Default (per card type): 26 bit card type: 255 37 bit no site code card type: blank 37 bit with site code card type: 65535 Selections (per card type): 26 bit card type: 0 to 254, 255 = disabled 37 bit no site code card type: blank 37 bit with site code card type: 0 to 65534, 65535 = disabled For the 37 bit no site code card type the site code is not configurable (the Site Code parameter is grayed out). For 26 bit and 37 bit with site code card types, enter the site code (facility code) as shown on the packaging of the cards or tokens. You can also retrieve the site code using RPS. First add the card or token into the system at the premises using a reader and keypad (MENU 42). Then connect to the panel with RPS and receive the panel account. When you delete a card (or delete the card data) RPS automatically sets the Site Code to the default (255 for 26 bit card type, 65535 for 37 bit with site code card type). RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Assignments > Site Code 9.1.7 Card Data Default: blank Selections: 26 bit card type: 0 to 65534, blank 37 bit no site code card type: 0 to 1099511627774, blank 37 bit with site code card type: 0 to 524286, blank Enter the card data printed on the card or token. For the 26 bit and 37 bit with site code Card Type, page 227s, you must enter the Site Code, page 142 before you enter Card Data. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Assignments > Card Data 9.1.8 Inovonics Keyfob RFID (B820) Default: N/A Selections: 0 - 99999999 Each user can be assigned a wireless keyfob RFID (Radio Frequency device Identification number). An Inovonics keyfob RFID can be Auto-Learned through the SDI2 bus RF receiver, or it can be entered here. Auto-Learned RFIDs can be edited for Inovonics keyfob replacement, or can be set to 0 to disable a user’s Inovonics keyfob. An RFID is a unique number assigned to a wireless device at the factory. It provides a unique way for the wireless receiver and wireless repeaters to identify what device is transmitting. Duplicate ID detection must be based on the RFID value stored in configuration memory, not on the number printed on the device. Inovonics keyfobs are not supervised when assigned to a user. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel User Configuration | en 143 Notice! After you Send Updates to Panel, the control panel does not download the RFIDs to the receiver until you disconnect RPS. Note: To expand or collapse the list of users, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Assignments > Keyfob RFID (B820 Inovonics Wireless) 9.1.9 RADION Keyfob RFID (B810) Default: 0 Selections: 0, 11 - 167772156 Use this feature to assign each user a wireless keyfob RFID (Radio Frequency device Identification number). A RADION keyfob RFID is Auto-Learned through the SDI2 bus RF receiver. Alternatively, enter the RFID manually here. You can edit auto-Learned RFIDs for RADION keyfob replacement, or set the parameter to 0 to disable a user’s RADION keyfob. An RFID is a unique number assigned to a wireless device at the factory. It provides a unique way for the wireless receiver and wireless repeaters to identify what device is transmitting. Duplicate ID detection is based on the RFID value stored in configuration memory, not on the number printed on the device. Notice! After you Send Updates to Panel, the control panel does not download the RFIDs to the receiver until you Disconnect RPS from the Control Panel. Note: To expand or collapse the list of users, use the expand / collapse icons at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Assignments > Keyfob RFID (B810 RADION Wireless) 9.1.10 Supervised Default: No Selections: – Yes - the RADION keyfob assigned to this user is supervised. – No - the RADION keyfob assigned to this user is not supervised. When this parameter is set to Yes to supervise the RADION keyfob assigned to this user, the control panel creates a missing event when the keyfob is moved out of range of the RADION receiver. The supervision interval for keyfobs is 4 hours. Keyfobs must be out of range of the receiver for 4 hours before the panel creates the missing event. Inovonics keyfobs are not supervised. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Assignments > Supervised 9.1.11 User language Default: 1: (language programmed as first language in Panel Data window) Selections: – 1:(first language) – 2:(second language) This parameter sets the language to display at the assigned keypad. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 144 en | User Configuration Control Panel First and Second languages are programmed during panel account setup in the New Panel Data window. Supported languages include English, Spanish, French and Portuguese. Note: To expand or collapse the list of users, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Assignments (Passcodes) > User Language 9.2 User Groups 9.2.1 User Group Name Default: Blank Selections: Enter up to 32 characters. Use this parameter to enter a name that identifies a user group. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Groups > User Group Name 9.3 User (keypad) Functions 9.3.1 All On, Delay Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function arms all Delay areas that are disarmed. When the passcode is entered at the keypad, the control panel checks the user's authority level. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > All On Delay 9.3.2 All On, Instant Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function arms all Instant areas that are disarmed. Notice! To comply with SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction, set this parameter to Disabled (-). Refer to SIA CP-01 Verification for more information. Entry and Exit Delays are not provided with this arming function. This causes Part On and interior delay points to act as instant points. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > All On Instant 9.3.3 Part On, Instant Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel User Configuration | en 145 – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function turns areas part on with no entry/exit delays in the area where the keypad is assigned. This causes perimeter and interior delay points to act as instant points. Notice! To comply with SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction, set this parameter to Disabled (-). Refer to SIA CP-01 Verification for more information. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Part On Instant. 9.3.4 Part On, Delay Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function turns areas part on with entry/exit delays in the area where the keypad is assigned. Entry and exit delays are provided with this arming function. This will not cause a Part On instant point to act as a delay point. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Part On Delay. 9.3.5 Watch Mode Default: E Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function turns watch mode on and off. This function provides keypad audible/visual and optional output activation when a point configured for Watch Mode is activated. (Refer to Watch Mode in the Area Wide Outputs section). RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Watch Mode 9.3.6 View Area Status Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows the user to view the armed status of all areas within the scope of the keypad. The armed states include: – Disarmed – All On delay armed – All On instant armed – Part On instant armed Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 146 en | User Configuration – Control Panel Part On delay armed All area types (Master, Associate, Regular and Shared) can be viewed using this function. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > View Area Status 9.3.7 View/Delete Event Memory Default: E Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows the user to view and clear event memory. Event memory is not cleared until the area is re-armed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > View/Clear Event Memory 9.3.8 View Point Status Default: E Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows the user to view point status, point text and the electrical state (normal, open, short and missing) of each point assigned to the area. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > View Point Status 9.3.9 Walk Test (all Non-Fire Burg Points) Default: E Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows the user to test controlled points in areas within the keypad's scope without sending reports to the central station. 24 hour points cannot be tested using this walk test mode. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Walk Test (All Non-Fire Burg Points) 9.3.10 Walk Test All Fire Points Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows the user to test 24-hour points in areas within the Scope of the keypad where the function is entered. Controlled points, Point Type, cannot be tested using the fire walk test mode. 24-Hour points left off-normal when exiting the Fire Test are bypassed. A trouble tone sounds until it is silenced. The keypads alternate text with the Bypass indications. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel User Configuration | en 147 RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Walk Test All Fire Points Further information Point Type, page 178 9.3.11 Send Report (Test/Status) Default: E Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function tests the communication link between the control panel and the central station receiver(s). This parameter can send a test report or a status report to the phone numbers as programmed in Phone Routing. Reports can also be sent to an IP address if programmed. The test report includes additional information if Expand Test Rpt is enabled in the Phone section. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Send Report (Test/Status) 9.3.12 Door Control Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows the user to access the cycle door, unlock door, and secure door functions. Use this feature when programming door control in your function menu. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Door Control 9.3.13 Set Keypad Brightness / Volume / Keypress Default: E Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows the user to select either a bright or dim display with loud or soft keypad warning tones. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Set Keypad Brightness/Volume/Keypress 9.3.14 Set/Show Date and Time Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows the user to set the time and date in the control panel. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 148 en | User Configuration Control Panel RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Set/Show Date and Time 9.3.15 Change Passcodes Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows a user to change their own passcode. This is a panel wide function that can be executed from any keypad assigned to an area where the user has authority. Regardless of whether an E or a P is placed here, when Change Passcode is performed, the keypad will prompt the user to enter their existing passcode first. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Change Passcode 9.3.16 Add/Edit User Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows a user with authority to add or change passcodes, and add or change control panel authority levels for other users by area. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Add/Edit User 9.3.17 Delete User Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows a user with authority to delete other users' passcodes. It does not delete user names. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Delete User 9.3.18 Extend Close Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows users to extend the closing window. The window cannot be adjusted until the Close Early Begin time has passed and the closing window is active. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Extend Close 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel 9.3.19 User Configuration | en 149 View Event Log Default: E Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows the user to view the event log. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > View Event Log 9.3.20 User Command 7 Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This parameter enables or disables the User Command 7. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > User Command 7 9.3.21 User Command 9 Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This parameter enables or disables the User Command 9. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > User Command 9 9.3.22 Bypass a Point Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function bypasses individual points in areas within the Scope of the keypad. Bypassed points do not create alarm or trouble events. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Bypass a Point 9.3.23 Unbypass a Point Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function unbypasses individual points that are programmed either P## FA Returnable or P## Bypass Returnable. Points within the Scope of the keypad are unbypassed where the function is entered. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 150 en | User Configuration Control Panel The control panel will respond to alarms/troubles and display point faults when a point is unbypassed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Unbypass a Point 9.3.24 Reset Sensor Default: E Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function resets sensors in areas within the Scope of the keypad. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Reset Sensors 9.3.25 Change Output Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows the user to manually set and reset any outputs installed in the system. NOTE: The Change Outputs parameter also works with onboard outputs. Use the following output numbers to toggle the onboard outputs: – Onboard Output A(1) > Output #253 – Onboard Output B(2) > Output #254 – Onboard Output C(3) > Output #255 RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Change Outputs 9.3.26 Remote Program Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function initiates Remote Account Manager sessions. When the phone is ringing at the control panel, the user initiates this function to have the control panel seize the line. Notice! To comply with UL 864 requirements for Commercial Fire Systems, set this parameter to P. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Remote Program 9.3.27 Go to area Default: P Selections: - , E, P – 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel User Configuration | en 151 – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function temporarily switches the keypad's assignment to a different area. This can be used to perform any function that can be performed by a keypad assigned to the area in programming. Users are limited to performing functions enabled by the authority level they have in the area that the keypad is moved to. After fifteen (15) seconds of no activity at the keypad, the keypad reverts back to the originally programmed area. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Move to Area 9.3.28 Display Panel Type and Revision Default: E Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function displays the control panel's software revision number in the keypad display. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Display Revision 9.3.29 Service Walk All Points Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows a user to walk test all points in the entire control panel regardless of the Point Type. 24-Hour points left off-normal when exiting the Service Walk Test are bypassed. A trouble tone sounds until it is silenced. The keypads alternate text with the Bypass indications. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Service Walk All Points 9.3.30 Change Skeds Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows the user to change the Time from the keypad to make adjustments to Skeds. This is a panel wide function that can be executed from any keypad assigned to an area where the user has authority. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Change Skeds 9.3.31 Walk Test All Invisible Burg Points Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 152 en | User Configuration Control Panel – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows a user with Invisible Walk Test authority to test invisible intrusion points that are within the scope of the keypad without sending a report to the central station. Invisible points must have the Invisible Point parameter set to Yes. 24-Hour points left off-normal when exiting the Invisible Walk Test are bypassed. A trouble tone sounds until it is silenced. The keypads will alternate text with the Bypass indications. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Walk Test All Invisible Burg Points 9.3.32 Silence Function Default: E Selections: – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This parameter enables or disables the silence function. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User (Keypad) Functions > Silence Function 9.3.33 Custom Function Default: Passcode (P) Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function sets whether a passcode will be required (or not) when attempting to access a Custom Function from the Shortcut Menu, A-Key, B-Key, C-Key, or a Keyfob. The B6512 supports Custom Function 128 to 133. The B5512 supports Custom Function 128 to 131. The B4512 supports Custom Function 128 to 129. The B3512 supports Custom Function 128. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Custom function 9.3.34 Keypad Programming Default: P Selections: - , E, P – Disable (-) - Disable this function panel wide regardless of the user's authority level. – Enable (E) - Enable this function panel wide without requiring a passcode. – Passcode (P) - Require a passcode to enable this function panel wide. This function allows local keypad programming for a select list of parameters from keypads. The Installer passcode is the only passcode that provides access to keypad programming. If at least one area is armed or the control panel is communicating with RPS, you cannot access keypad programming. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > User Keypad Functions > Keypad Programming Further information Refer to the control panel documentation for more information on keypad programming. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel User Configuration | en 153 9.4 Authority Levels 9.4.1 Authority Level Name Default: L1 (to L15) Selections: Enter up to 32 characters. This parameter allows the user to enter a description for an authority level. Enter up to 32 characters from the Latin-1 8-bit (ISO/IEC 8859-1) character set to describe the area. Note: First and Second languages are programmed during panel account setup in the Panel Data window. Supported languages include English, Spanish, French and Portuguese. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Authority Level Name 9.4.2 Authority Level Name (Second Language) Default: L1 (to L15) Selections: Enter up to 32 characters. This parameter allows the user to enter a description for an authority level. Enter up to 32 characters from the Latin-1 8-bit (ISO/IEC 8859-1) character set to describe the area. Note: First and Second languages are programmed during panel account setup in the Panel Data window. Supported languages include English, Spanish, French and Portuguese. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Authority Level Name (second language) 9.4.3 Disarm Select Default: Authority Levels 1-5, 14: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 6-13, 15: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. The parameter disarms areas that are All On or Part On. If enabled, the following disarming choices are available to the user with this authority. – Disarm All: Disarms all areas within the scope of the keypad being used by accessing the function menu and the Authority Level of the user performing the function. – Disarm Area#: Disarms only the area that is displayed. The options available for arming and disarming are dependent upon Area Type and Scope. Configure the Duress Enable parameter to Yes in applicable areas, or the keypad will respond with No Authority. Duress Disarm Profile User Authority Level 14 is programmed by default as a Duress disarm profile. When Duress Type is set to 3, the SIA CP-01 compliant Duress Passcode feature is enabled. Duress Types 1 and 2 are not allowed in SIA CP-01 compliant installations. With Authority Level 14 assigned to a user passcode in an area, that user has the authority to disarm and send a Duress event from that area. All Duress-capable passcodes must be unique and cannot be derived from other passcodes. To facilitate this uniqueness, User Authority Level 14 is pre-programmed from the factory as an example of Duress Disarm authority. A Duress Disarm user authority level requires the following functions to be enabled: – Disarm Select, page 153 – Send Duress, page 165 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 154 en | User Configuration – Control Panel Disarm by Passcode, page 166 RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Disarm Select 9.4.4 All On, Delay Default: Authority Levels 1-5: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 6-15: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows users to turn the system All On, Delay (arm all Part On (perimeter) and Interior points with exit and entry delay time in areas within the scope of the keypad being used, and that correspond to the user's Authority Level). If a user uses Command 1, All On, Delay only arms the area the keypad is assigned to. If a user uses the Remote Security Control app (RSC) to turn the system All On, Delay, the areas that correspond to the user’s Authority Level are armed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > All On Delay 9.4.5 All On, Instant Default: Authority Levels 1 & 2: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 3-15: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows users to turn the system All On, Instant (arm all Part On (perimeter) and Interior points with no exit and no entry delay time in areas within the scope of the keypad being used, and that correspond to the user's Authority Level). If a user uses Command 11, All On, Instant only arms the area the keypad is assigned to. If a user uses the Remote Security Control app (RSC) to turn the system All On, Instant, the areas that correspond to the user’s Authority Level are armed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > All On Instant 9.4.6 Part On, Instant Default: Authority Levels 1-4: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 5-15: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows users to turn the system Part On, Instant (arm all Part On (perimeter) points with no exit and no entry delay time in areas within the scope of the keypad being used, and that correspond to the user's Authority Level). If a user uses Command 2, Part On, Instant only arms the area the keypad is assigned to. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel User Configuration | en 155 If a user uses the Remote Security Control app (RSC) to turn the system Part On, Instant, the areas that correspond to the user’s Authority Level are armed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Part On Instant 9.4.7 Part On, Delay Default: Authority Levels 1-4: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 5-15: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows users to turn the system Part On, Delay (arm all Part On (perimeter) points with entry exit and entry delay time in areas within the scope of the keypad being used, and that correspond to the user's Authority Level). If a user uses Command 3, Part on, Delay only arms the area the keypad is assigned to. If a user uses the Remote Security Control app (RSC) to turn the system Part On, Delay, the areas that correspond to the user’s Authority Level are armed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Part On Delay 9.4.8 Watch Mode Default: Authority Levels 1-3, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 4-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to initiate the watch mode in the area to which this is keypad assigned. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0). You cannot change any settings in the Authority Level 15 column. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Watch Mode 9.4.9 View Area Status Default: Authority Levels 1, 2, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 3-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to view the current arm/disarm and not ready to arm status of all areas within the scope of the keypad in this area. The user must have arming/disarming authority. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > View Area Status Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 156 en | User Configuration 9.4.10 Control Panel View Event Memory Default: Authority Levels 1-3, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 4-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to view all memory events that have occurred since the last time the system was armed for all areas within the scope of the keypad in this area. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > View Event Memory 9.4.11 View Point Status Default: Authority Levels 1-3, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 4-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to view the current status of all points in the area to which this keypad is assigned. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > View Point Status 9.4.12 Walk Test (All Non-Fire Burg Points) Default: Authority Levels 1, 2, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 3-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This function allows the user to test controlled points in areas within the keypad's scope without sending reports to the central station. 24 hour points cannot be tested using this walk test mode. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Walk Test (non-fire burg points) 9.4.13 Walk Test All Fire Points Default: Authority Levels 1, 2, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 3-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel User Configuration | en 157 This parameter allows the user with this authority level to initiate a Fire walk test for all 24 hour points in the area to which this keypad is assigned. When a Walk Test All Fire Points is initiated one person can typically test a fire system without assistance. The following features are provided with the Fire Test Mode: – During this test, the control panel is being powered by the battery only. A battery test is initiated during the full duration of the test to ensure the battery capacity is capable of supporting the full load of the control panel while AC is failed. – This test includes a two-second bell test (fire bell output) for each fire point that is tested. – The test ends once all points are tested or until the test times out in 20 minutes of no activity. – Local alarm annunciation without reporting to the central station receiver. – Automatic smoke detector reset [SENSORS RESETTING] for all fire points programmed with Resettable, page 193 as YES. – The keypad displays a sequential count after each point is activated and restored as well as the text for the point. – FIRE WALK START and FIRE WALK END are reported at the central station receiver for the beginning and end of the test. Fire Time, page 97 for fire points programmed with Alarm Verify, page 193 as Yes is ignored during the Fire walk test. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0). You cannot change any settings in the Authority Level 15 column. 24-Hour points left off-normal when exiting the Fire Test are bypassed. A trouble tone sounds until it is silenced. The keypads will alternate text with the Bypass indications. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Walk Test All Fire Points 9.4.14 Walk Test All Invisible Burg Points Default: Authority Levels 1, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 2-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This function allows a user with Invisible Walk Test authority to test invisible interior or perimeter controlled points that are within the scope of the keypad without sending a report to the central station. Invisible points must have the Invisible Point, page 187 parameter set to Yes. 24-Hour points left off-normal when exiting the Invisible Walk Test are bypassed. A trouble tone sounds until it is silenced. The keypads will alternate text with the Bypass indications. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Walk Test All Invisible Burg Point 9.4.15 Service Walk All Points Default: Authority Levels 1, 15: 1, Enabled (E) Authority Levels 2-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 158 en | User Configuration – Control Panel Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to initiate a service walk test for all 24 hour interior and perimeter controlled points in the control panel. Points are not included in this test if – points are in an area that is already in any walk test mode – points are assigned to an area that is not enabled (Area On), or – points are in an area that is All or Part On. When a Service Walk Test is initiated, one person can test all the points in the control panel without assistance. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. 24-Hour points left off-normal when exiting the Service Walk Test are bypassed. A trouble tone sounds until it is silenced. The keypads will alternate text with the Bypass indications. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Service Walk All Points 9.4.16 Send Report (Test / Status) Default: Authority Levels 1, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 2-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to send a test report from any keypad assigned to an area where the user has authority. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Send Report (Test/Report) 9.4.17 Cycle Door Default: Authority Levels 1, 2, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 3-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to cycle a door from any keypad assigned to an area where the user has authority. Press the keypad number keys [1 through 8] that correspond to the door number to cycle doors. For example, pressing the 2 and the ENTER keys cycles door number 2, which is indicated by "C" in the display. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Cycle Door 9.4.18 (Un)Lock door Default: Authority Levels 1, 2, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 3-14: Blank (-) 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel User Configuration | en 159 Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. Press the keypad number keys [1 through 8] that correspond to the door number to unlock/ relock doors. For example, pressing the 2 and the ENTER keys unlocks door number 2, which is indicated by "U" in the display. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0). You cannot change any settings in the Authority Level 15 column. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > (Un)Lock Door 9.4.19 Secure Door Default: Authority Levels 1, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 2-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to secure a door from any keypad assigned to an area where the user has authority. Press the keypad number keys [1 through 8] that correspond to the door number to secure/ unsecure doors. For example, pressing the 2 and the ENTER keys secures door number 2, which is indicated by an "X" in the display. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0). You cannot change any settings in the Authority Level 15 column. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Secure Door 9.4.20 Change Keypad Display Default: Authority Levels 1, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 2-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to change the display (bright display, dim display) in the area to which this keypad is assigned. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Change Keypad Display 9.4.21 Change Date and Time Default: Authority Levels 1, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 2-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 160 en | User Configuration Control Panel This parameter allows the user with this authority level to change and display the date and time for the control panel in this area. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Change Date and Time 9.4.22 Change Passcodes Default: Authority Levels 1, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 2-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to change a user passcode. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Change Passcode 9.4.23 Add User Passcodes / Card / Level Default: Authority Levels 1, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 2-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to add/change users. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Add User Passcode/Card/Level 9.4.24 Delete User Passcode / Card/ Level Default: Authority Levels 1, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 2-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this L## to delete users. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Delete User passcode/card/level 9.4.25 Extend Close Default: Service Walk Authority Levels 1, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 2-14: Blank (-) Selections: – 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel User Configuration | en 161 – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to change the closing time in the area where the function is entered. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Extend Close 9.4.26 View Event Log Default: Authority Levels 1, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 2-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to view all control panel wide events in the control panel's memory log. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > View Event Log 9.4.27 User Command 7 Default: Authority Levels 1: Enabled (E) Authority Level All others: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. Allow a user with this authority level to report User Command 7 reports if the area to which this authority level is assigned sends User Command 7 reports. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > User Command 7 9.4.28 User Command 9 Default: Authority Levels 1: Enabled (E) Authority Level All others: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. Allow a user with this authority level to report User Command 9 reports if the area to which this authority level is assigned sends User Command 9 reports. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > User Command 9 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 162 en | User Configuration 9.4.29 Control Panel Bypass a Point Default: Authority Levels 1-4, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 5-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to bypass points. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Bypass a Point 9.4.30 Unbypass a Point Default: Authority Levels 1-4, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 5-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to unbypass points. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Unbypass a Point 9.4.31 Reset Sensor(s) Default: Authority Levels 1-4, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 5-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to reset sensors. Notice! To comply with UL 864 requirements for Commercial Fire Systems, program this parameter with a relay. Authority level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Reset Sensors 9.4.32 Change Output(s) Default: Authority Levels 1, 2, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 3-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel User Configuration | en 163 This parameter allows the user with this authority level to set OUTPUT ON and reset OUTPUT OFF outputs in the control panel. Do not use the CHANGE OUTPUTS function to toggle outputs reserved for special functions. Special function outputs are Area and Panel Wide output functions as well as outputs assigned to Enter Key Output, page 110. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Change Outputs 9.4.33 Remote Program Default: Authority Levels 1-4, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 5-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to initiate an RPS session when the phone rings at the control panel. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Remote Programming 9.4.34 Go to Area Default: Authority Levels 1, 2, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 3-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to temporarily switch to a different area and perform keypad functions related to the area to which the keypad is switched. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Go to Area 9.4.35 Display Panel Type and Revision Default: Authority Levels 1, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 2-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to display the control panel firmware revision. All keypads will display the firmware revision as a Major.Minor.Micro value with the following format ##.##.###. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Display Panel Type and Revision Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 164 en | User Configuration 9.4.36 Control Panel Change Skeds Default: Authority Levels 1, 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 2-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter allows the user with this authority level to change skeds that can be edited. Skeds can be restricted from being edited by setting Time Edit, page 210 to No. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Change Skeds 9.4.37 Custom Function Default: Authority Level 1: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 2-15: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. Allow the user with this authority level to execute the desired Custom Function. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. Notice! The user authority to execute a Custom Function automatically grants the user authority to execute all commands within the programmed Custom Function. If a user does not have authority to do a specific command through the keypad menu, then it does not prohibit them from using the same command through a Custom Function. RPS Menu Location B9512: User Configuration > Authority Levels > Custom Function 128 (to 159) B8512: User Configuration > Authority Levels > Custom Function 128 (to 135) B6512: User Configuration > Authority Levels > Custom Function 128 (to 133) B5512: User Configuration > Authority Levels > Custom Function 128 (to 131) B4512: User Configuration > Authority Levels > Custom Function 128 (and 129) B3512: User Configuration > Authority Levels > Custom Function 128 9.4.38 Force Arm Default: Authority Levels 1-6: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 7-15: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. Allow a user with this authority level to force arm the control panel. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Force Arm 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel 9.4.39 User Configuration | en 165 Send Area Open/Close Default: Authority Level 1-14: Enabled (E) Authority Level 15: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. Allow a user with this authority level to generate opening and closing reports if the area to which this authority level is assigned sends opening and closing reports. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Send Area Opening/Closings 9.4.40 Restricted Open/Close Default: Blank (-) for all authority levels Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. Allow a user with this authority level to initiate an opening report if a bell is ringing or a closing report when force/bypass arming. The area to which this authoritylevel is assigned must be programmed for restricted openings and closings (Refer to Restricted O/C, page 103). Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Restricted Open/Close 9.4.41 Part On Open/Close Default: Authority Levels 1 - 14: Enabled (E) Authority Level 15: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. Allow a user with this authority level to report Part On opening and closing reports if the area to which this authority level is assigned sends Part On opening and closing reports. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Part On Open/Close 9.4.42 Send Duress Default: Authority Level 14: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 1-13, 15: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. Allow a user with this authority level to send duress report if the area to which this authority level is assigned sends duress. Refer to Duress Enable for more information. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 166 en | User Configuration Control Panel Configure the Duress Enable parameter to Yes in applicable areas, or the keypad will respond with No Authority. Duress Disarm Profile User Authority Level 14 is programmed by default as a Duress disarm profile. When Duress Type is set to 3, the SIA CP-01 compliant Duress Passcode feature is enabled. Duress Types 1 and 2 are not allowed in SIA CP-01 compliant installations. With Authority Level 14 assigned to a user passcode in an area, that user has the authority to disarm and send a Duress event from that area. All Duress-capable passcodes must be unique and cannot be derived from other passcodes. To facilitate this uniqueness, User Authority Level 14 is pre-programmed from the factory as an example of Duress Disarm authority. A Duress Disarm user authority level requires the following functions to be enabled: – Disarm Select, page 153 – Send Duress, page 165 – Disarm by Passcode, page 166 RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Send Duress 9.4.43 Arm by Passcode Default: Authority Levels 1-6: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 7-15: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. Allow a user with this authority level to arm an area by entering their passcode, then pressing the [ENTER] key. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Arm by Passcode 9.4.44 Disarm by Passcode Default: Authority Levels 1-5, 14: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 6-13, 15: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. Allow a user with this authority level to disarm an area by entering their passcode, then pressing the [ENTER] key. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. Configure the Duress Enable parameter to Yes in applicable areas, or the keypad will respond with No Authority. Duress Disarm Profile User Authority Level 14 is programmed by default as a Duress disarm profile. When Duress Type is set to 3, the SIA CP-01 compliant Duress Passcode feature is enabled. Duress Types 1 and 2 are not allowed in SIA CP-01 compliant installations. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel User Configuration | en 167 With Authority Level 14 assigned to a user passcode in an area, that user has the authority to disarm and send a Duress event from that area. All Duress-capable passcodes must be unique and cannot be derived from other passcodes. To facilitate this uniqueness, User Authority Level 14 is pre-programmed from the factory as an example of Duress Disarm authority. A Duress Disarm user authority level requires the following functions to be enabled: – Disarm Select, page 153 – Send Duress, page 165 – Disarm by Passcode, page 166 RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Disarm by Passcode 9.4.45 Security Level Default: Authority Levels 1, 2: All On (A) Authority Levels 3-5: Part On (P) Authority Level 6: Disarmed (D) Authority Levels 7-15: No Access (-) Selections: – All On (A): Users have access rights for this area when the area in any armed state. – Part On (P): Users have access rights for this area when the area is Part On or disarmed, but not when the area is all on Armed. – Disarmed (D): Users have access rights for this area only when it is disarmed. – No Access (-): Users do not have access rights to this area. When the user presents a token/card at the reader, access is granted only when the user has the authority to enter the area under certain armed conditions. Notice! Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0). You cannot change any settings in the Authority Level 15 column. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Security Level 9.4.46 Disarm Level Default: Authority Levels 1-5: Disarm (D) Authority Levels 6-15: No Disarm Rights (-) Selections: – All or Part On to Part On Instant (I): Users change the All On state and Part On state to [Part On INSTANT]. The armed state does not change in other areas, and the armed state does not change if the area is already in the Part On instant or disarmed state. User must have Access Level for All On (A) state. – Disarm (D): Users change the local area's All On state and Part On state to the disarm state. User must have Access Level for All On (A) or Part On (P) state. All areas within the scope of the keypad assigned to the KP# Scope in the Access handler and areas to which the user has disarm rights disarm as programmed. – No Disarm Rights (-): Users do not have disarm rights in this area. When the user presents a card door reader, the panel checks the Access Level and enables area disarm functions as programmed. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 168 en | User Configuration Control Panel Opening and Closing reports are sent to the central station receiver if programmed. For more information on programming this prompt for a Shared area, see the Access Control Readers Assigned to the Shared Area paragraph for the Area Type, page 94 prompt in Area Parameters. Notice! Burglar bells silenced when user presents token/card Burglar bells are silenced in the local area when a user disarms with a token/card, or presents the token/card during an alarm. The user must use a passcode to silence a fire bell. Cancel reports are sent after a valid passcode or token/card has silenced the bell. Notice! Authority Level 15 reserved Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0). You cannot change any settings in the Authority Level 15 column. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Disarm Level 9.4.47 Function Level Default: Authority Level 1: Disarmed (D) Authority Levels 2-15: No Function Level (-) Selections: – All On (A): Activate the custom function assigned to the door in this area when the area is All On or Part On. – Disarmed (D): Activate the custom function assigned to the door in this area when the area is disarmed. – All On and Disarmed (C): Users can activate the custom function assigned to the door in this area regardless of the area's arming state. – No Function Level (-): Users cannot activate a custom function in this area. Notice! When a token or card can also disarm an area, the custom function starts after the area disarms. Notice! A user does not require Security Level or Disarm Level authority to activate a custom function with a token or card. Notice! Tokens or cards that are used to execute custom functions must have a passcode assigned to the corresponding user. Notice! Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0). You cannot change any settings in the Authority Level 15 column. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel User Configuration | en 169 RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Function Level 9.4.48 Keyfob Arm Default: Authority Levels 1-6: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 7-15: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. Allow a user with this authority level to arm an area by using their assigned RADION wireless keyfob. Notice! Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0). Since the installer is not allowed a keyfob, authority level 15 shall always be disabled (-). Duress operation when disarming is not applicable when using RADION wireless keyfobs. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Keyfob Arm 9.4.49 Keyfob Disarm Default: Authority Levels 1-6: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 7-15: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. Allow a user with this authority level to disarm an area by using their assigned RADION wireless keyfob. Notice! Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0). Since the installer is not allowed a keyfob, authority level 15 shall always be disabled (-). Duress operation when disarming is not applicable when using RADION wireless keyfobs. RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Keyfob Disarm 9.4.50 Firmware Update Default: Authority Levels 1 - 6: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 7 - 15: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. When local authorization is required, only a security user with the Firmware Update authority enabled can authorize the update. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0) and cannot be changed. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 170 en | User Configuration Control Panel RPS Menu Location User Configuration > Authority Levels > Firmware Update 9.4.51 Silence Function Default: Authority Levels 1 and 15: Enabled (E) Authority Levels 2-14: Blank (-) Selections: – Blank (-): This function is not authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. – Enabled (E): This function is authorized for the user who is assigned this authority level. This parameter controls authority to silence trouble tones at the keypads. Authority Level 15 is reserved for the Service Passcode (User 0). You cannot change any settings in the Authority Level 15 column. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Points | en 171 10 Points 10.1 Point Assignments 10.1.1 Source Default: – Points 1-8 On-board – All Other Points Unassigned Selections: – Unassigned - point is not in use. – Octo-input - point is installed on an SDI2 bus input module. – Keypad - point is installed on a keypad. – Wireless - point is installed on an SDI2 bus RF receiver. – On-board - point is installed on the control panel. – Output - logical connection to the output of the same number. Not installed on a physical device. – IP Camera - point is installed on an IP Camera. – Door - point is installed on a door module. Use this parameter to assign a point to a physical device. Point Source indicates where specific point devices are allowed to be configured, and what point ranges are allowed. When a selection is grayed out, you cannot use that option to configure the point. When the Point Source is set to Wireless, Output, or IP Camera, Debounce does not apply. RPS automatically selects a dash (-) for Debounce, which indicates that Debounce is not applicable. Notice! Point Source for points 1-8 is fixed as On-board and cannot be changed. To expand or collapse the list of Point numbers, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Assignments > Source 10.1.2 Text Default: Point # Selections: Up to 32 characters. This parameter sets what is displayed at keypads and what is reported to the central station receiver when transmitting in Modem4 format (if it is a reporting point). Enter up to 32 characters of text, numbers and symbols to describe the point. Keypads display the first 20 characters. If more than 20 characters are used, the text scrolls across the display one time. To scroll the text again, press [ESC]. Spaces before, after and within a string of text are treated as text and are included in the 32 character limit. Notice! Include the point number in point text Including the point number in the point text helps users when viewing events, initiating bypasses, etc. and can simplify troubleshooting. To expand or collapse the list of Point numbers, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 172 en | Points Control Panel RPS Menu Location Points > Point Assignments > Text 10.1.3 2nd Language Text Default: blank Selections: Up to 32 characters. This parameter sets what is displayed at keypads and what is reported to the central station receiver when transmitting in Modem4 format (if it is a reporting point). Enter up to 32 characters of text, numbers and symbols to describe the point. Keypads display the first 20 characters. If more than 20 characters are used, the text scrolls across the display one time. To scroll the text again, press [ESC]. Spaces before, after and within a string of text are treated as text and are included in the 32 character limit. Notice! Include the point number in custom point text. This helps the user when viewing events, initiating bypasses, etc. and can simplify troubleshooting. To expand or collapse the list of Point numbers, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Assignments > 2nd Language Text 10.1.4 Profile (Index) Default: – Point 1: 4 – Point 2: 8 – Point 3: 8 – Point 4: 13 – Point 5: 13 – Point 6: 7 – Point 7: 7 – Point 8: 1 – All others: 0 This parameter selects one of several point indexes (point profiles) that define the points' characteristics and determine how the control panel responds to various point events. 0 (zero) disables the point. MISSING POINT reports occur if a point address does not exists for a point that is assigned a point index. EXTRA POINT events occur if more than two devices have the same address. EXTRA POINT events also occur if a device is addressed but has no programming (Point Index = 0). NOTE: To expand or collapse the list of Point numbers, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Assignments > Index 10.1.5 Profile (Index) Description Default: – Point 1: Smoke Detector – Point 2: Part On: Delay – Point 3: Part On: Delay 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Points | en 173 – Point 4: Interior: Follower – Point 5: Interior: Follower – Point 6: Part On: Instant – Point 7: Part On: Instant – Point 8: 24-Hour Instant Open/Short Selections: No selections – this field cannot be edited by the user This field displays a description of the point index that is entered in the Index field. It is a reference field only and the information displayed in it is not sent to the control panel. NOTE: To expand or collapse the list of Point numbers, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Assignments > Description 10.1.6 Area Default: 1 Selections: – B6512 - 1 to 6 Enter the area number you want to assign the point to. NOTE: To expand or collapse the list of Point numbers, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Assignments > Area 10.1.7 Debounce Default: 500 ms Selections: – 250 ms – 500 ms – 750 ms – 1.00 s – 1.25 s – 1.50 s – 1.75 s – 2.00 s … to … – 6.00 s The Debounce parameter sets the length of time the control panel scans a point before initiating an alarm. Consult the manufacturer's instructions for the device connected to the point if you are unsure of how to set this parameter. Bosch recommends an entry of 500 ms or higher. For Interior Follower points set Debounce to at least 750 ms seconds. Debounce does not apply when the point Source, page 171 is set to Wireless, IP Camera, or Output. RPS automatically selects a dash (-) for Debounce, which indicates that Debounce is not applicable. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Assignments > Debounce 10.1.8 Output Default: 0 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 174 en | Points Control Panel Selections: – B6512: 0 to 96 Use this parameter to activate an output when the point goes into alarm. The output does not activate for Trouble or Supervisory events. The output resets when the originating point restores and the corresponding alarm restoration event is generated. Notice! Legacy BFSK Relay or Relay functionality The point assignment parameters for many legacy Bosch control panels include a BFSK Relay or Relay parameter for each point. You can easily emulate BFSK Relay functionality by setting this new Output parameter to the same output number for multiple points. You can use any output number for any number of points. NOTE: To expand or collapse the list of Point numbers, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Assignments > Output 10.1.9 RADION RFID (B810) Default: - blank Selections: 0, 11 - 167772156 A point Radio Frequency device Identification number (RFID) can be Auto-Learned through the SDI2 bus RF receiver, or it can be entered here. Auto-Learned RFID's can be edited for point replacement, or can be set to 0 to disable a RF point. An RFID is a unique number assigned to a wireless device at the factory. It provides a unique way for the wireless receiver and wireless repeaters to identify what device is transmitting. If an SDI2 communication device is allocated for automation communication, then it cannot be used for central station or RPS communication. When the Point Source is configured to Wireless, then the RFID is set to 0. Notice! If the configuration option, Wireless Module Type, page 244, is set to B810 RADION Wireless, the control panel is limited to 1512 wireless devices (1000 keyfobs, 504 points, and 8 repeaters). Wireless is only a valid option if the number of points with Point Source set to Wireless does not exceed 504, plus the number of users assigned a valid keyfob RFID does not exceed 1000, and the number of repeaters does not exceed 8. Note, Point Source is used instead of RFID as the installer might have assigned several points to wireless without adding any RFIDs. NOTE: To expand or collapse the list of Point numbers, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Assignments > RADION RFID (B810) 10.1.10 RADION Device Type Default: Blank Selections: – Glass Break – Smoke 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Points | en 175 – Inertia – Door Window Contact – Recessed Door Window – Motion Dual – Motion PIR – Ceiling Mt.Motion – Universal TX – Bill Trap – Curtain Motion – CO Detector – Panic, One Button – Panic, Two Button This parameter allows point source options to be set to wireless. If the wireless module type is set to B810 Wireless Device, there is no limit on how many Point Source options can be set to wireless. (Note: Even with keyfob supervision enabled, the wireless device should support 1800 devices.) Each wireless device contains corresponding input functions. Enable or disable input functions by clicking the corresponding checkbox in the dialog box. Device type Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Glass break Glass break Not used Not used Not used alarm Smoke Smoke alarm Not used Not used Not used Inertia Reed alarm Loop input Vibration alarm Not used Door window Reed alarm Not used Not used Not used Reed alarm Not used Not used Not used Motion dual Motion alarm Not used Not used Not used Motion PIR PIR alarm Not used Not used Not used Ceiling mount Motion alarm Not used Not used Not used Universal TX Reed alarm Loop input Not used Not used Bill trap Bill trap alarm Not used Not used Not used Curtain motion PIR alarm Not used Not used Not used CO detector CO alarm Not used Not used Not used Panic, one Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used contact Recessed door window motion button Panic, two button Each point device must have at least one valid input function selected. RPS will reset this field to the default value when the wireless device type is changed. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 176 en | Points Control Panel NOTE: To expand or collapse the list of Point numbers, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Assignments > RADION Device Type 10.1.11 Inovonics RFID (B820) Default: N/A Selections: 0 - 167772156 A point RFID can be Auto-Learned through the SDI2 bus RF receiver, or it can be entered here. Auto-Learned RFIDs can be edited for point replacement, or can be set to 0 to disable a RF point. An RFID (Radio Frequency device Identification number) is a unique number assigned to a wireless device at the factory. It provides a unique way for the Wireless Receiver and Wireless Repeaters to identify what device is transmitting. If the configuration option, Wireless Module Type, page 244, is set to B820 Inovonics Wireless, the control panel is limited to 350 wireless devices not including repeaters. Wireless is only a valid option if the number of points with point Source, page 171set to Wireless plus the number of users assigned a valid key fob RF ID is less than 350. Both the control panel and RPS enforce this restriction. Note, point Source is used instead of RF ID as the installer might have assigned several points to wireless without adding any RF IDs. When the point Source is configured to Wireless then the RFID will be set to 0. If an SDI2 communication device is allocated for automation communication, then it cannot be used for central station nor for RPS communication. NOTE: To expand or collapse the list of Point numbers, use the arrows at the top of the RPS screen. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Assignments > RFID (B820 Inovonics Wireless) 10.2 Cross Point Parameters 10.2.1 Cross Point Timer Default: 20 Selections: 5-255 (seconds) The Cross Point Time is the duration of the cross point window or the amount of time the control panel waits for a second point within the same cross point group to fault before generating an Cross Zone Alarm event. If a second point is not faulted within the Cross Point Time, then a Burglar Alarm event is generated. Only use the Cross Point function on non-fire points. Notice! Cross points must be overlapped so that each individual cross point can protect the area individually RPS Menu Location Points > Cross Point Parameters > Cross Point Timer 10.3 Point Profiles Point profiles (point indexes) determine how the control panel responds to changes on points. To build point profiles, use the parameters in this section. Assign Point Profiles to points in Point Assignments. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel 10.3.1 Points | en 177 Point Profile Text (First Language) Default: Refer to table below Selections: Up to 24 alphanumeric characters Enter up to 24 characters of text to describe the point profile (point index). Point Profile # Point Profile text 1 24-Hour Instant Open/Short 2 24-Hour Invisible/Silent on Short 3 Pull Station 4 Smoke Detector 5 Smoke Detector with Verification 6 Bell Supervision - D192G 7 Part On: instant 8 Part On: Delay 9 Part On: Instant, Local Disarmed, Buzz 10 Interior: Instant 11 Interior: Delay 12 Interior: Instant Local Disarmed 13 Interior: Follower 14 Maintained Keyswitch 15 Momenary Keyswitch 16 Point Opening/Closing on Fault 17 Gas 18 Gas Supervisory 19 Aux AC Supervision 20 Part On: Watch Off RPS Menu Location Points > Point Profiles > Point Profile Text 10.3.2 Point Profile Text (Second Language) Default: Blank Selections: Up to 24 alphanumeric characters Enter up to 24 characters of text to describe the point profile (point index). This is for informational purposes only and is not programmed in the control panel. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Profiles > Point Profile Text (second language) Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 178 en | Points 10.3.3 Control Panel Point Response overview Applications for Point Responses 9, D, and E You can combine Point Responses 9, D and E with perimeter Point Types to create more flexible 24-hour protection. Unlike 24-hour points, a faulted perimeter point with a point Response of D and E displays at the keypad when arming. Like a 24-hour point, a point programmed this way can generate alarms whether the area is armed or disarmed. Combining Point Response 9 with the Local While Disarmed feature provides off-site reporting when the area is armed, but only local alarm annunciation when the area is disarmed. Combining Point Response 9 with the Local While Armed feature provides off-site reporting when the area is disarmed, but only local alarm annunciation when the area is armed. Point Response E Use this for Asic motion detectors. This allows troubles to report while the control panel is all on. Point Response F will not sound local keypads but will activate Output Response Type and keypad faults. To annunciate the off-normal state at a keypad, set Display as Device to Yes and/or Buzz On Fault as 1 or 2. This point response does not generate alarms or activate alarm output. Point Response 8, 9, A, B, and C provide supervisory (24 hour) reporting. Fire Point Characteristics 1. Reporting: Fire reports are the first events that the control panel sends when a group of events occur. 2. Visual Annunciation: Fire Troubles continue to scroll until the trouble is cleared. Once acknowledged, a FIRE TROUBLE scroll lets the end user know that a fire point, or group of Fire points, is still in trouble. Panel Wide Outputs Summary Fire and Summary Fire Trouble activate if a output is assigned when any fire point goes into alarm or is in trouble. 3. Audible Annunciation: A Fire point activates the Fire Bell. The amount of time and pattern of the output activation is programmed by area in Fire Time and Fire Pattern. 4. Supervisory: A Fire point can send a FIRE SUPERVISORY report and activate the Summary Supervisory Fire and Summary Fire Trouble panel wide outputs with a Point Response of 8, 9, A, B, C. 5. Alarm Verification: A Fire point can delay an alarm by the time programmed in Restart Time in the Area parameters. Combined with Resettable, a fire point also resets the electrical circuit for the amount of Restart Time. 6. Reset Sensor: A fire device that requires resetting can be manually reset using the reset sensor output for the area it is assigned to. 7. Fire Walk: Use the Fire Walk function to test fire points in the system. To provide an audible tone for a Fire Supervisory point that has been restored, use Output Response Type and connect to a graphic annunciator. You should dedicate a Fire annunciation device to all your fire points if they are assigned to a single area in a multiple area system. 10.3.4 Point Type Point Response, page 179 Circuit Style, page 196 Default: – Point Indexes 1 to 2, 6, 23, 31: 24 Hour – Point Indexes 3 to 5, 22: Fire Point – Point Indexes 7-9, 20, 21, 24-27: Part On – Point Index 10-12, 29-30: Interior 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Points | en 179 – Point Index 13, 28: Interior Follower – Point Index 14: Keyswitch Maintained – Point Index 15: Keyswitch Momentary – Point Index 16: Open/Close Point – Point Index 17, 18: Gas Point – Point Index 19: AUX AC Supervision Selections: (click the links below for a description of each point index) – 24-Hour, page 197 – Part On, page 197 – Interior, page 198 – Interior Follower, page 199 – Keyswitch Maintained, page 199 – Keyswith Momentary, page 199 – Open / Close Point, page 200 – Fire Point, page 200 – Aux AC Supervision, page 200 – Gas Point, page 200 – Custom Function, page 200 This parameter defines the point type. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Point Type / Response / Circuit Style 10.3.5 Point Response Default: Point Profile Point Response Default 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 0 1 1 1 1 9 0 8 9 0 Point Profile Point Response Default 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 8 9 8 1 1 1 1 9 0 0 Selections: 0 – 9, A – F The combined Point Type / Response / Circuit Style parameter allows you to configure all three parameters in a single window. Figure 10.1: Point type-response-circuit style window Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 180 en | Points Control Panel The Point Response parameter in combination with the Point Type parameter determines how the control panel responds to changes on point sensor loops (open, short, normal) for wired points, or changes in point states for wireless point devices (fault, normal, trouble). The tables below show the Point Response selections for: – 24 Hour, Fire, Gas, and AUX AC Supervision – Controlled point types – Part On, Interior, and Interior Follower – Keyswitch Maintained – Keyswitch Momentary – Open/Close Point – Custom Function Notice! Changing Point Type automatically changes Point Response to default Selecting a Point Type automatically changes the Point Response to the default for that Point Type. 24 Hour, Fire, Gas, and AUX AC Point Types, Single EOL Circuit Style, Point Response Selections Armed Circuit State State 0 1 2 3 Armed Open I T I T Armed Short I I T T Disarmed Open I T I T Disarmed Short I I T T 4 I 5 6 7 8 9 A I T S T S T S S T T S T I I T T B C D E F S S S S S S S Key: I = instant alarm, S = supervisory alarm, T = trouble, blank = no response Example: Point Type = 24-hour and Point Response = 8. 24-hour point with supervisory response when open and a trouble response when shorted. 24 Hour, Fire, and Gas Point Types, Dual EOL Circuit Style, Point Response Selections Armed Circuit State State 0 1 2 3 Armed Open/ T I T I 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Short Armed Fault I I S S Disarmed Open/ T I T I I I S S Short Disarmed Fault Key: I = instant alarm, S = supervisory alarm, T = trouble, blank = no response Example: Point Type = 24-hour and Point Response = 2. 24-hour point with supervisory response for fault and a trouble response for open or short. Notice! For Dual EOL Circuit Style, purchase second 1kΩ EOL separately Order ICP-1K22AWG-10, package of 10 resistors. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Points | en 181 Notice! Control panel and B208 Octo-input firmware requirements for Dual EOL To use the Dual EOL Circuit style, verify the control panel firmware is v3.01 or greater. If you are using a B208 Octo-input Module, verify the module firmware is v2.1.1 or greater. 24 Hour, Fire, and Gas Point Types, No EOL Circuit Style, Point Response Selections Armed Circuit State State 0 1 2 Armed Fault I T S Disarmed Fault I T S 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Key: I = instant alarm, S = supervisory alarm, T = trouble, blank = no response Example: Point Type = 24-hour and Point Response = 2. 24-hour point with supervisory response for fault and a trouble response for open or short. Controlled Point Types, Single EOL Circuit Style, Point Response Selections Armed Circuit State State 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E Armed Open I I I I D D I I D I I I I I T Armed Short I I I I I I D D D I I I I I I Disarmed Open I I T I Disarmed Short I T I T T T T T T F T I Key: I = instant alarm, D = delayed alarm, T = trouble, blank = no response Example: Point Type = Part On and Point Response = 8. Perimeter point with delayed alarm response when armed (opened or shorted) and no response when disarmed. Controlled Point Types, Dual EOL Circuit Style, Point Response Selections Armed Circuit State State 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Armed Open/ I I I I I I I I 8 9 A B C D E F Short Armed Fault I D I D I D I D Disarmed Open/ T T I I T T I I T T T T Short Disarmed Fault Key: I = instant alarm, D = delayed alarm, T = trouble, blank = no response Example: Point Type = Part On and Point Response = 1. When the area is on (armed), a fault on the point circuit creates a delayed alarm response. An open or short on the point circuit creates an instant alarm. When the area is off (disarmed), an open or short on the point circuit creates a point trouble. There is no response for a fault on the point circuit. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 182 en | Points Control Panel Notice! For Dual EOL Circuit Style, purchase second 1kΩ EOL separately Order ICP-1K22AWG-10, package of 10 resistors. Notice! Control panel and B208 Octo-input firmware requirements for Dual EOL To use the Dual EOL Circuit style, verify the control panel firmware is v3.01 or greater. If you are using a B208 Octo-input Module, verify the module firmware is v2.1.1 or greater. Controlled Point Types, No EOL Circuit Style, Point Response Selections Armed Circuit State State 0 1 2 3 4 Armed Fault I I D D T Disarmed Fault T T T 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Key: I = instant alarm, D = delayed alarm, T = trouble, blank = no response Example: Point Type = Part On and Point Response = 2. When the area is on (armed), a fault on the point circuit creates a delayed alarm response. When the area is off (disarmed), there is no response for a fault on the point circuit. Keyswitch Maintained Point Type, Point Response Selections Armed Circuit State State Armed Open Armed Short I Disarmed Open A Disarmed Short T 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F D I T Key: A = transition from normal to open changes arming state to armed, D = transition from normal to open changes arming state to disarmed, I = instant alarm, T = trouble, blank = no response When the point response is set to 1 and the point circuit is normal, the area is off (armed state is disarmed). Changing the point circuit state from normal to open turns the area on (armed state is armed). Changing the point circuit state from open to normal turns the area off (armed state is disarmed). When the point response is set to 2 and the point circuit is normal, the area is on (armed state is armed). Changing the point circuit state from normal to open turns the area off (armed state is disarmarmed). Changing the point circuit state from open to normal turns the area on (armed state is armed). A short on the point circuit creates a point trouble while the area is off (disarmed). A short on the point circuit while the area is on (armed) creates an instant alarm. When the point circuit returns to normal or open the trouble restores. Keyswitch Momentary Point Type, Point Response Selections Armed Circuit State State Armed Open 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F I Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Points | en 183 Keyswitch Momentary Point Type, Point Response Selections Armed Circuit State State Armed Short D Disarmed Open T Disarmed Short A 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Key: A = transition from normal to short to normal changes arming state to armed, D = transition from normal to short to normal changes arming state to disarmed, I = instant alarm, T = trouble, blank = no response The point response is fixed to 1 for the Keyswitch Momentary Point type. Changing the point circuit state from normal to short to normal, toggles the armed state of the area. If the area is on (armed) it is turned off (disarmed). If the area is off (disarmed) it is turned on (armed). An open on the point circuit creates a point trouble while the area is off (disarmed). An open on the point circuit while the area is on (armed) creates an instant alarm. When the point circuit returns from open to normal the trouble restores. Open/Close Point Type, Point Response Selections Armed Circuit State State Armed Open I Armed Short D Disarmed Open T Disarmed Short D 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F Key: D = transition from normal to short changes point arming state to disarmed (point arming state is armed when point circuit state is normal), I = instant alarm, T = trouble, blank = no response The point response is fixed to 1 for the Open/Close Point type. Changing the point circuit state to normal arms the point. The control panel sends a point closing report. Changing the circuit state from normal to open creates an instant point alarm. Changing the point circuit state to short disarms the point. The control panel sends a point closing report. Changing the circuit state from short to open creates a point trouble. Custom Function Point Type, Single EOL Circuit Style, Point Response Selections Armed Circuit State State Armed Open Armed Short Disarmed Open Disarmed Short 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CF CF T CF CF CF T CF T CF CF CF T CF CF CF CF T CF CF CF T CF CF A CF B C D E CF CF T CF CF CF T F Key: CF = control panel executes custom function on transition to circuit state. T = trouble, blank = no response When the point circuit state changes the control panel responds by activating a custom function. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 184 en | Points Control Panel Custom Function Point Type, Dual EOL Circuit Style, Point Response Selections Armed Circuit State State Armed Open/ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E T T T T T T T T T T CF CF CF CF CF CF CF CF CF T T T T T T T T T T T CF CF CF T CF CF CF CF CF T F Short Armed Fault Disarmed Open/ T CF CF Short Disarmed Fault CF T CF Key: CF = control panel executes custom function on transition to circuit state. T = trouble, blank = no response When the point circuit state changes the control panel responds by activating a custom function. Notice! For Dual EOL Circuit Style, purchase second 1kΩ EOL separately Order ICP-1K22AWG-10, package of 10 resistors. Notice! Control panel and B208 Octo-input firmware requirements for Dual EOL To use the Dual EOL Circuit style, verify the control panel firmware is v3.01 or greater. If you are using a B208 Octo-input Module, verify the module firmware is v2.1.1 or greater. Custom Function Point Type, No EOL Circuit Style, Point Response Selections Armed Circuit State State Armed Disarmed 0 1 2 Fault T CF Fault CF T 3 CF 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F CF CF CF CF CF CF CF CF CF CF T B CF CF CF CF CF CF CF CF CF T B Key: CF = control panel executes custom function on transition to circuit state. T = trouble, blank = no response When the point circuit state changes the control panel responds by activating a custom function. Point Response for B820 SDI2 Inovonics Interface Module When point Source is set to Wireless and a B820 SDI2 Inovonics Interface Module is used, wireless points: – send Short for point fault (regardless of sensor loop open/short state) – send Open for a tamper event (enclosure cover removed) Point Response for B810 RADION receiver SD When point Source is set to wireless and a B810 RADION receiver SD module is used, wireless points: – send Open or Short for point fault (the electrical state of the sensor loop) – send Short for the reed switch (magnet not present) – send Tamper for a tamper event (enclosure cover removed) RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Point Type / Response / Circuit Style 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Points | en 185 Further information Point Type, page 178 Circuit Style, page 196 10.3.6 Entry Delay Default: 30 seconds Selections: 5 - 600 seconds (5-second increments) This parameter sets the amount of entry delay time that a user has after faulting a controlled point (Part On, Interior or Interior Follower) with a delayed response (D) (Point Response, page 179) of 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8. Notice! To comply with UL standards, the total amount of time entered in Entry Delay and Alarm Abort, page 194 must not exceed 1 minute. Notice! To comply with SIA CP-01 False Alarm Reduction, set this parameter between 30 and 240 seconds for all point indexes. Refer to SIA CP-01 Verification for more information. On the keypad's display, DISARM NOW appears for the duration of the time programmed when the point is faulted in the delay event. The keypad display alternates between DISARM NOW and the point text of the point that caused the area to enter into Entry Delay. If this time is allowed to expire before disarming or if the point is faulted to an instant response (I) an alarm occurs. Make entries in five-second increments. The programmer does not allow off-increment entries. Disarm by Passcode, page 166 activates when the last digit of the passcode is pressed. The [ENTER] key is allowed, but not required, when entering a passcode during Entry Delay. If a subsequent perimeter or interior follower delay point trips while the area is already in entry delay, the control panel adjusts the delay time to the delay point with the least amount of delay time. When a user enters an area, a perimeter point is faulted and Entry Delay starts. If an interior point must fault during Entry Delay to allow the user to disarm the area at a keypad, program Point Type, page 178 as Interior Follower. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Entry Delay 10.3.7 Entry Tone Off Default: No (for all Point Indexes) Selections: – Yes. Disable entry delay tone when this point is faulted to the delay response. – No. A tone sounds at keypads when this point initiates entry delay. This parameter enables/disables the entry delay warning tone for this point. Do not set this parameter to No on points used to notify the user to disarm the system. The possibility of false alarms increases if the entry delay warning is not used. Entry Tone can also be turned off when programming your Entry Tone, page 113 in the keypad section which allows you to manage the tone by keypad. You might want to disable the entry tone in high security applications where you do not want to annunciate entry delay. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 186 en | Points Control Panel RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Entry Tone Off 10.3.8 Silent Bell Default: – Point Index 2: Yes – All other Point Indexes: No Selections: – Yes Activate the Silent Alarm, page 132 output when this point goes into alarm; Do not activate the Alarm Bell output or keypad alarm sounders. This setting only applies to nonfire/gas points. – No Activate the Fire Bell, page 129, Gas Bell, page 133 or Alarm Bell, page 129 output and sound the alarm tone at keypads when this point goes into alarm. If this is a fire point, it activates the Fire Bell. If this is a gas point, it activates the Gas Bell, otherwise, it activates the Alarm Bell. The amount of time and pattern of the output activation is programmed by area. This parameter determines whether the bell and keypad sounders activate upon an alarm event for non-fire/gas points. Fire and Gas points ignore this parameter setting and always activate the bell and sound the alarm tone at keypads when this point goes into alarm. If you want this point to eventually ring the bell because the message failed to reach the central station receiver, set Audible After Two Fails, page 186 to Yes. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Silent Bell 10.3.9 Ring Until Restored Default: No (for all Point Indexes) Selections: Yes/No – Yes Fire or Gas Bell output and keypad sounders for this point cannot be deactivated, from a keypad or upon bell time-out, until the point is restored to normal. – No Fire or Gas Bell output and keypad alarm sounders for this point can be deactivated, either from a keypad or upon bell time-out, whether or not the point has been restored to normal. Use this parameter for fire or gas applications to meet the requirement that audible alarms cannot be silenced until the fault event clears. If the point restores and the originating alarm is not silenced from the keypad, the alarm output continues until Fire Bell or Gas Bell time expires. If the point does not restore, the alarm output continues even after bell time expires. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Ring Until Restored 10.3.10 Audible After Two Fails Default: No (for all Point Indexes) Selections: – Yes For silent points, Alarm Bell, page 129 output activates after two failed attempts to send the report to the central station. – No Silent Bell, page 186 points do not cause the Alarm Bell output to activate even if the report does not get to the central station receiver. When set to Yes, if the report fails to reach the central station after two attempts, a silent alarm rings the alarm bell. A silent alarm is generated when a point with Silent Bell set to Yes is alarmed. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Points | en 187 When a point programmed for Silent Bell, page 186 is faulted, Burg Time, page 98 starts even though the bell is not yet ringing. It could take up to three minutes before the second attempt has failed. Because of this, ensure Burg Time is set to provide the amount of bell time you would like, minus the three minutes it might take before the bell actually begins to ring. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Audible After 2 Fails 10.3.11 Invisible Point Default: – Point Index 2: Yes – All other Point Indexes: No Selections: – Yes Keypads do not display alarm activity from this point. – No Activity from this point is visible at the keypads. This parameter determines whether the point appears in the keypad display upon an alarm event. Point text appears and annunciation is made for invisible points that are programmed for a trouble event in point response. To prevent the keypad alarm tone and the Alarm Bell, page 129 from sounding, this point must have Silent Bell, page 186 set to Yes. Note: Fire and Gas points always function as if this parameter is set to No. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Invisible Point 10.3.12 Buzz on Fault Default: – Point Index 9: 1 – All other Point Indexes: 0 Selections: 0 to 3 This parameter brings attention to a faulted point by generating a trouble buzz even if the point is not actually in trouble. Instant Alarm (I), Trouble (T) and Supervisory (S) point responses take priority over Buzz on Fault. If the point response is "blank", then Buzz on Fault can be the only response. Refer to the Point Response, page 179 configuration for a description of response types for each point type and how they are affected by arm state. If an alarm, trouble or supervisory event occurs and is silenced, then Buzz on Fault selections 1 and 3 will persist until the point returns to normal. Refer to the following table for Buzz on Fault controlled point operation and 24-hour point operation: Selection 0 Buzz on fault Disabled Silence while Silence after faulted restore Description Does not apply Does not apply Buzz on Fault feature is disabled. 1 Yes Not allowed Allowed Buzz persists until the point restores and is silenced. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 188 en | Points Control Panel Selection 2 Buzz on fault Yes Silence while Silence after faulted restore Allowed Allowed Description Buzz can be silenced. 3 Yes Not allowed Auto silence Buzz persists until the point restores. Notice! Custom Function point types do not support Buzz on Fault. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Buzz on Fault 10.3.13 Watch Point Default: – Point Indexes 7 to 8: Yes – All other Point Indexes: No Selections: – Yes: This point activates Watch Mode responses if it is faulted when the control panel is in Watch Mode. – No: Do not activate Watch Mode responses for this point. This parameter allows a controlled point to generate a watch tone as long as the area is disarmed and not being faulted into a trouble or alarm event. Notice! You can only hear the watch tone on a keypad where the current area is the point’s assigned area. You can only hear the watch tone on a keypad where the current area is the point’s assigned area. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Watch Point 10.3.14 Output Response Type Default: 0 Selections: – 0- Point state does not affect the operation of the corresponding output. – 1- The output corresponding with this point activates when the point is faulted to any off normal state, even if the point is bypassed. The output automatically resets when the point is returned to normal. – 2- The output corresponding with this point latches when the point goes into an alarm condition. This output remains on steady output until the alarm is cleared from the keypad display. This parameter causes an output to respond when a corresponding point with the same number is faulted. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Points | en 189 Outputs used for this function must not be shared with any other point, keypad, sked, area, or panel output functions. Sharing can cause errors in output operation. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Output Response Type 10.3.15 Display as Device Default: No Selections: – Yes. Display [CHECK DEVICE] when this point is off normal. – No. Do not display [CHECK DEVICE] when this point is off normal. Use this parameter to cause the to display CHECK DEVICE once a point is off normal or is acknowledged after going into alarm. This parameter can be used for devices that have a dry contact output which faults a point once the device is in a trouble event. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Display as Device 10.3.16 Local While Disarmed Default: – Point Index 9, 12: Yes – All other Point Indexes: No Selections: – Yes. Suppress alarm, trouble and restoral reports from this point while the area it is assigned to is disarmed. – No. Report events occurring from this point while the area is disarmed. Use this parameter to allow a controlled point to report alarms, troubles and restoral reports only when the area is armed. Notice! A restoral report is transmitted even when the area is disarmed if the alarm or trouble event occurred while the area was armed and returned to normal after the area was disarmed. This parameter suppresses all reports from 24-hour points. Do not use this parameter with Point Type set to 24-Hour. This parameter only works for disarmed points, and a 24 hour "always armed" point. Instead, choose any type other than 24-Hour, and use a point response that sends an alarm whether the point is armed or not. For instance, Point Type, page 178 Part On and Point Response 9 send an alarm on a trouble or a short (I) whether the area is armed or not. This parameter affects keyswitch points and suppresses keyswitch (troubles/restorals). This parameter does not affect local annunciation. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Local While Disarmed 10.3.17 Local While Armed Default: No Selections: Yes/No – Yes Suppress alarm, trouble and restoral reports from this point while the area it is assigned to is armed. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 190 en | Points Control Panel – No Report events occurring from this point while the area is armed. Use this parameter to allow a controlled point (Part On, Interior and Interior Follower), to report alarms, troubles and restoral reports only when the area is disarmed. This parameter does not affect local annunciation. This parameter suppresses all reports from 24-hour points. This parameter only works for disarmed points, and a a 24 hour "always armed" point. Instead, choose any typeother than 24-Hour, and use a point response that sends an alarm whether the pointis armed or not. For instance, Point Type Part On and Point Response 9 send an alarm on a trouble or a short (I) whether the area is disarmed or not. This parameter affects keyswitch points and suppresses keyswitch (alarms/troubles/restorals) and D279 (opening/closing/troubles/restorals) Do not use this parameter for controlled points that arm/disarm. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Local While Armed 10.3.18 Disable Restorals Default: No Selections: Yes/No – Yes Disable restoral reports for this point. – No Enable restoral reports for this point. Use this parameter to disable any restoral reports from this point after it returns to normal from an alarm or trouble event. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Disable Restorals 10.3.19 Force Arm Returnable Default: No Selections: – Yes This point automatically returns to the system when it restores to normal. – No This point stays out of the system until the area is disarmed. Use this parameter to allow points which were force armed out of the area to return back to the armed state once they are normal again without needing to disarm the system. Use this parameter on points assigned to loading dock doors that are required to be left open until loading is completed. Once the loading dock door is closed, it detects an opening and sends an alarm. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Force Arm Returnable 10.3.20 Bypass Returnable Default: No Selections: – Yes This point automatically returns to the system when the area is disarmed. – No This point stays out of the system through arming and disarming cycles. Use this parameter to return a point which has been bypassed, force armed or swinger bypassed back into the system once the area this point is assigned to is disarmed. Set this parameter to No for interlock points. When not allowed to return to the system through disarming, the point must be manually unbypassed using the UNBYPASS?, keypad function, Sked functions Unbypass a Point, or Unbypass All Points, or remotely using RPS. For force armed points to remain bypassed, ensure Force Arm Returnable, page 190 is set to No. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Points | en 191 RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Bypass Returnable 10.3.21 Bypassable Default: – Point Profiles 1 to 7-13, 20: Yes – Point Profiles 2-6, 14-19: No Selections: – Yes. This point can be bypassed and force armed. – No. This point can not be bypassed or force armed from the keypad or RPS. However, it can be force armed by automatic arming at the end of the closing window (Refer to Auto Close ), or by a Sked programmed to arm the area. Use this parameter to allow this point to be bypassed and/or force armed. When a 24-hour point or 24-hour supervisory point is bypassed, 24 HOUR BYPASS continuously scrolls on the keypad. FIRE BYPASS scrolls to indicate a 24-hour fire point or a fire supervisory point is bypassed. GAS BYPASS scrolls to indicate a gas detector or gas supervisory point is bypassed. To have the alarm capability of a 24-hour point without the continuous scrolling, use a perimeter point with a Point Response, page 179 of 9 to E. Setting this parameter to Yes for Cross Point Timer, page 176 can cause missed cross-point alarms. For example, if Points 1 and 2 are programmed as Cross Points and Point 1 is bypassed or force armed, Point 2 is not able to generate an ALARM CROSS POINT event. However, Point 2 can generate an UNVERIFIED or ALARM event depending on how the point was tripped. A point can be bypassed at the keypad using the BYPASS? function. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Profiles > Bypassable 10.3.22 Swinger Bypass Default: No Selections: – Yes Enable Swinger Bypass for this point. – No Disable Swinger Bypass for this point. Use this parameter to allow the control panel to automatically bypass a point that erroneously reports a pre-determined number of alarm or trouble events within the same arm cycle. The control panel reports a Swinger Bypass when the Swinger Bypass Count, page 79 is reached and Report Bypass at Occurrence, page 191 is set to Yes. If the point has a partial count (less than the Swinger Bypass Count number of events an hour), the count is reset to zero. Bypassable, page 191 does not need to be set to Yes for swinger bypass to work. A swinger-shunted point returns to the system if Bypass Returnable, page 190 is set to Yes. If not, return the point to the system as described in Bypass Returnable. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Swinger Bypass 10.3.23 Report Bypass at Occurrence Default: No Selections: – Yes: Send a report at the time that the point is bypassed. – No: Do not send a report at the time the point is bypassed. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 192 en | Points Control Panel This parameter allows a point to generate a COMMAND BYPASS report as soon as a user bypasses the point from the keypad. Enable this parameter for all bypassable 24-hour points. You can also report a bypassed point at the time the area is armed. Refer to Defer Bypass Report, page 192. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Report Bypass at Occurrence 10.3.24 Defer Bypass Report Default: No Selections: – Yes. Send a report with the closing report instead of when the point is bypassed by a user. – No. Do not defer bypass reports. Use this parameter to prevent points that are bypassed by the user from reporting until the area is armed. Once the area is armed, the bypassed points as well as any point being bypassed during the arming sequence report as POINT BYPASS along with the closing report. To report the bypass at occurrence and when the area is armed, set this parameter and Report Bypass at Occurrence, page 191 to Yes. A COMMAND BYPASS report is sent as soon as it occurs, and a POINT BYPASS report is sent with the closing report. Bypass reports do not occur when arming the area if the closing report is suppressed by Open/Close windows, or are not being reported. Bypass reports for 24 hour points are not sent if this parameter and Report Bypass at Occurrence, page 191 are both set to No. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Defer Bypass Report 10.3.25 Cross Point Default: No Selections: – Yes Enable cross point alarm events. – No Disable cross point alarm events. This parameter reduces false alarms. Points can be programmed so that the control panel needs two faults within a programmed period of time from at least two points within a cross point group before creating cross point alarm events. The Cross Point function is fixed to a minimum of two points per group. Only use this parameter with Part On, Interior or 24-hour point types with instant alarm response. Each cross point group consists of eight points, and is identified by the point numbers in them (for example, Cross Points 1-8, Cross Points 9-16, and so on. A minimum of two points must be programmed to meet the cross point criteria. Point numbers from different cross point groups do not affect each other. When a point with this parameter set to Yes detects an alarm, the control panel starts the cross point timer. If a second cross point in the same cross point group detects an alarm while the cross point timer is active, the control panel sends cross point alarm events for both points. A cross point is considered to be in alarm when it meets the criteria for instant alarm response. The cross point index must have Point Responses set to generate an instant alarm. If a single cross point detects an alarm and stays faulted throughout the cross point timer, the system sends a standard alarm report for that point. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Points | en 193 If a single cross point detects an alarm, then restores, and does not detect any other event, the system sends an unverified event for that point. A second alarm on the first point does not create an alarm event, but rather an unverified event. The cross point function applies only to alarm events. It does not apply to supervisory or trouble events. If an abort window delay is needed for the cross zone alarm, all cross points in the group must have Alarm Abort set to Yes. It is recommended that all points in cross zone group use the same point index. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Cross Point Additional resources Point Response, page 179 Cross Point Timer, page 176 Alarm Abort, page 194 10.3.26 Alarm Verify Default: – Point Index 5: Yes – All other Point Indexes: No Selections: – Yes Enable alarm verification on this point. – No Disable alarm verification on this point. Use this parameter only with fire points to designate them for alarm verification. When an alarm verification point goes into alarm, the control panel removes power to all resettable points for the duration programmed in Restart Time. If the point (or another resettable point in the area) is still in alarm, or goes back into alarm within 65 seconds after the initial verification time reset, an alarm is generated. Alarm verification points must be programmed as Resettable. During a Fire Walk Test, the reset time is 5 seconds. The time programmed in Restart Time is ignored. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Alarm Verify Additional resources Restart Time, page 92 Resettable, page 193 10.3.27 Resettable Default: Point Profiles 1-3, 6-20: No Point Profiles 4,5: Yes Selections: – Yes This point is reset by the RESET SENSORS? function and during the alarm verification sequence. – No This point is not resettable. Use this parameter if this is a powered point that requires interruption of power to reset a latched alarm event. The resettable point function is typically used with smoke detectors and glass break detectors. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 194 en | Points Control Panel When a sensor reset is initiated, the control panel does not accept alarms from any points in which this parameter is set to Yes. During the five-second reset time, alarms from these points are ignored. When initiated either through a walk test or the keypad function RESET SENSOR?, or by RPS, power is interrupted to the device for 5 seconds. SENSOR RESET is reported to the central station receiver. Do not mix fire and intrusion devices on the same powered loop. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Resettable 10.3.28 Alarm Abort Default: – Point Profiles 1, 7-10, 11-16, 20: Yes – Point Profiles 2-6, 17-19: No Selections: – Yes If the point goes into alarm, the system delays the alarm report for the amount of time specified in Abort Window. – No If the point goes into alarm, the system immediately sends the alarm report. This parameter allows points with the associated point index to delay a burglar alarm (nonfire) event for the time period specified in Abort Window, page 77. Notice! To comply with UL standards, the total amount of time entered in Entry Delay, page 185 and Alarm Event Abort must not exceed 1 minute. An alarm is aborted by performing an alarm silence operation before this time elapses at a keypad showing the burglar alarm event. When an alarm is successfully aborted, the keypad shows an optional ALARM NOT SENT message. Refer to Abort Display, page 115 for more information. This parameter does not apply to fire alarms or invisible point alarms. When upgrading a noncontrol panel account to a control panel account, RPS forces the default to No. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Alarm Abort 10.3.29 Wireless Point Supervision Time Default: – Point Index 1-2, 7-16: 24 Hours – Point Indexes 3-6: 4 Hours Selections: – None. Disable wireless point supervision. – 4, 12, 24, 48, 72. Set the length of time in hours for wireless point supervision. This parameter sets the length of time in hours between failure events to hear from the wireless transmitter before sending a missing event for devices configured to report to the Wireless Receiver. RADION keyfobs will follow the supervision rules if configured as a point device. Fire points have a fixed supervision interval of 4 hours, regardless of Wireless Point Supervision Time setting. If the point type is Fire, then the Wireless Point Supervision Time setting can only be set to 4 hours. This is an alternate supervision interval to the global System (Repeater) Supervision Time, page 245 setting. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Points | en 195 RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Wireless Point Supervision Time 10.3.30 Custom Function Default: Disabled This specifies the custom function to be run when a point with this index faults to a short (S) or open (O) state. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes > Custom Function 10.3.31 Monitor Delay Default: 00:00 Selections: 00:00, 00:01 thru 60:00 00:00 = disabled Use this parameter to configure the length of time (MM:SS) a disarmed control panel waits after a point faults before reporting the event to the central station. The control panel sends a Burg Supervisory report to the central station if the point remains faulted during the entire period of time configured in this parameter. If the point is restored during this time, no report is sent. The control panel does not indicate monitor delay at the keypad. Enable this feature to monitor a door, such as a trash compactor, jewelry case, or freezer that should not be left open. Notice! Starting a walk test that includes controlled points, or arming the points' area will cancel the monitor point timer. No report is sent after the configured time expires. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes (point profiles) > Monitor Delay 10.3.32 Delay Response, Disarmed Default: 00:00 Selections: 00:05 thru 60:00 00:00 = disabled This parameter sets the length of time (MM:SS) the control panel waits after a disarmed point faults before annunciating or reporting the fault. This parameter only applies to the following point types when armed: – Part On, page 197 – Interior, page 198 – Interior Follower, page 199 Use this feature to delay the effect of the following parameters: – Point Response, page 179 – Instant Alarm – Supervisory – Buzz on Fault, page 187 – Watch Point, page 188 – Output Response Type, page 188 – Display as Device, page 189 – Output, page 173 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 196 en | Points Control Panel Notice! Point Response (D) Delay Alarm is not supported by Delay Response feature. So, when a Delay Alarm results in an instant alarm, that alarm is not delayed by this feature. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes (point profiles) > Delay Response Disarmed 10.3.33 Delay Response, Armed Default: 00:00 Selections: 00:05 thru 60:00 00:00 = disabled This parameter sets the length of time (MM:SS) the control panel waits after an armed point faults before annunciating or reporting the fault. This parameter only applies to the following point types when armed: – 24-Hour, page 197 – Part On, page 197 – Interior, page 198 – Interior Follower, page 199 Use this feature to delay the effect of the following parameters: – Point Response, page 179 – Instant Alarm – Supervisory – Output Response Type, page 188 – Display as Device, page 189 – Output, page 173 Notice! Point Response (D) Delay Alarm is not supported by Delay Response feature. So, when a Delay Alarm results in an instant alarm, that alarm is not delayed by this feature. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes (point profiles) > Delay Response Armed 10.3.34 Circuit Style Default: Single EOL (1KΩ) Selections: – Single EOL (1KΩ) – Single EOL (2KΩ) – Dual EOL – No EOL This parameter sets the circuit style for a point index. Notice! Circuit Style control panel firmware requirements The Circuit Style Parameter is not available for control panel firmware v2.xx. The Dual EOL resistor configuration is available only for control panel firmwarev3.01 and higher. The Single EOK (2KΩ) selection is only for control panel firmware v3.03 and higher. The No EOL selection is only for control panel firmware v3.03 and higher. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Points | en 197 Single EOL (1KΩ) – valid with all point sources. Single EOL (2KΩ), Dual EOL, No EOL – valid with On-board and B208 point sources. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Indexes (point profiles) > Point Type/Response/Circuit Style Further information Point Type, page 178 Point Response, page 179 10.3.35 Normal State (Not available on version 2.xx control panels.) Default: Open Selections: – Open – an open point circuit is the Normal state. – Short – a short on point circuit is the Normal state. This parameter sets the Normal state for the point index. When this parameter is set to Open, an open circuit on the point sensor loop is the Normal state. When this parameter is set to Short, a shorted circuit on the point sensor loop is the Normal state. RPS Menu Location Points > Point Profile (Point Index) > Point Type/Response/Circuit Style 10.4 Point Profile descriptions 10.4.1 24-Hour A 24-hour point is not turned on and off from a keypad. 24-hour points are armed all the time, and can be used for panic, medical, and police alerts. 24-hour points can be programmed as bypassable. However, the application should be carefully considered before using the bypassable option. Bypassable 24-hour points should be programmed to Buzz on Fault, page 187. When a 24-hour point is bypassed, the report should be sent as it occurs. If the area contains all 24-hour points, the area is never armed or disarmed; therefore, a deferred bypass report is not sent. 24-hour protection for fire doors, roof hatches, etc. Instead of programming this type of protection as a 24-hour point, consider using a perimeter point type with a Point Response, page 179 of 9 to E. 24-hour points do not show faults when an arming function is entered, but perimeter points do. When programming for this type of protection, you should consider using the Buzz On Fault and Local While Disarmed, page 189 options. Hold-up devices in UL installations: the 24-Hour point type must be used for points connected to hold-up devices. The point text must include, “hold-up”. 10.4.2 Part On Configuring a point profile with the Part On point type makes it a Part On point profile. Points assigned to a Part On point profile are Point On points. Part On points are typically used to monitor devices in the perimeter of the premises (doors and windows). A Part On point profile includes a configurable entry delay time. Entry delay time provides time for users to reach a keypad and turn the area Off without creating an alarm event. For example, when a user opens the front door (tripping a Part On point) entry delay time begins. The user needs to proceed to a keypad and turn the area off before exit delay time expires to prevent an alarm event. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 198 en | Points Control Panel If the area is in entry delay and a second Part On point trips, the control panel compares the remaining entry delay time to the entry delay time programmed for the second Part On point. If the second point's entry delay time is less than the remaining time, it shortens the entry delay time. Notice! Part On Points with instant Point Response create immediate alarm events Perimeter Points programmed for an instant Point Response, page 179 do not start entry delay time when tripped. They generate an alarm event immediately, even during entry or exit delay. When a user turns an area All On; Part On points, Interior points, and Interior Follower points are all armed. When a user turns an area Part On only Part On points are armed. Interior points, and Interior Follower points are not armed. In a typical system, turning an area Part On arms only the perimeter protection allowing users to remain in the premises without creating alarm events from interior points. 10.4.3 Interior Configuring a point profile with the Interior point type makes it an Interior point profile. Points assigned to an Interior point profile are Interior points. Interior points are typically used to monitor interior detection devices such as interior doors, motion detectors, photoelectric beams, or carpet mats. Interior points are armed only when the area is All On. They are not armed when the area is Part On. The Point Response, page 179 for Interior points can be configured for instant or delayed alarm response. – Instant - points configured for instant alarm response create alarm events immediately, even during entry or exit delay time. Interior points are commonly configured for instant alarm response. – Delayed - when an interior point configured for delayed alarm response is tripped while the area is All On, it initiates entry delay time. It will not create an alarm event unless entry delay time expires before the area is turned off. If the area is already in entry delay when an interior point with delayed alarm response trips, the control panel compares the remaining entry delay time to the entry delay time programmed for the interior point. If the interior point's entry delay time is less than the remaining time, it shortens the entry delay time Delayed points can also initiate an entry tone at the keypad (Refer to Entry Tone Off, page 185). Notice! Use the Interior Follower, page 199 profile for instant alarm if the area is not in entry delay For some installations you may want an interior point that follows, but can not initiate entry day. Tripping an Interior Follower point while the area is All On creates an instant alarm event. However, if another point is tripped starting entry delay, and then the Interior Follower point is tripped, the Interior Follower point delays the alarm response until exit delay time expires. If the area is turned Off before entry delay time expires there is no alarm response. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel 10.4.4 Points | en 199 Interior Follower Configuring a point profile with the Interior Follower point type makes it an Interior Follower point profile. Points assigned to an Interior Follower point profile are Interior Follower points. Interior Follower points are typically used to monitor interior detection devices such as interior doors, motion detectors, photoelectric beams, or carpet mats. Interior Follower points are armed only when the area is All On. They are not armed when the area is Part On. Interior Follower points follow, but can not initiate entry day. Tripping an Interior Follower point while the area is All On creates an instant alarm response. However, if another point is tripped starting entry delay, and then the Interior Follower point is tripped, the Interior Follower point delays the alarm response until exit delay time expires. If the area is turned Off before entry delay time expires there is no alarm response During Exit Delay, faulting an Interior Follower point does not create an alarm event (even if a Part On, Delay point is not faulted during the exit delay). Interior Follower points do not initiate entry delay even when configured for a delayed alarm response (Point Response, page 179 set to 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8). Notice! Use the Interior, page 198 profile and delayed alarm response for interior points that initiate entry delay For some installations you may want an interior point that can initiate entry day. Tripping an Interior point configured for delayed alarm response (refer to Point Response, page 179) while the area is All On initiates entry delay. The alarm response is delayed until exit delay time expires. If the area is turned Off before entry delay time expires there is no alarm response. 10.4.5 Keyswitch Maintained Program Point Response as 1. Do not connect initiating devices to a keyswitch point. – Normal: The area is disarmed. – Open: When this point changes from normal to open, the area arms. – Short: A short is a trouble while the area is disarmed. A short is an alarm while the area is armed. When this point changes from shorted to normal or open, it restores. If you program Point Response as 2, the point responds as follows: – Normal: When this point changes from open to normal, the area arms. – Open: The area is disarmed. – Short: A short is a trouble while the area is disarmed. A short is an alarm while the area is armed. When this point changes from shorted to normal or open, it restores. Trouble and restoral reports are not sent if Local While Disarmed, page 189 is set to Yes. Alarm and restoral reports are not sent if Local While Armed, page 189 is set to Yes. Notice! Point Response 2 is required for Inovonics FA113 Wireless devices. 10.4.6 Keyswith Momentary Used for area arming and disarming. Point Response must be programmed 1. Do not connect initiating devices to a keyswitch point. – N–>S–>N: When this point momentarily changes from normal to shorted to normal, it toggles the armed state of the area. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 200 en | Points Control Panel – Open: An open is a trouble while the point is disarmed. An open is an alarm while the point is armed. When this point changes from open to normal, it restores. Trouble and restoral reports are not sent if Local While Disarmed, page 189 is set to Yes. Trouble and restoral reports are not sent if Local While Armed, page 189 is set to Yes. 10.4.7 Open / Close Point Used for point arming and disarming. Point Response must be programmed 1. Local bells are silenced through the keypad. – Normal: The point is armed and sends a POINT CLOSING. Point Closing is not sent if Local While Armed, page 189 is set to Yes. – Open: An open is an alarm while the point is armed. An open is a trouble while the point is disarmed. ALARM and RESTORAL reports are not sent if Local While Disarmed, page 189 is set to Yes. – Short: The point is disarmed and sends a POINT OPENING. A Point OPening is not sent if Local Armed is set to Yes. 10.4.8 Fire Point This point type generates a Fire Alarm when an instant alarm response is activated (Refer to 24-hour point response section). Fire alarms are the highest priority event in the control panel. 10.4.9 Aux AC Supervision This point type monitors the AC power of an auxiliary power supply. When the point is in an off-normal state, the control panel waits for the time programmed in AC Fail Time before generating a Point Trouble. This point type does not use Point Response, page 179; therefore, no alarm event occurs. If this point type is bypassed, 24 HOUR PT BYPASSED is shown on the keypads. 10.4.10 Gas Point This point type monitors gas detection sensors and generates a Gas Alarm when an instant alarm response is activated (Refer to 24-hour point response section). 10.4.11 Custom Function This point type activates a Custom Function when the CF point response is activated (Refer to the Custom Function Point response table). The Custom Function activated is configured in Custom Function parameter. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Schedules | en 201 11 Schedules 11.1 Open/Close Windows Use these windows to set a schedule for disarming and arming. The disarming and arming schedules provide several independent features: – Suppress normal opening and/or closing reports when Disable O/C in Window, page 101 is set to Yes. – Generate a FAIL TO OPEN report if the area is not disarmed on schedule when Fail to Open, page 102 is set to Yes. – Provide a warning tone and [PLEASE CLOSE NOW] display at the keypad when it is time to arm the area. – Generate a FAIL TO CLOSE report if the area is not armed on schedule when Fail to Close, page 102 is set to Yes. – Automatically arm the area at the end of the closing window when Auto Close, page 101 is set to Yes. Opening and closing schedules can be set up independently. For example, if you only want to use features provided by closing windows, leave times blank in the opening windows parameters and program closing window times. 11.1.1 Opening window timeline Example using two opening windows on the same day Areas that are disarmed between midnight and 6 AM generate Opening reports. Areas that are disarmed between 6 AM and 7 AM generate Early to Open reports. If the area is disarmed between 7 AM and 8 AM regular Opening Reports are generated. If Disable O/C in Window is programmed as "yes" the Opening Report is not transmitted to the central station. If the area is not disarmed by 8:01 AM then a Fail to Open event is generated if Fail to Open is programmed as "yes" in Opening and Closing Options. If the user disarms the area between 8:01 AM and 12:59 PM then a Late to Open event is generated. Areas that are disarmed between 1 PM and 2 PM generate Early to Open reports. If the area is disarmed between 2 PM and 3 PM regular Opening Reports are generated. If Disable O/C in Window is programmed as "yes" the Opening Report is not transmitted to the central station. If the area is not disarmed by 3:01 PM then a Fail to Open event is generated if Fail to Open is programmed as "yes" in Opening and Closing Options. If the user disarms the area between 3:01 PM and 11:59 PM then a Late to Open event is generated. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 202 en | Schedules Control Panel Programming for two Opening Windows on the same day (as shown in the time line) Open W# Day of Close Early Start Stop Early the week begin Start Stop begin Except on Holiday 1 SMTWT 06:00 07:00 08:00 23:59 Yes / No 13:00 14:00 15:00 01:00 Yes / No FS 2 SMTWT FS Do not program a single window to cross the midnight boundary. The window stop time must be later than the window start time. To program a window that effectively crosses the midnight boundary, you have to program two windows. For example, to program windows for an area that opens between 11:30 PM and 12:30 AM, five days a week, use two windows as shown in the example below: Programming to Link Two Days Over Midnight Open W# Early Close Start Stop begin Early Start Stop begin Except Holiday Area(s) on index Holiday 1/ 22:00 23:30 23:59 Yes / Monday 2/ No 00:00 00:00 00:30 Yes / Monday 11.1.2 1234 123456 78 1234 No 123456 78 Opening_Closing windows table Monday to Friday, opening between 5 and 6 AM, closing between 11 PM and 1 AM. Open W# Day of Close Early Start Stop the week begin Early Start Stop begin Except on Holiday 1 SMTWT 04:00 05:00 06:00 20:00 23:00 23:59 Yes / No 00:00 00:00 01:00 Yes / No FS 2 SMTWT FS Sunday, in between 8 and 8:30 AM, out between 2:30 and 5:00 PM. Open W# Day of week Early begin Start Stop 4 SMTWTFS 07:00 08:00 08:30 All days must be Only on holidays programmed NO 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Schedules | en 203 Opening/Closing Windows Table Use this table to determine the proper entries for your application. Day of week The column Except on below briefly holiday Holiday index Areas None Program at least describes the ways to activate an Opening/ Closing window. Use the guidelines shown in the other columns to choose the appropriate entries. Program at least Days(s) of the one day as YES week Program at least Day(s) of the one day as YES week, but NOT NO on area as YES YES Select at least Program at least one Index on area as YES Select at least Program at least one Index on area as YES Select at least Program at least one Index on area as YES on holidays Program at least Day(s) of the one day as YES week, PLUS NO holidays All days must be Only on holidays NO programmed NO 11.1.3 Sunday through Saturday Default (Sunday through Saturday): No Selections: Yes/No In the seven weekday parameters, select the days of the week that the opening and/or closing windows are active. To prevent the windows from activating on certain days of the year, set Xept Holiday, page 209 to Yes, and enable at least one holiday index. When Xept Holiday, page 209 is set to Yes, the window executes on the days of the week programmed unless the date is designated as a holiday by the selected holiday index. If opening and/or closing windows are only needed on certain days of the year, do not program the windows to execute on any days of the week. Instead, set Xept Holiday, page 209 to No, and select a holiday index with the days of the year you want the window to be active. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Open/Close Windows > Sunday through Saturday 11.1.4 Open Early Begin Default: Disable Selections: Disable, HH:MM (hours and minutes) 00:00 to 23:59 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 204 en | Schedules Control Panel This parameter is one of three required to create an opening window. To finish programming an opening window, Open Window Start, page 204 and Open Window Stop, page 205 also must be programmed. The time entered in this parameter is the earliest time that the user is allowed to open an area before the Open Window Start, page 204 time. If opening and closing reports are enabled, disarming the area between midnight and the Open Early Begin time generates an opening report. – If Disable O/C in Window, page 101 is set to Yes and the area is disarmed between the Open Early Begin time and the Open Window Start time, the opening event is sent with an Early to Open modifier. If the Open Early Begin time is the same as the Open Window Start time, no opening event is sent. – If Disable O/C in Window, page 101 in Window is set to No and the area is disarmed at any time, an opening event is sent without an Early to Open or Late to Open modifier. Disarming the area between the Open Window Start and Open Window Stop times creates a local event in the control panel event log, but does not send the opening report to the central station. Disarming the area between the Open Window Stop time and before the next window's Open Early Begin time (or midnight, whichever is earlier) generates an opening event with a Late to Open modifier. When configuring multiple windows to operate on the same day, ensure that they are added to the system in chronological order. For example, if three windows are programmed to execute on Tuesday, Window 1 (W1) must occur before Window 2 (W2), and Window 2 must occur before Window 3 (W3). – Avoid programming the Open Early Begin time before a time that is between another window's Open Window Start and Open Window Stop times. – Do not program a window to cross the midnight boundary. Disabled windows have a 00:00 beginning time. If the entry for this parameter is 00:00, but times are programmed for Open Window Start and Open Window Stop, the window is disabled. To disable the window, all hours and minutes spaces must be 00:00. Ensure time entries use a 24-hour clock. For example, midnight = 00:00; 7:00 AM = 07:00; 2:45 PM = 14:45; 11:59 PM = 23:59. If the window needs to activate on the same day you program it, reboot the control panel to activate today's window. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Open/Close Windows > Open Early Begin 11.1.5 Open Window Start Default: Disable Selections: Disable, HH:MM (hours and minutes) This parameter is one of three required to create an opening window. Enter the time that you want the control panel to start the opening window. The window goes into effect at the beginning of the minute. 00:00 is Midnight 23:59 is 11:59 P.M. Make entries using a 24-hour clock (for example, 7:00 AM is entered as 07:00, 2:45 PM is entered as 14:45). To program an opening window, Open Early Begin and Open Window Stop must also be programmed. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Open/Close Windows > Open Window Start 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Schedules | en 205 Additional resources Close Early Begin, page 205 Open Window Stop, page 205 11.1.6 Open Window Stop Default: Disable Selections: Disable, HH:MM (hours and minutes) Enter the time that you want the control panel to end the opening window. The window stops at the end of the minute. 00:00 is Midnight 23:59 is 11:59 P.M. Make entries using a 24-hour clock (for example, 7:00 AM is entered as 07:00, 2:45 PM is entered as 14:45). This parameter is one of three required to create an opening window. To program an opening window, Close Early Begin, page 205 and Open Window Start, page 204 must also be programmed. If the area is not disarmed by the time the Open Window Stop, page 205 time expires, the control panel generates a FAIL TO OPEN report if enabled in Fail to Open, page 102. Opening reports generated between the Open Window Start time and Open Window Stop time can be suppressed by setting Disable O/C in Window, page 101 to Yes. Refer to Open Early Begin for other report feature explanations. Do not use a time of 23:59 as a window stop time unless another window begins on the next day at 00:00. The control panel does not send FAIL TO OPEN reports for windows that stop at 23:59. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Open/Close Windows > Open Window Stop 11.1.7 Close Early Begin Default: Disable Selections: Disable, HH:MM (hours and minutes) 00:00 to 23:59 This parameter is one of three required to create a closing window. To finish programming a closing window, Close Window Start, page 206 and Close Window Stop, page 206 must be programmed. The time entered in this parameter is the earliest time the user can close an area before the Close Window Start time. If opening and closing reports are enabled, arming the area between midnight and the time entered in this parameter generates a closing report. If Disable O/C in Window, page 101 is set to Yes and the area is armed between the Close Early Begin time and the Close Window Start time, the closing event is sent with an Early to Close modifier. If the Close Early Begin time is the same as the Close Window Start time, no closing event is sent. If Disable O/C in Window is set to No and the area is armed at any time, a closing event is sent without the Early to Close or Late to Close modifiers. Arming the area between the Close Window Start and Close Window Stop times creates a local event in the control panel event log, but does not send the closing report to the central station. Arming the area after the Close Window Stop time and before the next window's Close Early Begin time (or midnight, whichever is earlier) generates a closing event with a Late to Close modifier. When configuring multiple windows to operate on the same day, ensure that they are added to the system in chronological order. For example, if three windows are programmed to execute on Tuesday, Window 1 (W1) must occur before Window 2 (W2), and Window 2 must occur before Window 3 (W3). Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 206 en | Schedules Control Panel Avoid programming the Open Early Begin, page 203 time that is between another window's Open Window Start, page 204 and Open Window Stop, page 205 times. Disabled windows have a 00:00 start time. If the entry for this parameter is 00:00, but times are programmed for Close Window Start and Close Window Stop, the window is disabled. To disable the window, both the hours and minutes spaces must be 00:00. Ensure time entries use a 24-hour clock. For example, midnight = 00:00; 7:00 AM = 07:00; 2:45 PM = 14:45; 11:59 PM = 23:59. If the window needs to activate on the same day you program it, reboot the control panel to activate today's window. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Open/Close Windows > Close Early Begin 11.1.8 Close Window Start Default: Disable Selections: Disable, HH:MM (hours and minutes) This parameter is one of three required to create a closing window. Enter the time that you want the control panel to start the closing window. The window goes into effect at the beginning of the minute. 00:00 is Midnight 23:59 is 11:59 P.M. Make entries using a 24-hour clock (for example, 7:00 AM is entered as 07:00, 2:45 PM is entered as 14:45). To program a closing window, Close Early Begin, page 205 and Close Window Stop, page 206 must also be programmed. A warning tone sounds and [PLEASE CLOSE NOW] displays at the keypad if the area is not armed when the Close Window Start time comes. To temporarily silence the tone, press the [ESC] key on the keypad. The warning tone restarts in 10 minutes if the area is not armed. Refer to Close Early Begin, page 205 for report feature explanations. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Open/Close Windows > Close Window Start 11.1.9 Close Window Stop Default: Disable Selections: Disable, HH:MM (hours and minutes) This parameter is one of three required to create a closing window. Enter the time that you want the control panel to end the closing window. The window stops at the end of the minute. 00:00 is Midnight 23:59 is 11:59 P.M. Make entries using a 24-hour clock (for example, 2:45 PM is entered as 14:45). To program a closing window, Close Early Begin and Close Window Start must also be programmed. If the area is not armed by the time the Close Window Stop time expires, the control panel generates a FAIL TO CLOSE report if enabled in Fail To Close. Closing reports generated between the Close Window Start time and Close Window Stop time can be suppressed by setting Disable O/C in Window to Yes. Refer to Close Early Begin for other report feature explanations. Do not use a time of 23:59 as a window stop time unless the window continues on the next day at 00:00. FAIL TO CLOSE reports are not sent, and the Auto Close feature does not work for windows that stop at 23:59. Do not program a single window to cross the midnight boundary. The window stop time must be later than the window start time. To program a window that effectively crosses the midnight boundary, you have to program two windows. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Schedules | en 207 For example, to program windows for an area that closes between 11:30 PM and 12:30 AM, five days a week, use two windows as shown: Open W# Day of Early week begin Close Start Stop Early Start Stop begin Except on holiday 1 SMTWT 22:00 23:30 23:59 Yes / No 00:00 00:00 00:30 Yes / No FS 2 SMTWT FS RPS Menu Location Schedules > Open/Close Windows > Close Window Stop 11.1.10 Xept on Holiday Default: No Selections: Yes Do not activate this window on holidays. No A holiday does not prevent this window from activating. This parameter allows you to determine if the window is disabled on holidays, or is active only on holidays. To prevent the windows from activating on certain days of the year, set Xept Holiday to Yes, and enable at least one holiday index. When Xept Holiday is set to Yes, the window executes on the days of the week programmed unless the date is designated as a holiday by the selected holiday index(es). To use this parameter, the window must be programmed to activate on at least one day of the week and a holiday index must be enabled. You also use this selection if opening and/or closing windows are only needed on certain days of the year. Do not program the windows to execute on any days of the week. Instead, set Xept Holiday to No, and select at least one holiday index with the days of the year you want the window to be active. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Open/Close Windows > Xept on Holiday Further information Holiday #, page 209 11.1.11 Holiday # Default (Holiday 1): No Selections: Yes: Use the selected holiday index with this window. No: Do not use the selected holiday index with this window. This parameter enables up to four holiday indexes for use with Opening/Closing windows. Enable at least one holiday index if Xept Holiday, page 209 is set to Yes for this window, or if you want this window to activate only on specific dates. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Open/Close Windows > Holiday 1 to 8 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 208 en | Schedules 11.1.12 Control Panel Area # Default: No Selections: Yes Activate the window in the specified area number. No Disable the window in the specified area number. This parameter determines whether a particular window activates in each of the control panel's areas. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Open/Close Windows > Area # 11.2 User group windows In this section, you can create up to eight User Group periods in which the passcodes for the group chosen will be enabled. One user group can have multiple windows assigned to them within a 24 hour period. Refer to User Group, in the Passcode Worksheet section of the program to assign individuals to a group. When you assign a User Group to one of the eight windows, all passcodes for the group are enabled only for the period between the Enable Time and Disable Time for assigned User Window #. If a user is not assigned to a User Group or the number programmed for the user for User Group is not assigned to a User Window # , the passcode for that user is enabled all the time. 11.2.1 User Group Default: (window #) Selections: – B6512G: 0 to 6 0 = disabled Enter a number to identify the group of users in this parameter. When this window runs, the user passcodes for this group are enabled / disabled. You can assign a user group to more than one window in a 24 hour period, but the windows must not overlap or exceed the midnight boundary. RPS Menu Location Schedules > User Group Windows > User Group 11.2.2 Sunday through Saturday Default (Sunday through Saturday): No Selections: Yes/No In the seven weekday parameters, select the days of the week that the User Group window is active. To prevent the windows from activating on certain days of the year, set Xept Holiday to Yes, and enable at least one holiday index. When Xept Holiday is set to Yes, the window executes on the days of the week programmed unless the date is designated as a holiday by the selected holiday index. If opening and/or closing windows are only needed on certain days of the year, do not program the windows to execute on any days of the week. Instead, set Xept Holiday to No, and select a holiday index with the days of the year you want the window to be active. RPS Menu Location Schedules > User Group Windows > Sunday through Saturday 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Schedules | en 209 Additional Information Xept Holiday, page 209 11.2.3 Group Enable Time Default: Disable Selections: Disable, HH:MM (hours and minutes) Enter the time of day that the window starts. Beginning at this time, users assigned to this window's group are allowed to use their passcodes. The window goes into effect at the beginning of the minute. Notice! This parameter must be programmed if this User Group Window is assigned to a user group. Make entries using a 24-hour clock (for example, 2:45 PM is entered as 14:45). When disabling Group Enable Time input, the time reverts back to 00:00. Perform a Reset Panel command when ending the communications session to activate today's window. If you are programming a window that needs to activate on the same day that you are programming it, do a Reset Panel command after programming. RPS Menu Location Schedules > User Group Windows > Group Enable Time 11.2.4 Group Disable Time Default: Disable Selections: Disable, HH:MM (hours and minutes) Enter the time of day when the window ends. This time marks the end of the period in which users assigned to this window's group can use their passcodes. The window stops at the end of the minute. Notice! This parameter must be programmed if this user group window is assigned to a user group. Make entries using a 24-hour clock. For example, 2:45 PM = 14:45. To disable the window, both the hours and minutes spaces must be blank. Do not program a single window to cross the midnight boundary. The window stop time must be later than the window start time. RPS Menu Location Schedules > User Group Windows > Group Disable Time 11.2.5 Xept Holiday Default: No Selections: Yes/No This parameter allows you to determine if the window is disabled on holidays, or is active only on holidays. Use the instructions provided in Xept Holiday. RPS Menu Location Schedules > User Group Windows > Xept Holiday 11.2.6 Holiday # Default: No Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 210 en | Schedules Control Panel Selections: Yes: Use the selected holiday index with this window. No: Do not use the selected holiday index with this window. This parameter enables up to four holiday indexes to use with User Group Windows. Enable at least one holiday index if Xept Holiday is set to Yes for this User Window, or if you want this window to activate only on specific dates. RPS Menu Location Schedules > User Group Windows > Holiday # 11.3 Skeds Use the SKEDS module to program the control panel to automatically execute functions-that are otherwise initiated by the end user at the keypad. Each Sked can be programmed to occur at a specific time on a specific date or day of the week. A Sked can be edited from the keypad if Time Edit is set to Yes. The date and time can be changed using the [CHANGE SKED?] function. Each Sked Number can be programmed with one of 24 functions for the Function. A function is what is executed. In addition to the function, a choice must be made to what is affected by the function. (e.g. When choosing a Disarm Sked, the disarming is the function while the areas that are being chosen to become disarmed are what is affected). The functions and their associated parameters are explained in detail following the Function parameter. Each Sked can be programmed with up to four Holiday Indexes. The Holiday Indexes can be used to execute the Sked on the Holidays in addition to the Date or Day(s) of the Week, or, they can be used to prevent the Sked from executing on the Holidays (Refer to Xept Holiday ). 11.3.1 Sked Name Text Default: Sked # Selections: Up to 32 alphanumeric characters Enter up to 32 characters of text to describe the area. This is for informational purposes only and is not sent to the control panel. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Skeds > Sked Name Text 11.3.2 Sked Name Text (Second Language) Default: Blank Selections: Up to 32 alphanumeric characters Enter up to 32 characters of text to describe the area. This is for informational purposes only and is not sent to the control panel. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Skeds > Sked Name Text (second language) 11.3.3 Time Edit Default: Yes Selections: Yes. The user can edit the time of this Sked from the keypad, and it appears in the CHANGE SKED display. No. The user cannot edit the time of this Sked from the keypad, and it does not appear in the CHANGE SKED displays. Select whether the user can edit the time of this Sked from the keypad. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Schedules | en 211 RPS Menu Location Schedules > Skeds > Time Edit 11.3.4 Function Default: Not in Use Selections: See list of Sked functions below. Select the function name from the drop down list that you want this Sked to execute. RPS automatically displays the available parameter choices and range fields for this function. (e.g. A list of check boxes are automatically displayed for the areas when choosing the arm/ disarm function. Notice! The All On - No Exit feature is ignored when arming from a SKED. Click on a function name for information about that function. Not In Use - This function is disabled and no functions after this will be performed. All On Delay, page 213 All On Instant, page 214 Part On Delay, page 214 Part On Instant, page 214 Disarm, page 214 Extend Close, page 214 Bypass a Point, page 214 Unbypass a Point, page 214 Unbypass All Points, page 214 Reset Sensors, page 214 Turn Output On, page 214 Turn Output Off, page 215 Toggle Output, page 215 One-Shot Output, page 215 Reset All Outputs, page 215 Delay, page 215 Cycle Door Unlock Door Lock Door Secure Door Access Ctrl Level Access Granted Events Access Denied Events Answer RPS, page 215 Contact RPS, page 215 Contact RPS User Port, page 216 Send Status Report, page 216 Send Test Report, page 216 Send Test on Off Normal, page 217 Go to Area, page 217 Watch On, page 217 Watch Off, page 217 Show Date & Time, page 217 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 212 en | Schedules Control Panel Sound Watch Tone, page 217 Set Keypad Volume, page 218 Set Keypad Brightness, page 218 Trouble Silence, page 218 Alarm Silence, page 218 RPS Menu Location Schedules > Skeds > Sked 1-80 > Function 11.3.5 Time Default: Disable Selections: Disable, HH:MM (hours and minutes) Enter the time that the Sked executes using a 24-hour clock (for example, 2:45 PM is entered as 14:45). Disabled Skeds displays "Disabled"in the cell. Follow these steps to program a time: 1. Double-click on the field corresponding to the Sked you wish to program the time for. 2. If "Disable" is checked, uncheck it. The time field will become active. 3. Click inside the time field and either use the up and down arrows to set the time, or type in the desired time. 4. Click on OK. Follow these steps to Disable a Sked: 1. Double-click on the field corresponding to the Sked you wish to disable. 2. Select "Disable". 3. Click OK. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Skeds > Time 11.3.6 Date Default: Disable Selections: Disable, Day/Month (ex. 12 June) Enter the date that the Sked executes. Disabled Skeds display "Disabled" in the Date cell. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Skeds > Date 11.3.7 Sunday through Saturday Default (Sunday through Saturday): No Selections: Yes/No These seven day of the week parameters select the days of the week that the Sked is active. To prevent the Sked from activating on certain days of the year, set Xept on Holiday, page 213 to Yes, and enable at least one holiday index. When Xept Holiday is set to Yes, the window executes on the days of the week programmed unless the date is designated as a Holiday by the Holiday Index selected. If a Sked is only needed on certain days of the year, do not program the Sked to execute on any days of the week. Instead, set Xept Holiday to No, and select a holiday index with the dates you want the window to be active. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Skeds > Sunday through Saturday 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel 11.3.8 Schedules | en 213 Xept on Holiday Default: No Selections: – Yes. Prevent this Sked from operating on the Holidays identified in the specific Holiday Index(es) used with this Sked. Specific Holiday Indexes are selected in this programming section and programmed in the next programming module. – No. This Sked operates on Holidays programmed in the Holiday Index(es) used with this Sked. If no Days of the Week are programmed, this Sked operates only on the Holidays programmed in the Holiday Index(es) used with this Sked. This Sked also operates if the Holiday falls on a day of the week that is programmed. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Skeds > Xept on Holiday 11.3.9 Holiday # Default: No Selections: Yes: Use the selected holiday index with this window. No: Do not use the selected holiday index with this window. This parameter enables up to four holiday indexes to use with User Group Windows. Enable at least one holiday index if Xept Holiday is set to Yes for this User Window, or if you want this window to activate only on specific dates. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Skeds > Holiday # 11.4 Holiday indexes 11.4.1 Schedule Holiday Indexes Schedule This parameter sets holidays. Within each index, you can select up to 365 dates (or 366 dates for a Leap Year) to be designated as Holidays. Double-click in a cell corresponding to the Holiday Index you wish to program. The Holiday Schedule dialog appears. This dialog is formatted to look like a calendar. It opens to the current month and year. The year is for reference purposes only. RPS only sends the month and day information to the Panel. When a day is chosen to be a holiday in a specific year that same day will be a holiday in every year thereafter. However, the day of the week will shift according to the year being viewed. For example if October 24, 2012, is set as a holiday, October 24 will be a holiday in 2013, 2014, and so on. But the holiday will fall on different days of the week. RPS Menu Location Schedules > Holiday Index > Holiday Indexes Schedule 11.5 Sked Function descriptions 11.5.1 All On Delay This function simulates the All On Delay keypad function. Selections in the Parameter 1: Area # prompt define the area(s) this Sked arms. The Sked can arm multiple areas. If any point is faulted when the Sked executes, it is force armed regardless of FA/Bypass max. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 214 en | Schedules 11.5.2 Control Panel All On Instant This function simulates the All On Instant keypad function. Entries in the Parameter 1: Area # field define the area(s) this Sked arms. The Sked can arm multiple areas. If any point is faulted when the Sked executes, it is force armed regardless of FA/Bypass max. 11.5.3 Part On Delay This function simulates the Part On Delay keypad function. Selections in the Parameter 1: Area # prompt define the area(s) this Sked arms. The Sked can arm multiple areas. If any point is faulted when the Sked executes, it is force armed regardless of FA/Bypass max. 11.5.4 Part On Instant This function simulates the Part On Instant keypad function. Selections in the Parameter 1: Area # prompt define the area(s) this Sked arms. The Sked can arm multiple areas. If any point is faulted when the Sked executes, it is force armed regardless of FA/Bypass max. 11.5.5 Disarm This function emulates the Disarm keypad function. Selections in the Parameter 1: Area # prompt define the area(s) this Sked disarms. The Sked can disarm multiple areas. 11.5.6 Extend Close This function sets the closing window start time to the current time plus the number of minutes configured in Parameter 2. This function can only take effect after the Close Early Begin time has passed. Notice! Extend Close time cannot extend past midnight. Furthermore, if enabled, it cannot extend past an area's configured Latest Close Time. 11.5.7 Bypass a Point This function emulates the Bypass Point keypad function. The entry in the Parameter 1: Point # prompt defines the point this Sked bypasses. The point can be bypassed only if Bypassable is programmed YES in the Point Index assigned to the point. The bypass is reported if Bypass Reports are enabled in the Point Index assigned to the point. The Sked can bypass one point. 11.5.8 Unbypass a Point This function emulates the Unbypass Point shortcut keypad function. The entry in the Parameter 1: Point # prompt defines the point this function unbypasses. This function can only bypass one point. 11.5.9 Unbypass All Points This function is not available as a shortcut keypad function. The areas selected in the Parameter 1: Area # prompt define the areas where this function unbypasses all points. 11.5.10 Reset Sensors This function emulates the keypad shortcut Reset Sensors. When activated, this function activates the area-wide-output Reset Sensors for 5 seconds. This function de-activates the alarm output for areas selected in Parameter 1 for five seconds. 11.5.11 Turn Output On This function emulates the Change Output State keypad shortcut to turn outputs on. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Schedules | en 215 The entry in the Parameter 1: Output # prompt defines the specific output this function activates. The function can activate one output. 11.5.12 Turn Output Off This function emulates the Change Output State keypad shortcut to turn outputs off. The entry in the Parameter 1: Output # prompt defines the specific output this function deactivates. The function can deactivate one output. 11.5.13 Toggle Output This function is not available as a keypad shortcut function. The entry in the Parameter 1: Output # prompt defines the specific output this function toggles. If the output is on, it is turned off. If the output is off, it is turned on. The function has effect on one output. 11.5.14 One-Shot Output This function is not available as a keypad shortcut function and is only available as a custom function. The function activates the output selected in Parameter 1 for the number of seconds selected in Parameter 2. 11.5.15 Reset All Outputs This function is not available as a keypad shortcut function. This function turns off all outputs that are turned on by a sked or custom function. This is a panel-wide function. No other parameters require input for this option. 11.5.16 Delay Use this function to create a configurable delay (0 to 90 seconds) between, or before functions. Parameter 1 configures the delay. 11.5.17 Answer RPS This function emulates the keypad short cut Answer RPS which causes the control panel to answer the next request from RPS to establish a session via phone or network. This function is only available in a custom function. This auto-answer period will last for 2 minutes and overrides the Answer RPS Over Network? and RPS Address Verification prompt settings. 11.5.18 Contact RPS This function attempts to contact an Unattended RPS at the configured time. The control panel's account in RPS controls the operations performed upon successful contact. Notice! Avoid having multiple functions occur at the same time at the same address. Functions can clash and the effect on the panel is unpredictable. Notice! Do not program multiple Skeds to execute at the same keypad during the same time of execution. Notice! Do not program Skeds to execute at times when a user is likely to be executing functions at the keypad. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 216 en | Schedules 11.5.19 Control Panel Contact RPS User Port This function attempts to contact Unattended RPS at the configured time over a network communication device at the configured port. The control panel's account in RPS controls the operations performed upon successful contact. 11.5.20 Send Status Report This function generates a status report for each area that is enabled. The report is sent to the Phone(s) programmed for Test and Status Reports in Report Routing. The status report can be deferred if any other report was sent since the last status report. To defer the status report for up to 24 hours, set the Parameter 1: Deferred option to Yes. 11.5.21 Send Test Report This sked function emulates the Test Report keypad function. This function generates a test report from Area 1 that includes panel wide status information. The report is sent based on the Report Routing configuration under Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > Test Reports > Test Reports, page 54. If Expand Test Report, page 31 in Panel Wide > Phone and Phone Parameters is programmed Yes, the test report also includes all off-normal states for events listed in Panel Wide Parameters > Report Routing > Diagnostic Reports, page 54 and Test Reports. Selections, Parameter 1: Deferred – Yes - defer sending test reports for 24 hours if any other report is sent. – No - do not defer sending test reports. Notice! Only sending the test report is deferred When Parameter 1: Deferred is set to Yes, only sending the test report is deferred. The Send Test Report sked still runs at the frequency set in Parameter 2: Frequency. Selections, Parameter 2: Frequency – Hourly - The first Send Test Report sked runs at the time entered in the Time parameter for the Sked. The Send Test Report sked runs every hour after that. – Monthly - The first Send Test Report sked runs at the time entered in the Time parameter for the sked, on the date entered in the Date parameter. The Send Test Report sked runs every month after that. – Scheduled - The Send Test Report sked runs annually on the date entered in Date parameter, at the time entered in the Time parameter. Deferring test reports When Parameter 1: Deferred is set to Yes, the control panel starts (or restarts) a 24 hour countdown timer each time it receives an Ack (acknowledgement) from the central station receiver for any report. If Parameter 2 is set to Hourly, and the panel has not received an Ack by the time the first hourly Send Test Report sked runs, the panel sends the test report. If the panel received an Ack, test reports are deferred for 24 hours from the last Ack received. The hourly Send Test Report sked will not send a test report for at least 24 hours. If Parameter 2 is set to Monthly, and the panel has not received an Ack within 24 hours of the time the first monthly Send Test Report sked runs, the panel sends the test report. If the panel receives an Ack within 24 hours of the time a monthly Send Test Report sked is set to run, the test report is deferred for 24 hours from the last Ack received. If the 24 hour countdown timer expires, the panel sends the deferred test report at that time. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Schedules | en 217 If Parameter 2 is set to Scheduled, and the panel has not received an Ack within 24 hours of the time the scheduled Send Test Report sked runs, the panel sends the test report. If the panel receives an Ack within 24 hours of the time a scheduled Send Test Report sked is set to run, the test report is deferred for 24 hours from the last Ack received. If the 24 hour countdown timer expires, the panel the deferred test report at that time. 11.5.22 Send Test on Off Normal In order to generate this event, one or more points must be in an off-normal state at the time the Sked executes. Expanded Off-Normal Test Reports include the Off Normal Test Report event as well as events for any points that are in an off-normal state at the time the report is generated. This function sends the following report to the central station if the point is in an off-normal state: Modem event Contact ID event Contact ID code Test Report – System off- Periodic Test – System 1 608 00 000 normal, expanded status Trouble Present Non-Expanded Off-Normal Test Report events are only sent when any point is in the off-normal state from any area but only sends the Off Normal Test Report event. 11.5.23 Go to Area This function emulates the Go To Area keypad shortcut and is only available to custom functions activated through a keypad. When activated, this function will change the keypads current area to the one programmed in Parameter 1: Area #. 11.5.24 Watch On This function emulates the operation of the keypad shortcut Change Watch Mode by activating Match mode for the areas programmed in Parameter 1: Area #. Watch mode causes a chime at any keypad within scope when a watch point is faulted while disarmed. 11.5.25 Watch Off This function emulates the operation of the keypad shortcut Change Watch Mode by deactivating Match mode for the areas programmed in Parameter 1: Area #. 11.5.26 Show Date & Time This function emulates the keypad shortcut Show Date & Time by displaying the current time and date at the SDI2 keypads specified in Parameter 1: Keypads #. Notice! When using the Show Date & Time function with the Set Keypad Volume or Set Keypad Brightness functions in the same custom function they must be separated by about 10 seconds with the Delay function. 11.5.27 Sound Watch Tone This function is not available as a keypad shortcut. When activated, this function causes the SDI2 keypads specified in Parameter 1: Keypads # to continuously emit a watch beep until silenced. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 218 en | Schedules 11.5.28 Control Panel Set Keypad Volume This function sets the configured keypads shown in Parameter 1: Keypad # to the volume level entered in Parameter 2: Volume Level. Refer to Keypad Volume, page 116 in the keypad configuration section for details on volume parameters. 11.5.29 Set Keypad Brightness This function sets the configured keypads shown in Parameter 1: Keypad # to the brightness level selected in Parameter 2: Brightness Level. Refer to the Keypad Brightness, page 116 parameter in the keypad configuration section for details on the brightness parameter. 11.5.30 Trouble Silence This function is not available as a Keypad Shortcut, but can be performed at any keypad through other means. When activated, this function silences all trouble tones and system buzzes in the areas programmed in Parameter 1: Area #. 11.5.31 Alarm Silence This function is not available as a Keypad Shortcut, but can be performed at any keypad through other means. When activated, this function silences all alarms in the areas programmed in Parameter 1: Area #. 11.5.32 Execute Custom Function This function executes the custom function selected in Parameter 1: Custom Function # at a scheduled time. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Access | en 219 12 Access 12.1 Door # 12.1.1 Door Name Text Default: DOOR# Selections: Up to 32 alphanumeric characters Notice! The B6512 supports Doors 1 to 4. Enter up to 24 characters of text to describe the door. This is for informational purposes only and is not programmed in the control panel. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Door Name Text 12.1.2 Door Name Text (second language) Default: blank Selections: Up to 32 alphanumeric characters Notice! The B6512G supports Doors 1 to 4. Enter up to 24 characters of text to describe the door. This is for informational purposes only and is not programmed in the control panel. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Door Name Text (second language) 12.1.3 Door Source Default: Disabled Selections: – Disabled. Door module is disabled. – SDI2 (B901) Use this parameter to assign each door to a device type. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Door Source 12.1.4 Entry Area Default: 1 Selections: – B6512: 1-4 Assign an area to the door controller. This is the area a user exit when initiating a request to exit (REX). RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Entry 12.1.5 Associated Keypad # Default: No Keypad Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 220 en | Access Control Panel Selections: 0 to 32 – B6512: 1 to 12 This parameter sets the door controller to SDI2 keypad associated for KP# Dual Authentication. A Setting of Disabled also disables Dual Authentication operation. Enter the Keypad number (KP#) which determines the scope of the user ID's disarming rights. Areas disarm on the basis of this Keypad's scope and the Authority Level of. No Keypad: Only the area assigned to the Entry Area, page 219 disarms for this door. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Associated Keypad # 12.1.6 Custom Function Default: Disabled Selections: – B6512G: Disabled, CF128 to CF133 Disabled: Custom function is disabled. CF###: The custom function number that activates when a valid ID is entered, given the appropriate user access level and area arm state. Use this parameter to program a custom function that activates at the keypad programmed for Scope, page 109. This custom function only activates for users with a function level authority that allows a valid ID to perform a custom function during the armed or disarmed state. The user to which the card or token is assigned must have an assigned passcode. The following table shows how this programming affects custom function activation: Function level Custom function activation A (armed) User token activates the custom function assigned to the door controller only when the entry area for the door controller is All On or Part On. D (disarmed) User token activates the custom function assigned to the door controller only when the entry area for the door controller is disarmed. C (armed and disarmed) User token activates the custom function assigned to the door controller only when the entry area for the door controller regardless of the armed state of the entry area. Blank User token does not activate the custom function assigned to the door controller. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Custom Function # 12.1.7 Door Point Default: 0 Selections: 0 (no point assigned), 1-96 Use this parameter to assign a point to a door. This point cannot be used for any other point assignments. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Access | en 221 Door Points must be programmed as Part On points. If a Door Point requires 24 hour point type behavior, use the Part On point type with a Point Response of 9 to C for instant alarm response when the area is on (armed) or off (disarmed). If you select an on-board point (points 1-8) as a Door Point, be sure there is no EOL resistor connected to the sensor loop on the control panel. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Door Point See also – 12.1.8 Debounce, page 173 Door Point Debounce Default: 600 ms Selections: Debounce 300 ms 1800 ms 3300 ms 600 ms 2100 ms 3600 ms 900 ms 2400 ms 3900 ms 1200 ms 2700 ms 4200 ms 1500 ms 3000 ms 4500 ms This parameter sets the length of time the access control module scans a door point before initiating an alarm. For appropriate settings, consult the manufacturer's instructions for the device connected to the door point. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Door Point Debounce 12.1.9 Interlock Point Default: 0 Selections: 0 (no point assigned), 1-96 Use this parameter to make a point an Interlock Point. An Interlock Point cannot be used for any other point assignments. Interlock Points must be programmed as Part On points. If an Interlock Point requires 24 hour point type behavior, use the Part On point type with a Point Response of 9 to C for instant alarm response when the area is on (armed) or off (disarmed). When an Interlock Point is, faulted, it prevents the access control module from granting access for a valid ID read or door request. You may use the same point as the Interlock Point for multiple access control modules. Sharing a point as the Interlock point for multiple modules allows one faulted point to prevent multiple modules from granting access. The interlock point will be considered in a normal state if it is bypassed, swinger bypassed, or forced armed. This results in normal operation of access even if the door is left open. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Interlock Point See also – Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Debounce, page 173 Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 222 en | Access 12.1.10 Control Panel Auto Door Default: No Selections: – Yes – when the area assigned in Entry Area, page 219 is off (disarmed), the door state is Unlocked. When that area is on (armed), the door returns to the Locked state. – No – door state is not affected by the armed state of the area. Use this program item to unlock the door (latched shunt and strike) automatically when the entry area is turned off (disarmed). The door re-locks when the area is turned All On or Part On (armed). Notice! Use Secure Door to override Unlocked You cannot manually override the Unlocked state. Use Secure Door, page 159 to override this setting. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Auto Door 12.1.11 Fire Unlock Default: No Selections: Yes: Fire or Gas alarm activates the output and shunts the door point. No: Door remains in its current mode upon a Fire or Gas alarm. Use this parameter to activate the output for the door strike and shunt the door point upon a Fire or Gas alarm. This feature overrides a Secure Door state, Locked Door state, Auto Door, and an Interlock faulted point. The output activates for all doors when a Fire or Gas alarm occurs in any area. Notice! This unlocks the door regardless of the armed state. Notice! You can return doors activated by Fire Unlock to a normal state by pressing 8 – Main menu > 3 – Actions > 8 – Access, or through the keypad with Command 46 – Access menu. Notice! For door controllers configured for dual authentication, Fire Unlock is only available if you configure the associated keypad with a Passcode Enter Function of Cycle Door. All other Passcode Enter functions use the token reader for authentication and prevent all door functions including Fire Unlock. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Fire Unlock 12.1.12 Disarm on Open Default: No Selections: Yes: the area only disarms after access has been granted to a user with disarm authority, and the door point has been faulted (door was opened). 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Access | en 223 No: the area disarms when a user with a valid disarm level presents a valid token/card, whether or not the door has been opened. Use this program item to determine whether the door needs to be physically opened prior to disarming the area upon a valid access request. The user initiating the access request must have access levels that allow disarming with ID. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Disarm on Open 12.1.13 Strike Time Default: 10 Selections: 1 - 240 seconds The strike activates for the amount of time programmed. Enter the amount of time the output for the strike activates to allow a user to open the door. The strike activates upon a valid credential (card), Request to Enter (RTE), Request to Exit (REX), and the keypad [CYCLE DOOR?] function. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Strike Time 12.1.14 Shunt Time Default: 10 Selections: 0 – the shunt does not activate for this door. 1 to 240 – the shunt activates for the seconds entered. Enter the number of seconds the door is shunted to allow a user to open the door without causing the point to go into Trouble, Alarm, or a faulted condition. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Shunt Time 12.1.15 Buzz Time Default: 2 Selections: 0, 1 - 240 seconds 0: no buzz time for this door. 1 - 240: The buzzer sounds for seconds programmed. Enter the seconds that the buzzer output activates to notify the user that the strike is activated and the door is ready to open. The buzzer stops when the door is opened. A separate buzzer is required. Many readers have an internal buzzer that is not affected by Buzz Time. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Buzz Time 12.1.16 Extend Time Default: 10 Selections: 0, 1 - 30 seconds Enter the amount of time (1 to 30) to prolong strike, buzz, and shunt activation when the shunt time expires and a door remains open. At the end of the programmed Extend Time, the buzzer continues to buzz until the door closes. In addition, if programmed, the point assigned to the door indicates a Trouble, Alarm, or Fault at the keypad. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 224 en | Access Control Panel Regardless of the door point programming, the system generates a Trouble Door Left Open event while the system is disarmed, and an Alarm Door Left Open event when the system is armed and the door is held open beyond Extend Time. "Door Closed - Restoral" events are generated after the door is held open past Extend Time and the door has returned to normal. Enter 0 to disable Extend Time. The Trouble Door Left Open event, the Alarm Door Left Open event, and the warning at the keypad are all disabled. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Extend Time 12.1.17 Deactivate on Open Default: Yes Selections: Yes: Strike deactivates when the door point is faulted (door is opened) after access is granted. No: Strike remains activated for the amount of the programmed strike time whether the door is opened or closed. This parameter determines whether the strike deactivates immediately upon physically opening the door (door point is faulted). In order for this function to work, a point needs to be assigned in the Door Point, page 220 parameter. Notice! To reduce false alarms, leave this programming item at Yes (default). This helps prevent the door from “bouncing” open and causing a false alarm. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Deactivate On Open 12.1.18 RTE Shunt Only Default: No Selections: Yes - when the RTE Input (Request To Enter) on the access control module is shorted the door point is shunted for the duration of Shunt Time, page 223. The strike output is not activated. No - when the RTE Input on the access control module is shorted the door point is shunted for the duration of Shunt Time, page 223. The strike output is activated for the duration of Strike Time, page 223. Use this parameter when a user can open a door manually without relying on a token/card to activate the strike (such as with a "push bar"). Notice! No RTE Events when RTE Shunt Only is set to Yes When RTE Shunt Only is set to Yes, the control panel does not log or report Request To Enter events when the RTE Input is shorted. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > RTE Shunt Only 12.1.19 RTE Input Debounce Default: 600 ms Selections: 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Access | en 225 Debounce 300 ms 1800 ms 3300 ms 600 ms 2100 ms 3600 ms 900 ms 2400 ms 3900 ms 1200 ms 2700 ms 4200 ms 1500 ms 3000 ms 4500 ms This parameter sets the length of time the access control module scans the RTE input before initiating a request to enter (RTE) event. For appropriate settings, consult the manufacturer's instructions for the device connected to the RTE input. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > RTE Input Debounce 12.1.20 REX Shunt Only Default: No Selections: Yes: Programmed shunt time will activate so door can be manually opened. No: Request to Exit (REX) automatically activates the programmed strike and shunt time. Use this program item to disable the strike, but still activate the programmed shunt time upon a Request to Exit an area. Use this parameter when a user can open a door manually without relying on a token/card to activate the strike (such as with a "push bar"). Notice! When REXShunt Only is Yes, Request To Exit events are not logged or reported. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > REX Shunt Only 12.1.21 REX Input Debounce Default: 600 ms Selections: Debounce 300 ms 1800 ms 3300 ms 600 ms 2100 ms 3600 ms 900 ms 2400 ms 3900 ms 1200 ms 2700 ms 4200 ms 1500 ms 3000 ms 4500 ms This parameter sets the length of time the access control module scans the REX input before initiating a request to exit (REX) event. For appropriate settings, consult the manufacturer's instructions for the device connected to the REX input. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > REX Input Debounce Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 226 en | Access 12.1.22 Control Panel Access Granted Default: Yes Selections: Yes: ACCESS GRANTED and DOOR REQUEST events logged and reported. No: ACCESS GRANTED and DOOR REQUEST events are not logged or reported. This parameter determines if ACCESS GRANTED and DOOR REQUEST events from this access control module are logged and reported by the control panel. An ACCESS GRANTED event can be initiated by: – a valid read of a crendential (card or token) – a valid door state changed at the keypad – an automatically scheduled or armed state changes that hold a door open RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Access Granted 12.1.23 No Entry Default: Yes Selections: Yes: ACCESS DENIED events logged and reported. No: ACCESS DENIED events are not logged and reported. This No Entry parameter determines if ACCESS DENIED events from this access control module are logged and reported by the control panel. A No Entry (ACCESS DENIED) event may be caused by: – invalid or unknown user ID, interlock or secured door, or incorrect authority level – request to enter/exit (RTE/REX) for door in interlock or secured door RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > No Entry 12.1.24 Enter Request Default: No Selections: Yes: REQUEST TO ENTER (RTE) events logged and reported. No: REQUEST TO ENTER (RTE) events are not logged and reported. This parameter determines if REQUEST TO ENTER (RTE) events from this access control module are logged and reported by the control panel. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Enter Request 12.1.25 Exit Request Default: No Selections: Yes: REQUEST TO EXIT (REX) events logged and reported. No: REQUEST TO EXIT (REX) events are not logged and reported. This parameter determines if REQUEST TO EXIT (REX) events from this access control module are logged and reported by the control panel. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Enter Request 12.1.26 Failure Mode Default: Fail secure Selections: 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Access | en 227 Fail Secure. Door remains locked to ensure continued security. Fail Safe. Access module releases door locking mechanism to allow passage. This parameter sets the behavior for the Access Module when it loses communication with the control panel and enters Failure Mode. This configuration option only applies to the SDI2 B901 access control modules. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Failure Mode 12.1.27 Enclosure Tamper Default: No Selections: Yes - enable tamper input (T+). No - disable tamper input (T+). Notice! Enclosure Tamper parameter configures reader tamper input, T+ For the B901 Access Control Interface module, this parameter enables the reader tamper input (T+ terminal). There is no enclosure tamper input on these modules. Shorting the B901 tamper input (T+) to common (COM) creates a Point Missing event for the Door Point, page 220 and a Tamper event for the B901 module. RPS Menu Location Access > Doors > Enclosure Tamper See also – Door Point, page 220 12.2 Global Access settings 12.2.1 Card Type Default: 26 bit Selections: 26 bit 37 bit no site code 37 bit with site code This parameter specifies the card or token format used for all of the door controllers and keypads. Notice! Set to 26 bit when credentials (card or token) are used with a B942. Default Site Code, page 142 for card types 26 bit: default site code is 255. 37 bit no site code: default site code is blank. The site code is not configurable (Site Code parameter is grayed out). 37 bit with site code: default site code is 65535. RPS Menu Location Access > Global Keypad Settings > Card Type Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 228 en | Automation / Remote App Control Panel 13 Automation / Remote App 13.1 Automation Device Default: None Selections: – None. Automation communication is disabled. – Mode 1 using onboard connection without TLS. – Mode 1 using a B42x module at SDI2 address 1. – Mode 1 using onboard connection with TLS. – Mode 2 using an onboard connection or B42x module at SDI2 address 1, TLS or secure UDP connection This parameter enables and selects the communication module to use exclusively for automation communication. RPS Menu Location Automation / Remote App > Automation Device 13.2 Status Rate Default: 0 Selections: 0 - 255 This parameter sets how often the default status information is sent to the Serial Interface Module. 0: Status information never sent unless requested. 1 – 255: Status information is sent at the interval programmed. The Status information includes the current point status (normal or off-normal), the control panel’s area status (All On, All On Instant, Part On Delay Armed, Part On Instant, Disarmed, Area Entry Delay, Part On Entry Delay, Area Exit Delay, Part On Exit Delay), the control panel status (AC fail, battery missing, AC restore, battery low, and so on), and output status (output on or output off). Entries are in 500 millisecond increments. Therefore, if a 5 is entered, the Status information is sent every 500 milliseconds (or ½ second). An entry of 10 would equal 1 second. If the Status Rate is set to a value under 10 and there are 1 – 6 SDI devices connected to the system, the fastest the control panel can send the Status information is approximately 1 second. In addition to this, if there are more than 6 SDI Devices connected to the control panel, the fastest the control panel can send the information is approximately 1½ to 2 seconds. RPS Menu Tree Location Automation / Remote App > Status Rate 13.3 Automation Passcode Default: Bosch_Auto Selections: Up to 24 characters. This parameter sets the passcode that must be entered before automation software can connect to the control panel. This parameter accepts up to 24 characters, but allows shorter passcodes. The minimum length is six characters. The passcode is case-sensitive. The automation passcode must be entered before any other automation commands will be accepted by the control panel. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Automation / Remote App | en 229 RPS Menu Tree Location Automation / Remote App > Automation Passcode 13.4 Mode 1 Automation Ethernet Port Number Default: 7702 Selections: 1 to 65535 This parameter sets the port number for the Mode 1 Automation Ethernet. RPS Menu Location Automation / Remote App > Mode 1 Automation Ethernet Port Number 13.5 Remote App Default: Enabled Selections: – Enable – the control is able to establish secure connections with remote apps. – Disable – the control is not able to establish secure connections with remote apps. Set this parameter to Enable, to allow the control panel to establish secure connections with remote apps (smart phone with Bosch RSC is an example of a remote app). Set this parameter to Disable, to prohibit the control panel from establishing secure connections with remote apps (smart phone with Bosch RSC is an application example). RPS Menu Location Automation / Remote App > Remote App 13.6 Remote App Passcode Default: [RPS generated random 24 character passcode] Selections: Up to 24 characters Use this parameter to set the passcode the panel receives from a remote application to establish a secure connection (smart phone with Bosch RSC is an application example). The passcode length is 6 to 24 characters. The passcode can be a combination of letters, numbers, and special characters. The passcode is case sensitive. The application passcode must be received before any other commands from the remote application are accepted by the control panel. RPS automatically generates a random 24 character passcode as the default when you create each panel account. Notice! Setting Remote App Passcode to 'disabled', disables remote app login To prevent any remote app user (RSC user) from logging into the control panel, even when the Remote App parameter is set to enabled, set the Remote App Passcode to 'disabled' (any combination of upper and lower case). RPS Menu Location Automation / Remote App > Remote App Passcode Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 230 en | SDI2 modules Control Panel 14 SDI2 modules 14.1 B208 Octo-input The B208 Octo-input is a device that attaches to the SDI2 bus of the control panel. Each module provides 8 independently monitored control loops. Panel type Modules supported B6512 8 Tab. 14.1: Capacity Settings RPS supports the configuration of the Enclosure Tamper, page 230 on each of the Octo-input modules. Yes = Enable enclosure tamper No = Disable enclosure tamper. The default setting is No. Switch Settings Refer to Hardware Switch Settings > B208 Octo-input Module switch settings, page 249 14.1.1 Enclosure Tamper Default: No - Disable Selections: Yes - Enable enclosure tamper input No - Disable enclosure tamper input This parameter enables the enclosure tamper switch input on the SDI2 module. When the input is enabled and connected to a Bosch ICP-EZTS tamper switch installed in the module enclosure, the control panel can create a tamper event when the enclosure door is opened, or when the enclosure is removed from the wall. RPS Menu Location SDI2 modules > B208 Octo-input > Enclosure Tamper 14.2 B308 Octo-output The B308 Octo-output is a device that attaches to the SDI2 bus of the control panel. Each module provides 8 independently monitored outputs similar in function to those provided by the output modules. Panel type Modules supported B6512 8 Tab. 14.2: Capacity Settings RPS supports the configuration of the Enclosure Tamper, page 230 on each of the Octo-output modules. Yes = Enable enclosure tamper No = Disable enclosure tamper. The default setting is No. Switch Settings Refer to Hardware Switch Settings > B308 Octo-output Module switch settings, page 250 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel 14.2.1 SDI2 modules | en 231 Module Enclosure Tamper Default: No - Disable Selections: Yes - Enable enclosure tamper input No - Disable enclosure tamper input This parameter enables the enclosure tamper switch input on the SDI2 module. When the input is enabled and connected to a Bosch ICP-EZTS tamper switch installed in the module enclosure, the control panel can create a tamper event when the enclosure door is opened, or when the enclosure is removed from the wall. RPS Menu Location SDI2 modules > B308 Octo-output > Enclosure Tamper 14.3 (B42x) IP Communicator Connecting the B42x 1. Connect the module to the SDI2 bus. 2. Set the module's rotary switch to Address 1. 3. Connect the module to the control panel. Configuring the module When installing a B42x IP Communicator, set the available configuration parameters properly to ensure proper module operation. The B426 Ethernet Communication Module is used to connect to the control panel over an Ethernet network. Typical uses include PC front-end (automation) software packages, network RPS connection for off-site programming, diagnostic troubleshooting, central station receiver reporting, and history retrieval. Module bus supervision is enforced when the SDI2 communication module is used in a central station reporting route. You can use one or both B426/B450 communication modules for central station reporting or RPS communications. Optionally, you can use one of the B42x modules for communication with automation software. While in this mode, you cannot use the module to communicate with RPS nor with the central station. Notice! To prevent communication loss, the configuration sent to the control panel for the B42x module takes effect after RPS disconnects from the control panel. If the module is configured through the B42x configuration web interface to disable control panel programming (that is, Panel Programming Enable is set to No), then RPS programming of the B42x is accepted by the control panel, but not applied to the B42x. The Panel Programming Enable parameter is not available in RPS. 14.3.1 Module Enclosure Tamper Default: No - Disable Selections: Yes - Enable enclosure tamper input No - Disable enclosure tamper input This parameter enables the enclosure tamper switch input on the SDI2 module. When the input is enabled and connected to a Bosch ICP-EZTS tamper switch installed in the module enclosure, the control panel can create a tamper event when the enclosure door is opened, or when the enclosure is removed from the wall. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 232 en | SDI2 modules Control Panel RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B42x IP Communicator > Enclosure Tamper 14.3.2 IPv6 Mode Default: No Selections: – Yes - Enable IPv6 – No - Disable IPv6 (Use IPv4 mode). This parameter configures IP communication for IPv6 (Internet Protocol version 6) or IPv4 (Internet Protocol version 4) When IPv6 Enable is set to Yes, the IPv4 parameters are read only (grayed out and not editable). Set DHCP/AutoIP enable to Yes. When IPv6 Enable is set to No, the IPv6 parameters are read only (grayed out and not editable). RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B42x IP Communicator > IPv6 Mode 14.3.3 IPv4 DHCP/AutoIP Enable Default: Yes Selections: – Yes - enable DHCP to automatically configure the IP Address, IP Default Gateway, and IP DNS Server Address. – No - manually configure the IP Address, IP Default Gateway, and IP DNS Server Address. Use this setting if there is no DHCP service. DHCP enables a computer to be automatically configured which eliminates the need for interaction by a network administrator. DHCP also provides a central database that tracks computers that connect to the network, which prevents two computers from accidentally being configured with the same IP address. AutoIP enables dynamic IP addresses to be assigned to a device when the device is started up. DHCP requires a DHCP server. When this parameter is set to Yes, the IPv4 address, IPv4 Subnet Mask, and IPv4 Default Gateway are grayed out. You cannot change them. When this parameter is set to No, set the IPv6 Mode parameter to No. When the IPv6 Mode parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is not available (grayed out). The parameter has no effect on B450 Plug-in Communicator Interface operation. RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B42x IP Communicator > IPv4 DHCP/AutoIP Enable 14.3.4 IPv4 Address Default: 0.0.0.0 Selections: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 This parameter sets the IPv4 address. If the IPv4 DHCP/Auto IP Enable parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is grayed out (you do not have access to it). If the IPv4 DHCP/Auto IP Enable parameter is set to No, enter the IPv4 address here. Further Information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 This parameter has no effect on B450 Plug-in Communicator Interface operation. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel SDI2 modules | en 233 RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B42x IP Communicator > IPv4 address 14.3.5 IPv4 Subnet Mask Default: 255.255.255.0 Selections: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 This parameter sets the address for the IPv4 Subnet Mask. If the IPv4 DHCP/Auto IP Enable parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is grayed out (you do not have access to it). If the IPv4 DHCP/Auto IP Enable parameter is set to No, enter the IPv4 sub-network mask here. Subnetting breaks the network into more efficient subnets to prevent the excessive rates of packet collision in a large network. A significant feature of subnets is the subnet mask. Applying a subnet mask to an IP address allows control panels to more efficiently identify the network and node parts of the address. Further information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 The parameter has no effect on B450 Plug-in Communicator Interface operation. RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B42x IP Communicator > IPv4 Subnet Mask 14.3.6 IPv4 Default Gateway Default: 0.0.0.0 Selections: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 This parameter sets the address for the local network gateway to the internet or intranet. If the IPv4 DHCP/Auto IP Enable parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is grayed out (you do not have access to it). If the IPv4 DHCP/Auto IP Enable parameter is set to No, enter the Default Gateway address here. A gateway is an address on a TCP/IP network that serves as an entrance to another network. A host uses a default gateway when an IP packet's destination is outside the local subnet. The default gateway address is usually an interface belonging to a LAN's border router. Further information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 The parameter has no effect on B450 Plug-in Communicator Interface operation. RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B42x IP Communicator > IPv4 default gateway 14.3.7 IPv4 DNS Server IP Address Default: 0.0.0.0 Selections: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 This parameter sets the IPv4 DNS server address in Static IP mode. A Domain Name Server (DNS) converts internet domain names or hostnames to their corresponding IP addresses. In DHCP mode, the DHCP server’s default DNS is used. To use a custom DNS server in DHCP mode, change this parameter to the custom DNS server’s IP address. Further information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 234 en | SDI2 modules Control Panel RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B42x IP Communicator > IPv4 DNS server IP address 14.3.8 IPv6 DNS Server IP Address Default: :: Selections: 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000 to FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF This parameter configures the IPv6 DNS server address in Static IP mode. A Domain Name Server (DNS) converts internet domain names or hostnames to their corresponding IP addresses. In DHCP mode, the DHCP server’s default DNS is used. To use a custom DNS server in DHCP mode, change the parameter to the custom DNS server’s IP address. When this address is set by the DHCP service, do not change it. This IPv6 DNS server address is the only IPv6 address entered as numbers. Further information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B42x IP Communicator > IPv6 DNS server IP address 14.3.9 UPnP (Universal Plug and Play) Enable Default: Yes Selections: – Yes – open port forwarder using UPnP – No – do not use UPnP. When this parameter is set to Yes, the control panel sends a request to the premises router to open a port forwarder. The port forward allows inbound RPS and RSC (Remote Security Control) connections. The UPnP parameter has no effect on event reporting to a central station receiver. Notice! UPnP requires IP Address / Host Name and Panel Port be configured In the Panel Data – View, Network tab, verify that the IP Address / Host Name and Panel Port parameters are configured. The UPnP parameter has no effect on B450 Plug-in Communicator Interface operation. RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B42x IP Communicator > UPnP enable 14.3.10 HTTP Port Number Default: 80 Selections: 1 to 65535 This parameter allows the configuration of the web server port number. When TLS Enhanced Security is enabled, HTTPS is applied. The default value for HTTPS is 443. If enhanced security is not enabled, the HTTP value is applied. RPS Menu Location SDI2 Modules > IP Communicator > HTTP Port Number 14.3.11 ARP Cache Timeout (sec.) Default: 600 Selections: 1 to 600 (seconds) 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel SDI2 modules | en 235 This parameter specifies the time-out for ARP cache entries (time-out value in seconds). The parameter has no effect on B450 Plug-in Communicator Interface operation. RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B42x IP Communicator > ARP cache timeout 14.3.12 Web/USB Access Enable Default: No Selections: Yes/No This parameter enables authorized users to view and modify the B42x configuration parameters through a standard web browser. RPS Menu Location SDI2 Modules > IP Communicator > Web/USB access Enable. 14.3.13 Web/USB Access Password Default: B42V2 Selections: blank, ASCII printable characters This parameter sets the password required to log in for web access. The password must be 4-10 ASCII printable characters in length. Blank spaces disable the password checking. RPS Menu Location SDI2 > IP Communicator > Web Access Password 14.3.14 Firmware Upgrade Enable Default: No Selections: Yes - modify the firmware through the web interface. No -modify the firmware through the control panel. This parameter allow the B42x modules’s firmware to be modified via the external Web interface. RPS Menu Location SDI2 Modules > IP Communicator > Firmware Upgrade Enable 14.3.15 Module Hostname Default: Blank Selections: Up to sixty-three characters (letters, numbers, and dashes) The hostname indentifies the ip communicator (onboard or SDI2 module) on the network. Use this parameter to create a custom hostname. Notice! Leave this parameter blank to use factory default hostname The factory default hostname begins with the letter B, followed by the last six digits of the modules MAC address. Use RPS diagnostics or installer (keypad) diagnostics to view the hostname. Use the hostname on a local network using DHCP. To use the hostname externally, you must enter the hostname in the DNS server. You can use the hostname to connect to the control panel with RPS or RSC (Remote Security Control), or for module web configuration and diagnostics. The parameter has no effect on B450 Plug-in Communicator Interface operation. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 236 en | SDI2 modules Control Panel RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B42x IP Communicator > Module Hostname 14.3.16 Unit Description Default: Blank Selections: Up to twenty alphanumeric characters. This parameter describes the B42xmodule (location, attributes, etc.). The description can be programmed with up to twenty alphanumeric characters, including: A to Z, 0 to 9, ?, &, @, -, *, +, $, #, / Characters not listed are invalid and cannot be used for text. RPS Menu Location SDI2 Modules > IP Communicator > Unit Description. 14.3.17 TCP/UDP Port Number Default: 7700 Selections: 0 - 65535 This parameter sets the local port number that the IP communicator listens to in-coming network traffic. It also uses this port for outgoing communications. The TCP/UDP Port is typically left at the default, 7700, for control panel communications with a central station receiver, RPS, automation, or Remote Security Control (RSC). Port numbers are categorized into three ranges: System ports 0-1023 User ports 1024-49151 Dynamic or private ports 49152-65535 Notice! Limit unwanted traffic, choose a port number greater than 1023 In order reduce the risk of unwanted network traffic interfering with control panel IP communications, select a port number above 1023. RPS Menu Location SDI2 Modules > IP Communicator > TCP/UDP Port Number 14.3.18 TCP Keep Alive Time Default: 45 Selections: 0 - 65 (seconds) This parameter sets the time in seconds between TCP keep-alive transmissions to verify that an idle connection is still active. The parameter has no effect on B450 Plug-in Communicator Interface operation. RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B42x IP Communicator > TCP keep alive time 14.3.19 IPv4 Test Address Default: 8.8.8.8 Selections: IPv4 address or Domain Name The default test address works for most networks. The control panel uses the IP communicator to ping the IPv4 Test Address to verify the integrity of the network and the network configuration settings. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel SDI2 modules | en 237 RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B42x IP Communicator > IPv4 Test Address 14.3.20 IPv6 Test Address Default: 2001:4860:4860::8888 Selections: IPv6 address or Domain Name The default test address works for most networks. This parameter is only available when IPv6 Mode is set to Yes. The control panel uses the IP communicator to ping the IPv4 Test Address to verify the integrity of the network and the network configuration settings. Further information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B42x IP Communicator > IPv6 test address 14.3.21 Web and Automation Security Default: Enable Selections: – Disable - enhanced security is not applied. – Enable - enhanced security is applied. Set this parameter to Enable for enhanced security for Automation and B42x Web Access. When enabled, HTTPS is applied to B42x Web Access changing the default value of the HTTP Port Number, page 234 parameter. This setting also enables TLS Security for Automation. RPS Menu Location SDI2 > IP Communicator > Web and Automation Security 14.3.22 Alternate IPv4 DNS server IP address Default: 0.0.0.0 Selections: 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 This parameter provides an alternate IPv4 DNS server IP address. If the IP communicator fails to obtain an address from the primary server, it tries the alternate DNS server. Further information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B42x IP Communicator > Alternate IPv4 DNS server IP address 14.3.23 Alternate IPv6 DNS server IP address Default: :: Selections: 0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000 to FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF:FFFF This parameter provides an alternate IPv6 DNS server IP address. The Alternate IPv6 Domain Name Server (DNS) address has a hexadecimal notation, which consists of the eight groups of the address expressed separately in hexadecimal and separated by colons. Each group has a value between 0000-FFFF. When this is defined through the DHCP service, leave the default value. If the module fails to obtain an address from the primary server, the Alternate IPV6 DNS server is used, if specified. The module can use the Alternate IPv6 DNS server only when the Primary address is not the default address. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 238 en | SDI2 modules Control Panel Further information IP Address and Domain Name formats, page 254 RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B42x IP Communicator > Alternate IPv6 DNS server IP address 14.4 B450 cellular 14.4.1 Inbound SMS Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: Yes Selections: Yes - Enabled No - Disabled This parameter enables an RPS user to start a control panel initiated download with an SMS message. RPS menu location SDI2 modules > IP Communicator > B450 Cellular > Inbound SMS 14.4.2 Session Keep Alive Period (min.) Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: 0 Selections: 0 to 1000 (minutes) – 0 - Disabled. Panel does not verify the connection is active. – 1 to 1000 - Enabled. Panel verifies an active connection exists. This parameter sets the length of time in minutes between session keep alive reports to verify that an idle connection is still active. This parameter is pre-configured for optimal performance. Leave at the default setting. Default settings should only be changed for high security UL1610 commercial listed installations requiring low signal notification. RPS menu location SDI2 modules > IP Communicator > B450 Cellular > Session keep alive period 14.4.3 Inactivity Time Out (min.) Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel SDI2 modules | en 239 Default: 0 Selections: 0 to 1000 (minutes) – 0 - Disabled. Panel does not verify the connection is active. – 1 to 1000 - Enabled. Panel verifies an active connection exists. This parameter specifies the time before the control panel will disconnect a session with no data traffic. This parameter is pre-configured for optimal performance. Leave at the default setting. Default settings should only be changed for high security UL1610 commercial listed installations requiring low signal notification. RPS menu location SDI2 modules > IP Communicator > B450 Cellular > Inbound SMS 14.4.4 Reporting Delay for Low Signal Strength (sec.) Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: 0 Selections: 0-3600 (seconds) – 0 - Disabled. – 1 to 3600 - seconds of delay before Cellular Low Signal event. Notice! UL Requirement To meet UL requirements, the entry for this parameter should not exceed 200 seconds. The control panel creates a Cellular Low Signal event when the signal strength is below the "unacceptable" threshold (indicated by the red LED) for the number of seconds specified in this Reporting Delay for Low Signal Strength parameter. (Low signal is defined as 80% of the measurements taken during the time period are below the threshold). The control panel creates a Cellular Low Signal Restoral event when the signal strength is above the "good" threshold (indicated by the green LED) for the number of seconds specified in this Reporting Delay for Low Signal Strength parameter. (Good signal is defined as 80% of the measurements taken during the time period are above the threshold). RPS menu location SDI2 modules > IP Communicator > B450 Cellular > Reporting delay for low signal strength 14.4.5 Reporting Delay for Single Tower (sec.) Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: 1800 Selections: 0-3600 (seconds) – 0 - Disabled. – 1 to 3600 (seconds) Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 240 en | SDI2 modules Control Panel Leave this parameter at the default setting unless otherwise instructed by a Bosch Security Systems, Inc. representative. The control panel creates a Single Tower event when only a single tower has been available for the number of seconds set at this parameter. The control panel creates a Single Tower restoral event when two or more towers are available for the number of seconds set at this parameter. RPS menu location SDI2 modules > IP Communicator > B450 Cellular > Reporting delay for single tower 14.4.6 Reporting Delay for No Towers (sec.) Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: 0 Selections: 0-3600 (seconds) – 0 - Disabled. – 1 to 3600 - Enabled. When there are no towers present the control panel starts two timers, one for a No Towers event, one for a No IP Address event. The control panel uses the duration set by this Reporting Delay for No Tower parameter for both timers. If the cellular plug-in module does not find a tower before the end of the delay, the control panel creates a No Towers event and a No IP Address event at the same time. The control panel creates a No Tower restoral event when one or more towers are available for the duration set by this Reporting Delay for No Tower parameter. The contro panel creates a No IP Address restoral event when the cellular plug-in module successfully registers with one or more towers and receives an IP address. Notice! When one or more towers are available, 60 second delay for No IP Address event If the cellular plug-in module successfully registers with one or more towers, but does not receive an IP address within 60 seconds, the control panel creates a No IP Address event. RPS menu location SDI2 modules > IP Communicator > B450 Cellular > Reporting delay for no towers 14.4.7 Outgoing SMS Length Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: 0 Selections: 0-3600 (seconds) – 0 - Disabled. – 1 to 3600 - Enabled. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel SDI2 modules | en 241 When there are no towers present the control panel starts two timers, one for a No Towers event, one for a No IP Address event. The control panel uses the duration set by this Reporting Delay for No Tower parameter for both timers. If the cellular plug-in module does not find a tower before the end of the delay, the control panel creates a No Towers event and a No IP Address event at the same time. The control panel creates a No Tower restoral event when one or more towers are available for the duration set by this Reporting Delay for No Tower parameter. The contro panel creates a No IP Address restoral event when the cellular plug-in module successfully registers with one or more towers and receives an IP address. Notice! When one or more towers are available, 60 second delay for No IP Address event If the cellular plug-in module successfully registers with one or more towers, but does not receive an IP address within 60 seconds, the control panel creates a No IP Address event. RPS menu location SDI2 modules > IP Communicator > B450 Cellular > Reporting delay for no towers 14.4.8 SIM PIN Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: Blank Selections: 4-8 numbers This is an optional parameter. This parameter is only necessary if the SIM card uses a PIN for security. The SIM PIN is hidden on the display and appears as asterisks (********) when entered. If an invalid SIM PIN is entered, an event is logged in history. A report is sent only if the report function is enabled. If no SIM PIN is required, you can leave the field blank. RPS menu location SDI2 modules > IP Communicator > B450 Cellular > SIM PIN 14.4.9 Network Access Point Name (APN) Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: wyless.apn Selections: 0-99 ASCII characters This parameter sets the IP address for the network access point. Enter up to 99 alphanumeric characters. The field is case sensitive. RPS menu location SDI2 modules > IP Communicator > B450 Cellular > Network access point name (APN) Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 242 en | SDI2 modules 14.4.10 Control Panel Network Access Point User Name Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: Blank Selections: 0-30 ASCII characters This parameter specifies the user name for the Network Access Point. Enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters. The field is case sensitive. RPS menu location SDI2 modules > IP Communicator > B450 Cellular > Network access point user name 14.4.11 Network Access Point Password Notice! Important configuration information for cellular communication Refer to Configuring for Cellular Service, page 252 for an overview and configuration information. Default: Blank Selections: 0-30 ASCII characters This parameter sets the password required to access the Network Access Point. Enter up to 30 alpha-numeric characters. The password is case sensitive. RPS menu location SDI2 modules > IP Communicator > B450 Cellular > Network access point password 14.5 B520 aux power supply The B520 Auxiliary Power Supply is a device that attaches to the SDI2 bus of the control panel. It provides a supervised 12 Volt DC 2.5 Amp auxiliary power supply. Each power supply might support 2 separate 12V nominal lead acid batteries with a capacity of 7-18 Ah. Settings RPS supports the configuration of the Enclosure Tamper, page 230 on each of the Power Supply modules. Yes = Enable enclosure tamper, No = Disable enclosure tamper. Default setting is No. RPS supports the configuration of the Module Enable, page 243 on each of the Power Supply modules. Yes = Enable module supervision, No = Disable module supervision. Default setting is No. RPS supports the configuration of the One or Two Batteries, page 243 on each of the Power Supply modules. Switch Settings Ref. Hardware Switch Settings > SDI2 Devices > B520 Power Supply switch settings, page 251 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel 14.5.1 SDI2 modules | en 243 Module Enable Default: No Selections: Yes or No Yes Supervise the SDI2 module. No Do not supervise the SDI2 module. This parameter indicates to the control panel if the SDI2 module should be supervised. RPS Menu Location SD12 > B520 Power Supply > Module Enable 14.5.2 Module Enclosure Tamper Default: No - Disable Selections: Yes - Enable enclosure tamper input No - Disable enclosure tamper input This parameter enables the enclosure tamper switch input on the SDI2 module. When the input is enabled and connected to a Bosch ICP-EZTS tamper switch installed in the module enclosure, the control panel can create a tamper event when the enclosure door is opened, or when the enclosure is removed from the wall. RPS Menu Location SDI2 > B520 Aux Power Supply > Enclosure Tamper 14.5.3 One or Two Batteries Default: One Selections: One or Two This parameter specifies if 1 or 2 backup batteries are installed with the Auxiliary Power Supply module. RPS Menu Location SDI2 Modules > B520 Aux Power Supply > One or Two Batteries 14.6 Wireless Receiver The SDI2 bus of the control panel supports the B820 Inovonics SDI2 Wireless Interface Module. The B820 module provides the ability to use wireless key fobs, repeaters and points with the control panel. Capacity The control panel supports two types of SDI2 wireless interface modules: B810 RADION Wireless B820 Inovonics Wireless You can use only one wireless module at a time. All points, repeaters and key fobs must be the same type. RADION limits: Keyfobs - 1000 Points - 504 Repeaters - 8 RPS displays a warning message when you reach these limits. To add another device of that type, delete one or more of the existing devices. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 244 en | SDI2 modules Control Panel Notice! Choose the type of wireless module before you add any points, users or repeaters to the system. When you change wireless types, RPS resets all RF information to factory defaults. All previously configured RF information is erased. Settings RPS supports the configuration of the Enclosure Tamper, page 230 on each of the Wireless Receiver modules. RPS supports the configuration of the global System (Repeater) Supervision Time, page 245 for devices configured to report to the Wireless Receiver. RPS supports the configuration of the Low Battery Resound, page 245 on each of the Wireless Receiver modules. Switch Settings Refer to B810/B820 Hardware switch settings, page 248 14.6.1 Wireless Module Type Default: B810 RADION Wireless Selections: – Unassigned – B810 RADION Wireless – B820 Inovonics Wireless This parameter configures the system for either a RADION or an Inovonics wireless module. Unassigned. You cannot use a wireless device. Wireless is not a valid selection for the Point Source parameter for any point. You cannot enroll RF Keyfobs for any user. B820 Inovonics Wireless limits: Devices - 350 (not including repeaters) Repeaters - 4 You can assign Inovonics wireless devices to points. You can assign Inovonics keyfobs to users. B810 RADION Wireless limits: Keyfobs - 1000 Points - 504 (valid point numbers: 9 to 96) Repeaters - 8 When these limits are reached, RPS shows a warning message. To add another device of that type, delete one or more of the existing devices. RPS Menu Location SDI2 Modules > Wireless Receiver > Wireless Module Type 14.6.2 Module Enclosure Tamper Default: No - Disable Selections: Yes - Enable enclosure tamper input No - Disable enclosure tamper input This parameter enables the enclosure tamper switch input on the SDI2 module. When the input is enabled and connected to a Bosch ICP-EZTS tamper switch installed in the module enclosure, the control panel can create a tamper event when the enclosure door is opened, or when the enclosure is removed from the wall. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel SDI2 modules | en 245 RPS Menu Location SDI2 > Wireless Receiver > Enclosure Tamper 14.6.3 System (Repeater) Supervision Time Default: 12 hours Selections: – None - Disable wireless repeater supervision. – 4, 12, 24, 48, 72 hours This parameter sets the supervision time for all configured wireless repeaters. If the wireless receiver does not hear from a repeater within the number of hours set by this parameter, the control panel creates a missing repeater event. Notice! Wireless Point Supervision Time Configure the wireless supervision time for non-fire points using the parameter Point Profiles / Wireless Point Supervision Time, page 194. The wireless point supervision time for fire points is fixed at 4 hours. Notice! Wireless Keyfob Supervision Time Enable or disable wireless supervision time for wireless keyfobs using the parameter User Assignments / Supervised, page 143. When supervision is enabled, the wireless keyfob supervision time is fixed at 4 hours. RPS Menu Location SDI2 > Wireless Receiver > System Supervision Time 14.6.4 Low Battery Resound Default: Never Resound Selections: Never Resound, 4 hours, 24 hours This parameter is global for all non-fire points. The control panel automatically fixes the Low Battery Resound at 24 hours for fire points. RPS Menu Location SDI2 Modules > Wireless Receiver > Low Battery Resound 14.6.5 Enable Jamming Detection Default: Yes Selections: Yes / No This parameter setting turns on or off the reporting of interference to the control panel. The B810 RADION wireless module detects RF jamming (interference) when it is present. You can use jamming Detection can be disabled for the B810 RADION Wireless module. The B820 Inovonics Wireless module also detects RF jamming (interference) when it is present. Jamming Detection annot be disabled for the B820 Inovonics Wireless module. RPS Menu Location SDI2 Modules > Wireless Receiver > Enable Jamming Detection 14.7 Wireless Repeater The wireless repeater modules are independent of the SDI2 bus. You can use a wireless repeater to extend the range of the B820 Inovonics SDI2 Wireless Interface Module for an installation site. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 246 en | SDI2 modules Control Panel Capacity The control panel supports two types of SDI2 wireless interface modules: – B810 RADION Wireless – B820 Inovonics Wireless The type of wireless repeater must match the type of receiver. Choose the type of wireless receiver before you configure any repeaters. The control panel supports up to 8 repeaters simultaneously. All repeaters must be the same type. Settings You can configure the Enclosure Tamper on each of the wireless repeater modules. Yes (default) = Enable enclosure tamper No = Disable enclosure tamper. You can configure the RFID for each of the Wireless Repeater modules. There are no hardware switches on a wireless repeater. The location of the RFID within the configuration table determines the wireless repeater number. Notes Even though RPS lists the Wireless Repeater configuration under the SDI2 Modules heading, wireless repeaters are not physically connected to the SDI2 bus. You must configure a wireless interface module as part of the system. 14.7.1 Module Enclosure Tamper Default: No - Disable Selections: Yes - Enable enclosure tamper input No - Disable enclosure tamper input This parameter enables the enclosure tamper switch input on the SDI2 module. When the input is enabled and connected to a Bosch ICP-EZTS tamper switch installed in the module enclosure, the control panel can create a tamper event when the enclosure door is opened, or when the enclosure is removed from the wall. RPS Menu Location SDI2 > Wireless Repeater > Enclosure Tamper 14.7.2 RADION RFID (B810) Default: 0 Selection: 0, 11 - 167772156 This parameter provides a unique way for the Wireless Receiver and Wireless Repeaters to identify what device is transmitting. The Radio Frequency device Identification number (RFID) is a unique number assigned to a wireless device at the factory. Since the Wireless Repeater is a receiver as well as a transmitter it also is assigned an RFID so that the Wireless Receiver can determine what Repeater is transmitting. This RFID number is located on the label that is affixed to the device. The label location might differ for each RF device. RADION supports up to 1000 keyfobs. Keyfobs can be assigned to any user # between 1-2000, but cannot exceed more than 1000 devices in total. RPS Menu Location SDI2 Modules > Wireless Repeater > RFID (B810 RADION Wireless) 14.7.3 Inovonics RFID (B820) Default: N/A Range: 0 - 99999999 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel SDI2 modules | en 247 This parameter provides a unique way for the Wireless Receiver and Wireless Repeaters to identify what device is transmitting. The RFID (Radio Frequency device Identification number) is a unique number assigned to a wireless device at the factory. Since the Wireless Repeater is a receiver as well as a transmitter it also is assigned an RFID so that the Wireless Receiver can determine what Repeater is transmitting. This RFID number is located on the label that is affixed to the device. The label location might differ for each RF device. RPS Menu Location SDI2 Modules > Wireless Repeater > RFID (B820 Inovonics Wireless) Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 248 en | Hardware switch settings Control Panel 15 Hardware switch settings 15.1 Keypad address B91x Basic Keypad address switch settings Address 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 5 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF 6 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF 7 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF 8 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 9 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF 10 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF 11 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF 12 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF 13 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF 14 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF 15 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 16 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 17 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF 18 OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF 19 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF 20 OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF 21 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 22 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF 23 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF 24 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF 25 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF 26 OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF 27 ON ON OFF ON ON OFF 28 OFF OFF ON ON ON OFF 29 ON OFF ON ON ON OFF Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Hardware switch settings | en 249 Address Switches 1 2 3 4 5 6 30 OFF ON ON ON ON OFF 31 ON ON ON ON ON OFF 32 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON B92x Two-line Keypad / B93x ATM Style Keypad address switch settings Set the address switches per the control panel configuration. If multiple SDI2 keypads reside on the same system, each SDI2 keypad must have a unique address. For single-digit addresses 1 through 9, set the tens switch to 0. The figure below shows the address switch setting for address 1. B94x Touch Screen Keypad address switch settings To set the address, use the up and down arrows on the right of the switches image to change the ones digit, and the arrows on the left to change the tens digit. Press the diagonal arrow under the switches to save the setting and return to the power up screen. 15.2 B208 Octo-input Module switch settings This table describes the relationship between the module switch settings and the point address range that corresponds to the setting. The values of point range listed in this table references back to POINTS > Point Assignments. The B6512 supports up to 9 B208 Octo-input modules. The B5512 supports up to 4 modules. The B4512 supports up to 2 modules. The B3512 does not support the B208 module. Terminate unused B208 inputs with an EOL resistor. B208 address number B6512 point numbers B5512 point numbers B4512 point numbers 1 11 - 18 11 - 18 11 - 18 2 21 - 28 21 - 28 21 - 28 3 31 - 38 31 - 38 4 41 - 48 41 - 48 5 51 - 58 6 61 - 68 7 71 - 78 8 81 - 88 9 91 - 96 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 250 en | Hardware switch settings 15.3 Control Panel B308 Octo-output Module switch settings This table describes the relationship between the module switch settings and the output number range that corresponds to the setting. The 65512 supports up to 9 B308 Octo-output modules. The B5512 supports up to 5 modules. The B4512 supports up to 3 modules. The B3512 does not support the B308 module. B308 address number B6512 output 15.4 B5512 output B4512 output numbers numbers numbers 1 11 - 18 11 - 18 11 - 18 2 21 - 28 21 - 28 21 - 28 3 31 - 38 31 - 38 31 - 38 4 41 - 48 41 - 48 5 51 - 58 51 - 58 5 51 - 58 6 61 - 68 7 71 - 78 8 81 - 88 B426 Ethernet Communication Module switch settings This table describes the relationship between the module switch settings and type of control panel communication that corresponds to the setting. B426 switch setting Address Bus type 0 Function Local configuration setting (default setting) 1 1 (173) SDI2 Automation or RPS reporting 15.5 B450 Cellular Module switch settings This table describes the relationship between the module switch settings and type of control panel communication that corresponds to the setting. B450 switch setting Address Bus type 0 Function Local configuration setting (default setting) 1 1 (173) SDI2 Automation or RPS reporting 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel 15.6 Hardware switch settings | en 251 B520 Power Supply switch settings The rotary address switch range for the B520 Power Supply is between 1 and 4 for the B5512, between 1 and 2 for the B4512, and 1 for the B3512 control panels. Address ranges 00 and 05-99 are not valid on the SDI2 device bus. The factory default setting is 01. When using more than one power supply, assign each power supply a different switch setting. Valid B520 switch settings 01 02 03 04 15.7 B810 RADION wireless receiver switch settings B810 and B820 address switches provide a single-digit setting for the module’s address. The module uses address 1. Addresses 0 and 2 through 9 are invalid. 15.8 B820 Inovonics wireless receiver switch settings The B820 Inovonics address switches provide a single-digit setting for the module’s address. The module uses addresses 1 through 4. Addresses 0 and 5 through 9 are invalid. Only address 1 is valid for these control panels. 15.9 B901 Access Module switch settings Two address switches determine the address for the B901 Access Control Module. The control panel uses the address for communications. Use a slotted screwdriver to set the address switches. Address Designation 0,0 Disabled 0,1 to 0,4 Doors 1 through 4 Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 252 en | Configuring for Cellular Service 16 Control Panel Configuring for Cellular Service Sign-up for Bosch Cellular Service first Before you can utilize cellular communication for reporting, personal notifications, RPS connections, or RSC connections you need to register for Bosch Cellular Service at the Bosch Installer Services Portal, https://installerservices.boschsecurity.com/. Configure RPS for cellular service Configuring RPS for cellular service is quick and easy using the Configuration Assistant. Click Config to open the Configuration menu. Select Open Configuration Assistant. Figure 16.1: Configuration Assistant If you choose not to use not to use the Configuration Assistant, follow the steps below to configure RPS for cellular service. 1. Click Config to open the Configuration menu. Click System. 2. Click the Connectivity tab. 3. Click Cellular. 4. If you will connect from the internet to the panel using cellular IP over a PPTP VPN (a login is provided with Bosch Cellular), click the VPN tab. This one-time setup automates the PPTP VPN login and connection from the Connect window in RPS. The VPN client (or Windows VPN) must be setup on your PC before RPS can use it. This setup is not required if your network is configured for always-on IPSec VPN connection to the network provider. For instructions on setting up Windows VPN, refer to the Bosch Cellular Services User Guide located at http://www.conettix.com/Downloads.aspx. Configure the control panel account for cellular service Configuring a control panel account for cellular service is quick and easy using the Account Assistant. In the Panel List, right-click the panel account you want to configure for cellular service, then click Open Account Assistant. 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Control Panel Configuring for Cellular Service | en 253 Figure 16.2: Open Account Assistant If you choose not to use not to use the Account Assistant, follow the steps below to configure a control panel account for cellular service. 1. In the Panel List, right-click the panel account you want to configure for cellular service, then click Open Panel Data - View. 2. Click the Cellular tab. 3. Press F1 to open the help for the Cellular tab. 4. Follow the instructions to enter information in the Cellular Connectivity fields. RPS uses the SIM or radio MEID number to retrieve and store the assigned IP address, phone number and assigned plan. 5. Click Show Plans, and then click Plan Help. Select an appropriate plan to avoid overage fees. 6. Click OK when you're finished. You're back to the Panel List. 7. To set panel parameters, in the Panel List, right-click the panel account you clicked in step 1, then click Open Panel View. 8. Panel Wide Parameters > Cellular Plug-in Module, page 36: leave the parameters here at their defaults. Only change for UL1610 commercial listed installations requiring low signal notification. 9. Panel Wide Parameters > Communicator, overview, page 58 > Primary Destination Device (Backup Destination Device): to send reports for a Route Group via a cellular communicator, select a (Plug-in) Cellular Destination as the Primary (or Backup) Destination. 10. Panel Wide Parameters > Enhanced Communication, page 62: set reporting Destinations, and polling/supervision settings here. Be sure cellular polling rates follow recommended settings and align with your cellular plan. 11. Panel Wide Parameters > Personal Notification > Personal Notification Destinations, page 84: set phone numbers for SMS messages, email addresses for email messages. Set Method to Plug in Cellular SMS, Bus Device Cellular SMS, Plug in Cellular Email, or Bus Device Email. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Program Entry Guide 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 254 en | IP Address and Domain Name formats 17 Control Panel IP Address and Domain Name formats IPv4 Address Format IPv4 addresses are in ASCII decimal format, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx = 0 to 255). The four octets (xxx) of the address are separated by periods. Correct: 12.3.145.251 Incorrect: C.17.91.FB IPv6 Address Format IPv6 addresses consist of eight groups of 4 hexadecimal digits separated by colons, xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx:xxxx, x = 0 to F. Fully Qualified Domain Name Format The fully qualified domain name defines the exact address of a device in the Domain Name System (DNS) hierarchy. This includes the unique hostname of the device and the subnet on which the device is located, separated by periods. Example: receiver01.your-alarm-company.com Each label within the name must comply with RFC-921, "Domain Name System Implementation Schedule". Only the letters (A-Z), numbers (0-9), and the minus sign (-) are allowed in the text labels in the fully qualified domain name. The period (.) is only allowed to delimit text labels that comprise the fully qualified domain name. Before entering a fully qualified domain name, be sure the device being addressed has its name properly registered with the DNS servers available to the IP communicator. This can be verified using a ping tool. Additional Information Information on Hostnames and fully qualified Domain Name formats can be found on the "The Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF)" website http://www.ietf.org/ 2017.03 | 03 | F.01U.323.389 Program Entry Guide Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Bosch Security Systems, Inc. Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH 130 Perinton Parkway Robert-Bosch-Ring 5 Fairport, NY 14450 85630 Grasbrunn USA Germany www.boschsecurity.com © Bosch Security Systems, Inc., 2017
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf Linearized : No Page Count : 256 Page Mode : UseOutlines PDF Version : 1.4 Title : F01U323389-03_B6512_PEG Creator : SCHEMA ST4 Producer : ST4 PDF Engine (Build 5.0.2.4) Create Date : 2017:03:16 16:28:23+01:00 Modify Date : 2017:03:16 16:28:23+01:00EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools